Mercedes Glc Suv 2017 x253 Owners Manual 1

Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner’s Man-

ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specific differences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
fitted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner’s
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner’s Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner’s Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er’s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans-
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
Your Owner's Manuals
Digital - in the vehicle

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's
multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Printed manual - in the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Owner's Manual, you can obtain the complete multimedia
system Supplement from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Digital - on the Internet

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital - as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
GLC
Owner's Manual
GLC Owner's Manual
É2535843803Z102BËÍ
2535843803Z102
Order no. P253 0471 02 Part no. 253 584 38 03 Z102 Edition AEJ2017-1a
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols Publication details
In this manual, you will find the following sym- Internet
bols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
life, or to the health and life of others.
http://www.daimler.com
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Editorial office
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Owner's
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- Manual to the technical documentation team at
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi- the following address:
cle. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
i These symbols indicate useful instructions 70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
or further information that could be helpful to
you. otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
X This symbol designates an
instruction that you must fol-
low.
X Several consecutive sym- Vehicle manufacturer
bols indicate an instruction
with several steps. Daimler AG
(Y This symbol tells you where Mercedesstraße 137
page) you can find further informa- 70327 Stuttgart
tion on a topic. Germany
YY This symbol indicates a
warning or an instruction
that is continued on the next
page.
Dis‐ This text indicates a mes-
play sage on the multifunction
display/multimedia display.
As at 03.11.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off for the first time, read this
Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise your-
self with your vehicle. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Disregarding
them may result in damage to the vehicle or
personal injury.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry variant
RAvailability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-
drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the
layout of components and controls differs
accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
Consequently, the description may differ from
your vehicle in some cases.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
RDigital Owner's Manual
RPrinted Owner's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App

may not yet be available in your country.
2535843803Z102 É2535843803Z102BËÍ
2 Contents
Index ....................................................... 4 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 121

Exterior lighting ................................... 121
Interior lighting .................................... 127
Digital Owner's Manual ...................... 28
Replacing bulbs ................................... 128
Introduction ........................................... 28
Windscreen wipers .............................. 131
Operation ............................................... 28
Climate control ................................. 136

Introduction ......................................... 29
Overview of climate control systems ... 136
Environmental protection ...................... 29
Operating the climate control sys-
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 29
tems .................................................... 138
Owner's Manual ..................................... 30
Air vents .............................................. 150
Operating safety .................................... 30
QR code for rescue card ........................ 33
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 33 Driving and parking .......................... 152
Copyright information ............................ 35 Running-in notes .................................. 152
Driving ................................................. 152
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 161
At a glance ........................................... 36
Automatic transmission ....................... 163
Cockpit .................................................. 36
Refuelling ............................................. 172
Instrument cluster ................................. 38
Parking ................................................ 178
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 39
Driving tips .......................................... 181
Centre console ...................................... 40
Driving systems ................................... 188
Overhead control panel ......................... 43
Towing a trailer .................................... 235
Door control panel ................................. 44
Bicycle rack ......................................... 242
Safety ................................................... 45
On-board computer and displays .... 245
Panic alarm ............................................ 45
Important safety notes ........................ 245
Occupant safety .................................... 45
Displays and operation ........................ 245
Children in the vehicle ........................... 60
Menus and submenus ......................... 249
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 71
Display messages ................................ 265
Driving safety systems ........................... 72
Warning and indicator lamps on the
Protection against theft ......................... 82
instrument cluster ............................... 298
Opening and closing ........................... 85

Multimedia system ........................... 310
Key ........................................................ 85
General notes ...................................... 310
Doors ..................................................... 91
Luggage compartment ........................... 93
Function restrictions ............................ 310
Side windows ......................................... 98
Operating system ................................ 310
Panorama sliding sunroof .................... 102
Stowing and features ....................... 323

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 107
Stowage areas ..................................... 323
Correct driver's seat position .............. 107
Features .............................................. 335
Seats ................................................... 107
Steering wheel ..................................... 114
Mirrors ................................................. 116 Maintenance and care ...................... 344
Memory function ................................. 119 Engine compartment ........................... 344
Contents 3
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 349

Care ..................................................... 350
Breakdown assistance ..................... 357

Where will I find...? .............................. 357
Flat tyre ............................................... 360
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 364
Jump-starting ....................................... 367
Towing away and tow-starting ............. 369
Fuses ................................................... 373
Wheels and tyres .............................. 376

Operation ............................................ 376
Winter operation .................................. 378
Tyre pressure ....................................... 379
Changing a wheel ................................ 385
Wheel/tyre combination ..................... 389
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 390
Technical data ................................... 392

Information on technical data .............. 392
Vehicle electronics .............................. 392
Identification plates ............................. 393
Service products and capacities .......... 394
Vehicle data ......................................... 400
Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 402
Trailer tow hitch ................................... 403
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Function/notes ................................ 80

Important safety notes .................... 80
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Warning lamp ................................. 307
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Active Lane Keeping Assist
tion System) Activating/deactivating (on-
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel board computer) ............................ 258
drive) .................................................. 208 Display message ............................ 285
4MATIC off-road system ................... 208 Function/notes ............................. 233
12 V socket Active light function
see Socket (12 V) Function/notes ............................. 124
230 V power socket .......................... 339 Active Light System
360° camera Display message ............................ 278
Cleaning ......................................... 354 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 79
Display in the multimedia system .. 221 Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ............................. 219 Function/notes ................................ 75
Adaptive brake lights .......................... 75
A Adaptive Damping System
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Function/notes ............................. 207
Display message ............................ 267 Adaptive Damping System with
Function/notes ................................ 72 continuous damping adjustment
Warning lamp ................................. 301 (ADS PLUS) ........................................ 206
Accident Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Automatic measures after an acci- Display message ............................ 279
dent ................................................. 60 Function/notes ............................. 125
Accident warning Switching on/off ........................... 125
see Driving safety system Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Activating media mode Display message ............................ 279
General notes ................................ 321 Function/notes ............................. 126
Activating/deactivating air-recir- Switching on/off ........................... 126
culation mode .................................... 143 AdBlue®
Activating/deactivating cooling Additive ......................................... 398
with air dehumidification ................. 139 Display message ............................ 283
Active Blind Spot Assist Displaying level and range ............. 257
Activating/deactivating (on- Filling capacity ............................... 398
board computer) ............................ 258 Important safety notes .................. 397
Display message ............................ 286 Low outside temperatures ............. 397
Function/notes ............................. 230 Purity ............................................. 398
Active bonnet Topping up ..................................... 175
display message ............................ 295 Additional speedometer ................... 261
Active Brake Assist Additives (engine oil) ........................ 399
Activating or deactivating .............. 258 Address book
Display message ............................ 272 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Function/notes ................................ 73 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 123
Active Brake Assist with cross- Adjusting the volume
traffic function Multimedia system ........................ 311
Activating or deactivating .............. 258 AIR BODY CONTROL
Display message ............................ 273 Display message ............................ 284
Index 5
Function/notes ............................. 204 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 262

Lowering the rear of the vehicle .... 206 Anti-glare film .................................... 343
Raising the rear of the vehicle ....... 207 Anti-lock braking system
Setting the normal vehicle level ..... 206 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Setting the raised vehicle level ...... 205 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Air conditioning see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
General notes ................................ 136 AppCode
Air filter (white display message) .... 283 see QR code
Air suspension Approach/departure angle .............. 187
see AIR BODY CONTROL Aquaplaning ....................................... 184
Air vents Armrest
Important safety notes .................. 150 Stowage compartment .................. 325
Rear ............................................... 150 Ashtray ............................................... 337
Setting ........................................... 150 Assistance display (on-board com-
Setting the centre air vents ........... 150 puter) .................................................. 256
Setting the side air vents ............... 150 Assistance menu (on-board com-
Air-conditioning system puter) .................................................. 257
see Climate control ASSYST PLUS
Airbag Displaying a service message ........ 349
Automatic front-passenger front Driving abroad ............................... 350
airbag deactivation .......................... 53 Hiding a service message .............. 349
Introduction ..................................... 50 Resetting the service interval dis-
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator play ................................................ 349
lamps ............................................... 46 Service message ............................ 349
Warning lamp ................................. 304 Special service requirements ......... 350
Airbags ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Display message ............................ 276 Activating/deactivating ................... 83
Front airbag (driver, front Function ........................................... 83
passenger) ....................................... 51 Switching off the alarm .................... 83
Important safety guidelines ............. 50 ATTENTION ASSIST
Kneebag ........................................... 52 Activating/deactivating ................. 258
Sidebag ............................................ 52 Display message ............................ 284
Triggering ......................................... 57 Displaying the level ........................ 224
Windowbag ...................................... 52 Function/notes ............................. 224
Alarm Authorised workshop
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 83 see Qualified specialist workshop
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 83 AUTO lights
Switching the function on/off Display message ............................ 278
(ATA) ................................................ 83 see Lights
Alarm system Automatic engine start (ECO start/
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) stop function) .................................... 158
All-wheel drive Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
see 4MATIC (permanent four- start/stop function) .......................... 157
wheel drive) Automatic front-passenger front
AMG airbag deactivation
Performance Seat .......................... 112 Display message ............................ 276
switchable performance exhaust
system ........................................... 159
6 Index
Automatic front-passenger front Switching on/off (on the centre

airbag deactivation system console) ......................................... 147
Operation ......................................... 53 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
Problems ......................................... 57 ing) ...................................................... 403
System self-test ............................... 55
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 121 B
Automatic transmission
Back button ....................................... 311
Accelerator pedal position ............. 166
Changing gear ............................... 166 Bag hook ............................................ 329
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 163 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 73
Display message ............................ 293 Battery (key)
Double-clutch function .................. 166 Checking .......................................... 88
Drive program display .................... 165 Important safety notes .................... 88
Drive programs .............................. 167 Replacing ......................................... 88
Driving tips .................................... 166 Battery (vehicle)
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 161 Charging ........................................ 366
Emergency running mode .............. 172 Display message ............................ 281
Engaging drive position .................. 164 Important safety notes .................. 364
Engaging neutral ............................ 164 Jump starting ................................. 367
Engaging park position automati- Belt tensioner
cally ............................................... 164 Activation ......................................... 57
Engaging reverse gear ................... 164 Belt warning ......................................... 50
Engaging the park position ............ 163 Blind Spot Assist
Gearshift recommendation ............ 171 Activating/deactivating (on-
Gliding mode ................................. 166 board computer) ............................ 258
Kickdown ....................................... 166 Display message ............................ 286
Manual shifting .............................. 169 Notes/function .............................. 227
Oil temperature (on-board com- see Active Blind Spot Assist
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 262 Blower
Overview ........................................ 163 see Climate control
permanent setting ......................... 169 BlueTEC
Problem (fault) ............................... 172 see AdBlue®
Pulling away ................................... 156 Bluetooth®
Starting the engine ........................ 155 Connecting a different mobile
Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 169 phone ............................................ 318
Trailer towing ................................. 167 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 318
Transmission position display See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 165 Telephony ...................................... 317
Transmission positions .................. 165 Bonnet
Automatic transmission emer- Active bonnet (pedestrian protec-
gency running mode ......................... 172 tion) ............................................... 344
Auxiliary heating/ventilation Closing ........................................... 345
Display message ............................ 296 Display message ............................ 295
Important safety notes .................. 146 Important safety notes .................. 344
Problem (display message) ............ 150 Opening ......................................... 345
Remote control .............................. 147 Boot
Setting the departure time ............. 148 see Luggage compartment
Index 7
Brake Calling up the climate control

Active Brake Assist with cross- menu
traffic function ................................. 80 Multimedia system ........................ 314
EBD .................................................. 79 Camera
Brake Assist see 360° camera
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see Reversing camera
Brake assistance Car
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see Vehicle
Brake fluid Car wash
Display message ............................ 271 see Care
Notes ............................................. 399 Car wash (care) ................................. 350
Brake force distribution Care
see EBD (electronic brake force 360° camera ................................. 354
distribution) Automatic car wash ....................... 350
Brake lamps Carpets .......................................... 356
Adaptive ........................................... 75 Display ........................................... 355
Brake linings Exhaust pipe .................................. 355
Display message ............................ 272 Exterior lighting ............................. 354
Brakes General notes ................................ 350
ABS .................................................. 72 High-pressure cleaner .................... 352
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75 Interior ........................................... 355
BAS .................................................. 73 Matt paintwork .............................. 352
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 399 Paint .............................................. 352
Display message ............................ 267 Plastic trim .................................... 355
Driving tips .................................... 182 Reversing camera .......................... 354
Hill start assist ............................... 156 Roof lining ...................................... 356
HOLD function ............................... 200 Seat belt ........................................ 356
Important safety notes .................. 182 Seat cover ..................................... 356
Parking brake ................................ 179 Selector lever ................................ 356
Warning lamp ................................. 300 Sensors ......................................... 354
Breakdown Side running board ........................ 354
Where will I find...? ........................ 357 Steering wheel ............................... 356
see Flat tyre Trim pieces .................................... 356
see Towing away Washing by hand ........................... 351
Breakdown assistance Wheels ........................................... 353
see Mercedes me connect Windows ........................................ 353
Brightness control (instrument Wiper blades .................................. 353
cluster lighting) ................................... 36 Wooden trim .................................. 356
Buttons on the steering column ...... 246 CD
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
C CD player (on-board computer) ........ 254
Central locking
Calling up a fault
Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 86
see Display messages Centre console
Calling up the climate control bar
lower section (Mercedes-AMG
Multimedia system ........................ 314
vehicles) .......................................... 42
Upper section .................................. 40
Changing the media source ............. 253
8 Index
Charge-air pressure (on-board Pre-entry climate control (via key)

computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi- (multimedia system) ...................... 315
cles) .................................................... 262 Pre-entry climate control at
Child departure time (multimedia sys-
Restraint system .............................. 61 tem) ............................................... 315
Child seat Problem with the rear window
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 65 heating .......................................... 142
i-Size ................................................ 62 Problems with cooling with air
ISOFIX .............................................. 62 dehumidification ............................ 139
On the front-passenger seat ............ 64 Rear control panel ......................... 137
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65 Setting the air distribution ............. 140
Recommendations ........................... 69 Setting the air vents ...................... 150
Suitable positions ............................ 65 Setting the airflow ......................... 141
Top Tether ....................................... 63 Setting the climate mode ............... 140
Child-proof locks Setting the climate mode (multi-
Important safety notes .................... 70 media system) ............................... 315
Rear doors ....................................... 71 Setting the temperature ................ 140
Children in the vehicle Switching air-recirculation mode
Important safety notes .................... 60 on/off ............................................ 143
Cigarette lighter ................................ 337 Switching on/off ........................... 138
Cleaning Switching residual heat on/off ...... 144
Mirror turn signal ........................... 354 Switching the rear window heat-
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 355 ing on/off ...................................... 142
Climate control Switching the synchronisation
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 146 function on and off ........................ 141
Control panel for THERMATIC Synchronisation function (multi-
automatic climate control (2- media system) ............................... 316
zone) .............................................. 136 THERMOTRONIC control panel (3-
Controlling automatically ............... 140 zone automatic climate control) .... 137
Convenience opening/closing Climate control settings
(air-recirculation mode) ................. 143 Multimedia system ........................ 314
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 139 Coat hooks ......................................... 332
Cooling with air dehumidification Cockpit
(multimedia system) ...................... 315 Overview .......................................... 36
Demisting the windows .................. 142 Code for Apps
Demisting the windscreen ............. 142 see QR code
ECO start/stop function ................ 138 COMAND display
Indicator lamp ................................ 139 Cleaning ......................................... 355
Ionisation ....................................... 146 Combination switch .......................... 123
Ionisation (multimedia system) ...... 315 Connecting a USB device
Notes on using the automatic cli- See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
mate control .................................. 138 Consumption statistics (on-board
Overview ........................................ 314 computer) .......................................... 250
Overview of systems ...................... 136 Controller ........................................... 311
Perfume atomiser (multimedia Controlling the speed
system) .......................................... 315 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Perfume atomizer .......................... 144 Convenience closing feature ............ 100
Index 9
Convenience opening feature .......... 100 Function/notes ............................. 121

Convenience opening/closing (air- Dealership
recirculation mode) ........................... 143 see Qualified specialist workshop
Coolant (engine) Declarations of conformity ................. 31
Checking the level ......................... 348 Diagnostics connection ...................... 32
Display message ............................ 280 Diesel .................................................. 397
Important safety notes .................. 399 Digital Owner's Manual
Temperature display in the instru- Help ................................................. 28
ment cluster .................................. 246 Introduction ..................................... 28
Warning lamp ................................. 305 Digital speedometer ......................... 251
Cooling Dipped-beam headlamps
see Climate control Display message ............................ 278
Copyright ............................................. 35 Replacing bulbs ............................. 129
Cornering light function Setting for driving abroad (sym-
Display message ............................ 278 metrical) ........................................ 121
Function/notes ............................. 124 Setting for driving on the right/
Crosswind Assist ................................. 79 left ................................................. 260
Cruise control Switching on/off ........................... 122
Cruise control lever ....................... 188 DIRECT SELECT lever
Deactivating ................................... 190 Automatic transmission ................. 163
Display message ............................ 289 Display
Driving system ............................... 188 see Display message
General notes ................................ 188 see Warning and indicator lamps
Important safety notes .................. 188 Display message
LIM indicator lamp ......................... 188 Driving systems ............................. 284
Selecting ........................................ 189 Display messages
Setting a speed .............................. 189 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 349
Storing and maintaining current Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 266
speed ............................................. 189 Engine ............................................ 280
Storing the current speed or call- General information ....................... 265
ing up the last stored speed .......... 189 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 265
Cup holder Introduction ................................... 265
Centre console .............................. 335 Key ................................................ 297
Important safety notes .................. 335 Lights ............................................. 278
Rear compartment ......................... 335 Safety systems .............................. 267
Cycle rack .......................................... 242 Tyres .............................................. 291
Vehicle ........................................... 293
D Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 193
Data
Activation conditions ..................... 193
see Technical data Cruise control lever ....................... 193
Data carrier
Deactivating ................................... 197
Selecting ........................................ 254 Display Message ............................ 287
Data modem mode
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 196
Telephone module with Blue- Driving tips .................................... 198
tooth® (SAP profile) ....................... 320 Driving with Distance Pilot
Daytime driving lights DISTRONIC .................................... 194
Display message ............................ 278 Function/notes ............................. 192
10 Index
Important safety notes .................. 192 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Selecting ........................................ 193 bution) ............................................. 79
Setting a speed .............................. 196 STEER CONTROL ............................. 82
Setting the specified minimum Driving safety systems
distance ......................................... 196 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 72
Stopping ........................................ 195 Active Brake Assist with cross-
with Steering Pilot ......................... 198 traffic function ................................. 80
Distance warning function ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 79
Function/notes ................................ 74 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75
Distance warning signal (warning Adaptive brake lights ....................... 75
lamp) .................................................. 307 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 73
Distance warning system Distance warning function ............... 74
see Active Brake Assist ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Door gram) ............................................... 76
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 92 Important safety guidelines ............. 72
Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 86 Overview .......................................... 72
Control panel ................................... 44 Driving system
Display message ............................ 295 AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 204
Emergency locking ........................... 93 AMG sports suspension based on
Emergency unlocking ....................... 93 AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 207
Important safety notes .................... 91 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 192
Opening (from the inside) ................ 91 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Drive program Steering Pilot ................................. 198
SETUP (on-board computer, Driving Assistance Plus package ... 230
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 263 Off-road program ........................... 202
Drive programs Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 212
Automatic transmission ................. 167 Parking Pilot .................................. 208
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 165 Speed limiter ................................. 190
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 161 Driving systems
Drive system 360°camera .................................. 219
DSR ............................................... 201 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 230
Driver's door Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 233
see Door ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 224
Driving abroad Blind Spot Assist ............................ 227
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 350 Cruise control ................................ 188
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 121 Display message ............................ 284
Driving Assistance Plus package ..... 230 HOLD function ............................... 200
Driving downhill ................................ 188 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 228
Driving in mountainous terrain Lane package ................................ 227
Approach/departure angle ............ 187 Reversing camera .......................... 215
Driving off-road Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 225
Driving downhill ............................. 188 Driving tips
see Off-road driving Aquaplaning ................................... 184
Driving on flooded roads .................. 184 Automatic transmission ................. 166
Driving safety system Brakes ........................................... 182
Active Brake Assist .......................... 73 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 198
Crosswind Assist ............................. 79 Downhill gradient ........................... 183
Driving abroad ............................... 121
Index 11
Driving in winter ............................. 184 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 157

Driving on flooded roads ................ 184 Climate control .............................. 138
Driving on sand .............................. 187 Deactivating/activating ................. 158
Driving on wet roads ...................... 184 General information ....................... 157
Fuel ................................................ 181 Important safety notes .................. 157
General .......................................... 181 Introduction ................................... 157
Icy road surfaces ........................... 184 Electromagnetic compatibility
Important safety notes .................. 152 Declaration of conformity ................ 31
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Electronic brake force distribution
ted roads ....................................... 183 see EBD (electronic brake force
New brake disks ............................ 183 distribution)
New brake pads/linings ................ 183 Electronic Stability Program
Off-road driving .............................. 185 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Running-in tips ............................... 152 Electronic Traction System
Snow chains .................................. 379 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 183 tion System)
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 121 Emergency
The first 1500 km .......................... 152 Automatic measures after an acci-
Towing a trailer .............................. 236 dent ................................................. 60
Travelling uphill .............................. 187 Emergency braking
Tyre ruts ........................................ 187 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Wet road surface ........................... 183 Emergency key
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Unlocking the driver's door .............. 93
Display message ............................ 287 Emergency key element
Function/notes ............................. 201 Function/notes ................................ 87
DVD video General notes .................................. 87
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 254 Inserting .......................................... 88
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 Locking vehicle ................................ 93
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Removing ......................................... 88
Automatic transmission ................. 161 Emergency release
Climate control (THERMATIC 2- Driver's door .................................... 93
zone) .............................................. 138 Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 390
E Important safety notes .................. 390
EASY-ENTRY feature Removing ....................................... 391
Technical data ............................... 390
Function/notes ............................. 115
Emergency unlocking
EASY-EXIT feature
Tailgate ............................................ 98
Function/notes ............................. 115
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Vehicle ............................................. 93
Engine
bution)
Display message ............................ 280
Display message ............................ 269
ECO start/stop function ................ 157
Function/notes ................................ 79
ECO display Engine number ............................... 394
Jump-starting ................................. 367
Function/notes ............................. 181
Running irregularly ......................... 160
On-board computer ....................... 250
ECO start/stop function Starting (important safety notes) ... 155
Starting problems .......................... 160
Automatic engine start .................. 158
Starting the engine with the key .... 155
12 Index
Starting with the Start/Stop but- Exhaust pipe

ton ................................................. 155 Cleaning ......................................... 355
Stopping ........................................ 179 Exterior lighting
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 373 Cleaning ......................................... 354
Warning lamp (engine diagnos- Settings options ............................. 121
tics) ............................................... 304 see Lights
Engine electronics Exterior mirrors
Notes ............................................. 392 Adjusting ....................................... 117
Problem (fault) ............................... 160 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 118
Engine oil Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117
Additives ........................................ 399 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 117
Checking the oil level ..................... 346 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 117
Checking the oil level using the Parking position ............................. 118
dipstick .......................................... 347 Resetting ....................................... 117
Display message ............................ 282 Storing settings (memory func-
Filling capacity ............................... 399 tion) ............................................... 119
General notes ................................ 398
Notes about oil grades ................... 398 F
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 346
Fault message
Temperature (on-board computer,
see Display messages
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262
Favourites
Topping up ..................................... 347
Entering an address Overview ........................................ 313
Features ............................................. 335
Environmental protection Filler cap
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 29 see Fuel filler flap
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Fire extinguisher ............................... 358
First-aid kit ......................................... 358
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Fitting a wheel
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Fitting a wheel ............................... 388
gram)
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 389
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 263
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 386
Characteristics ................................. 76
Raising the vehicle ......................... 387
Crosswind Assist ............................. 79
Removing a wheel .......................... 388
Deactivating/activating (button
Securing the vehicle against roll-
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 77
ing away ........................................ 386
Deactivating/activating (notes,
Fitting/removing
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 77
front wheel arch cover ................... 129
Display message ............................ 267
Flat tyre
Function/notes ................................ 76
Changing a wheel/fitting the
General notes .................................. 76
spare wheel ................................... 385
Important safety guidelines ............. 76
MOExtended tyres ......................... 360
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 79
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 360
Warning lamp ................................. 301
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 361
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
see Emergency spare wheel
tem) ...................................................... 76
Floormat ............................................. 343
Exhaust
Foglamps (extended range) .............. 124
see Exhaust pipe
Index 13
Frequencies Before changing ............................. 373

Mobile phone ................................. 392 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 374
Two-way radio ................................ 392 Fuse box in the engine compart-
Front wheel arch ment .............................................. 374
Fitting/removing the cover ............ 129 Fuse box in the front-passenger
Front-passenger front airbag deac- footwell .......................................... 374
tivation Fuse box in the luggage compart-
Display message ............................ 276 ment .............................................. 375
Front-passenger front airbag deac- Important safety notes .................. 373
tivation system
Operation ......................................... 53 G
Problems ......................................... 57
G-Meter (on-board computer,
System self-test ............................... 55
Fuel Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 262
Gear indicator (on-board com-
Additives ........................................ 396
Consumption statistics .................. 250 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 262
diesel ............................................. 397 Gearshift paddles
Displaying the current consump- see Steering wheel gearshift paddles
tion ................................................ 250 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 29
Displaying the range ...................... 250 Glove compartment .......................... 324
Driving tips .................................... 181 Google™ Local Search
E10 ................................................ 395 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Fuel gauge ....................................... 38
Grade (petrol) ................................ 395 H
Important safety notes .................. 395 Handling control system
Low outside temperatures ............. 397 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Notes for GLC 300 4MATIC, HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 96
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC .... 396 Handwriting recognition
Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehi- Switching text reader function
cles ................................................ 396 on/off ............................................ 313
Petrol ............................................. 395 Touchpad ....................................... 312
Problem (malfunction) ................... 175 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 123
Quality (diesel) ............................... 397 Head restraint
Refuelling ....................................... 172
General notes ................................ 110
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 395 Head restraints
Fuel filler flap
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111
Closing ........................................... 174
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111
Opening ......................................... 173
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 111
Fuel filter (white display message) .. 283
Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-
Fuel level
tion manually ................................. 111
Calling up the range (on-board Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 111
computer) ...................................... 250 Important safety notes .................. 110
Gauge .............................................. 38 Head-up display
Fuel tank
Adjusting the brightness ................ 259
Capacity ........................................ 395 Displays and operating .................. 248
Problem (malfunction) ................... 175 Function/notes ............................. 248
Fuses
Important safety notes .................. 248
Allocation chart ............................. 375
14 Index
Selecting displays .......................... 259 Intelligent Light System

Setting the position ....................... 259 Activating/deactivating ................. 260
Storing settings (memory func- Display message ............................ 278
tion) ............................................... 119 Overview ........................................ 124
Switching on or off ......................... 248 Setting the dipped-beam head-
Headlamp flasher .............................. 123 lamps for driving on the right/left .. 260
Headlamps Interior lighting
display message ............................ 279 Automatic control system .............. 127
Misting up ...................................... 127 Control ........................................... 127
see Automatic headlamp mode Overview ........................................ 127
Heating Reading lamp ................................. 127
see Climate control Interior motion sensor
High-pressure cleaners .................... 352 Deactivating ..................................... 84
Hill start assist .................................. 156 Function ........................................... 84
HOLD function Interior perfume
Activating ....................................... 201 see Perfume atomizer
Activation conditions ..................... 200 iPod®
Deactivating ................................... 201 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Display message ............................ 287 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 62
Function/notes ............................. 200
General notes ................................ 200 J
Home address
Jack
Declaration of conformity ................ 31
Horn ...................................................... 36
Storage location ............................ 359
HUD
Using ............................................. 387
see Head-up display
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 367
I
K
Ignition lock
Key
see Key positions
Changing the battery ....................... 88
Immobiliser .......................................... 82
Checking the battery ....................... 88
Indicator and warning lamp
Convenience closing feature .......... 100
Restraint system ............................ 304
Convenience opening feature ........ 100
Indicator and warning lamps
Display message ............................ 297
Coolant .......................................... 305
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 86
SPORT handling mode ................... 303
Emergency key element ................... 87
Indicator lamps
Display message ............................ 278
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 87
see Warning and indicator lamps
Loss ................................................. 89
Indicators
Modifying the programming ............. 87
see Turn signals
Overview .......................................... 85
Insect protection on the radiator .... 345
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 153
Instrument cluster
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Overview .......................................... 38
Starting the engine ........................ 155
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 38 Key positions
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 245
Key ................................................ 153
Index 15
Start/Stop button .......................... 154 Driving abroad ............................... 121

KEYLESS-GO Foglamps (extended range) ........... 124
Activating ......................................... 87 General notes ................................ 121
Convenience closing ...................... 100 Hazard warning lamps ................... 123
Deactivation ..................................... 87 Headlamp flasher ........................... 123
Locking ............................................ 86 Headlamp range ............................ 123
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 154 Intelligent Light System (func-
Start function ................................... 87 tion) ............................................... 124
Unlocking ......................................... 86 Light switch ................................... 121
Kickdown Main-beam headlamps ................... 123
Driving tips .................................... 166 Misted up headlamps .................... 127
Manual gearshifting ....................... 171 Motorway mode ............................. 124
Kneebag ............................................... 52 Off-road lights ................................ 125
Parking lamps ................................ 122
L Rear foglamp ................................. 122
Setting exterior lighting ................. 121
Lamps
Side lamps ..................................... 122
see Warning and indicator lamps Turn signals ................................... 123
Lane Change Assist
see Interior lighting
see Active Blind Spot Assist LIM indicator lamp
Lane detection (automatic)
Cruise control ................................ 188
see Lane Keeping Assist Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 193
Lane Keeping Assist
Variable limiter .............................. 190
Activating/deactivating ................. 229 Limiter
Activating/deactivating (on- Deactivating, variable .................... 191
board computer) ............................ 258 Function/notes ............................. 190
Display message ............................ 285 General notes ................................ 190
Function/information .................... 228 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 190
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Permanent ..................................... 191
Lane package ..................................... 227 Setting a speed .............................. 191
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 264 Storing the current speed .............. 191
Lashing eyelets ................................. 329 Switching to passive ...................... 191
Level control Variable ......................................... 190
display message ............................ 285 Limiting the speed
see AIR BODY CONTROL see Speed limiter
Licence plate lamp (display mes- Loading guidelines ............................ 323
sage) ................................................... 278 Locking
Light switch see Central locking
operation ....................................... 121 Locking (doors)
Lights Automatic ........................................ 92
Activating/deactivating the Intel- Emergency locking ........................... 93
ligent Light System ........................ 260 From inside (central locking but-
Active light function ....................... 124 ton) .................................................. 92
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 125 Locking centrally
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 126 see Central locking
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 121 Luggage compartment
Cornering light function ................. 124 Opening/closing (from outside,
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 122 HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 96
16 Index
plug-in module (telescopic rods) .... 332 Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Luggage compartment cover system
Important safety notes .................. 329 Switch in the overhead control
Notes/function .............................. 329 panel .............................................. 340
Luggage compartment enlarge- Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
ment ................................................... 326 360°camera .................................. 219
Luggage compartment floor Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 230
Important safety notes .................. 333 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 233
opening/closing ............................ 333 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 224
stowage well, under ....................... 333 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 227
Luggage compartment plug-in Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 192
module (telescopic rod) .................... 332 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Luggage net ....................................... 331 Steering Pilot ................................. 198
Lumbar support General notes ................................ 188
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 228
port ................................................ 112 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 212
Parking Pilot .................................. 208
M PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 59
M+S tyres ........................................... 378
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Main-beam headlamps
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 125
Reversing camera .......................... 215
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 126
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 225
Display message ............................ 278 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Replacing bulbs ............................. 129
see Qualified specialist workshop
Switching on/off ........................... 123 Message memory (on-board com-
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 352
puter) .................................................. 266
MB Contact
Messages
Display message ............................ 272
see Display messages
Media Interface
see Warning and indicator lamps
see Digital Owner's Manual Mirror turn signal
Memory card (audio) ......................... 254
Cleaning ......................................... 354
Memory function Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel, exterior see Exterior mirrors
mirrors ........................................... 119 see Rear-view mirror
Mercedes me connect
see Vanity mirror (in sun visor)
Breakdown assistance call but- Mobile phone
ton ................................................. 341
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Display message ............................ 272
face) .............................................. 317
General notes ................................ 340
Connecting another mobile
Info call button .............................. 341
phone ............................................ 318
Mercedes-Benz Contact
Connecting the telephone module
General notes ................................ 340
with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ......... 320
Info call button .............................. 341
Frequencies ................................... 392
Roadside Assistance call button .... 341
Installation ..................................... 392
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 255
Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 341
Index 17
Transmission output (maximum) .... 392 Off-road driving

Modifying the programming (key) ..... 87 Approach/departure angle ............ 402
MOExtended tyres ............................. 360 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 186
Motorway mode ................................ 124 Checklist before driving off-road .... 186
MP3 General information ....................... 185
Operating ....................................... 254 Important safety notes .................. 185
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 Maximum gradient climbing abil-
Multifunction display ity .................................................. 402
Function/notes ............................. 247 Maximum water depth ................... 402
Multifunction steering wheel Travelling uphill .............................. 187
Operating the on-board computer .. 246 Off-road lights .................................... 125
Overview .......................................... 39 Off-road program
Multimedia system Activating/deactivating. ................ 204
Switching on and off ...................... 311 General notes ................................ 202
Music files Overview of programs .................... 203
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 Off-road system
DSR ............................................... 201
N Off road drive program .................. 202
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 76
Navigation Off-road ABS .................................... 73
display (on-board computer) .......... 251
Off-road ESP® .................................. 79
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 251 Oil
see Engine oil
Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 152 On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 262
O Assistance graphic menu ............... 256
Occupant safety Assistance menu ........................... 257
Airbags ............................................ 50 Display messages .......................... 265
Automatic front-passenger front Displaying a service message ........ 349
airbag deactivation .......................... 53 Displays and operation .................. 245
Automatic measures after an acci- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 197
dent ................................................. 60 Factory settings ............................. 261
Belt warning ..................................... 50 G-Meter ......................................... 262
Children in the vehicle ..................... 60 Head-up display ............................. 248
Important safety notes .................... 45 Head-up display menu ................... 259
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator Important safety notes .................. 245
lamp ................................................. 46 Instrument cluster menu ............... 260
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 71 Light menu ..................................... 260
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Media menu ................................... 253
pant protection) ............................... 59 Menu overview .............................. 249
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Message memory .......................... 266
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59 Navigation menu ............................ 251
Restraint system introduction .......... 45 Operating the TV ............................ 255
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 46 Operating video DVD ..................... 254
Seat belts ........................................ 47 RACETIMER ................................... 264
Odometer ........................................... 249 Radio menu ................................... 253
Service menu ................................. 257
Settings menu ............................... 257
18 Index
Standard display ............................ 249 Parking aid

Telephone menu ............................ 255 see 360° camera
Trip menu ...................................... 249 see Exterior mirrors
Vehicle menu ................................. 261 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Opening and closing the side trim see Parking Pilot
panels ................................................. 130 see Reversing camera
Operating instructions Parking Assist
Vehicle equipment ........................... 30 display message ............................ 286
Operating safety Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Deactivating/activating ................. 214
Important safety note ...................... 30 Driving system ............................... 212
Operating system Function/notes ............................. 212
see On-board computer Important safety notes .................. 212
Operation Problems (faults) ........................... 215
Digital Owner's Manual .................... 28 Sensor range ................................. 213
Outside temperature display ........... 246 Towing a trailer .............................. 212
Overhead control panel ...................... 43 Warning display ............................. 214
Override feature Parking assistance
Rear side windows ........................... 71 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Owner's Manual Parking brake
Overview .......................................... 30 Applying automatically ................... 180
Applying or releasing manually ...... 180
P Display message ............................ 269
Electric parking brake .................... 179
Paint code .......................................... 393 Emergency braking ........................ 181
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 352 General information ....................... 179
Panic alarm .......................................... 45 Releasing automatically ................. 180
Panorama sliding sunroof Warning lamp ................................. 304
Important safety information ......... 102 Parking lamps
Operating ....................................... 103 Display message ............................ 278
Operating the roller sunblinds for Switching on/off ........................... 122
the sliding sunroof ......................... 104 Parking Pilot
Problem (malfunction) ................... 105 Cancelling ...................................... 212
Rain-closing feature (when driv- Detecting parking spaces .............. 209
ing) ................................................ 104 Exiting a parking space .................. 211
Rain-closing feature (when the Function/notes ............................. 208
engine is switched off) ................... 103 Important safety notes .................. 208
Reversing feature ........................... 102 Parking .......................................... 210
Parking Towing a trailer .............................. 208
Important safety notes .................. 178 PASSENGER AIR BAG
Parking brake ................................ 179 Display message ............................ 276
Parking position for the exterior Indicator lamps ................................ 46
mirror on the front-passenger Perfume
side ................................................ 118 see Perfume atomizer
Reversing camera .......................... 215 Perfume atomiser
Switching off the engine ................ 179 Setting the perfume intensity
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (multimedia system) ...................... 315
Vial ................................................ 144
Index 19
Perfume atomizer R
Operating ....................................... 144
Problem (malfunction) ................... 145 RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Permanent all-wheel drive Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 264
see 4MATIC (permanent four- Radar sensor system
wheel drive) Display message ............................ 274
Petrol .................................................. 395 Radiator cover ................................... 345
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 71 Radio
Phone book Selecting a station ......................... 253
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 Radio mode
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
tions) .................................................. 355 Radio-based vehicle components
Power windows Declaration of conformity ................ 31
Rain closing feature (panorama
see Side windows
sliding sunroof) ................................. 103
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection) Reading lamp ..................................... 127
Rear compartment
Operation ......................................... 59
Setting the air vents ...................... 150
PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant
Setting the airflow ......................... 141
safety system)
Setting the temperature ................ 140
Display message ............................ 272
Rear foglamp
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Display message ............................ 278
occupant protection PLUS) Switching on/off ........................... 122
Operation ......................................... 59 Rear seat
Program Adjusting the angle of the backr-
see Drive programs ests ................................................ 328
Protection against theft Display message ............................ 295
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 83 Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
Immobiliser ...................................... 82 wards/back) ...................................... 327
Interior motion sensor ..................... 84 Rear seat backrest
Tow-away protection ........................ 83 display message ............................ 295
Protection of the environment Rear window heating
General notes .................................. 29 Problem (fault) ............................... 142
Pulling away
Switching on/off ........................... 142
Automatic transmission ................. 156 Rear window wiper
General notes ................................ 156 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 134
Hill start assist ............................... 156 Switching on/off ........................... 132
Trailer ............................................ 156 Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
tus indicator ........................................ 50
Q Rear-view mirror
QR code Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 118
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Dipping (manual) ........................... 116
Rescue card ..................................... 33 Recuperation display ........................ 250
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 33 Reflective safety vest ....................... 357
Quick access for audio and tele- Refuelling
phone Fuel gauge ....................................... 38
Changing the station/music Important safety notes .................. 172
track .............................................. 313
20 Index
Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehi- Reversing feature

cles ................................................ 396 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 102
Refuelling process ......................... 173 Roller sunblinds ............................. 104
see Fuel Side windows ................................... 99
Remote control Tailgate ............................................ 94
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 147 Reversing lamp
Changing the batteries (auxiliary Replacing bulbs ............................. 130
heating) ......................................... 149 Reversing lamps
Replacing bulbs Display message ............................ 278
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 129 Roll away protection
Fitting/removing the cover (front see HOLD function
wheel arch) .................................... 129 Roller sunblind
Important safety notes .................. 128 Operation ....................................... 104
Main-beam headlamps ................... 129 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 104
Opening/closing the side trim Resetting ....................................... 105
panels ............................................ 130 Roof carrier ........................................ 334
Overview of bulb types .................. 128 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Replacing front bulbs (vehicles instructions) ...................................... 356
with halogen headlamps) ............... 129 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 400
Reversing lamp .............................. 130 Route guidance
Turn signals (front) ......................... 129 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 130 Route guidance active ...................... 251
Replacing the battery (auxiliary
heating remote control) .................... 149 S
Rescue card ......................................... 33
Reserve (fuel tank) Safety
see Fuel Children in the vehicle ..................... 60
Reserve fuel see Occupant safety
Display message ............................ 282 see Operating safety
Warning lamp ................................. 304 Safety net
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 144 Attaching ....................................... 331
Restraint system Important safety information ......... 330
Safety system
Display message ............................ 274
Introduction ..................................... 45 see Driving safety systems
SD card
Warning lamp ................................. 304
Warning lamp (function) ................... 46 Inserting/removing ........................ 322
Rev counter ........................................ 246 select ............................................. 254
SD memory card
Reversing camera
"Reverse parking" function ............ 217
Seat
Cleaning instructions ..................... 354
Correct driver's seat position ........ 107
Coupling up a trailer function ........ 218
Folding the backrest (rear com-
Display in the multimedia system .. 216
partment) forwards/back .............. 326
General notes ................................ 215
Seat belt
Object detection (function/
Centre rear-compartment seat ........ 49
notes) ............................................ 219
Correct usage .................................. 48
Switching on/off ........................... 216
wide-angle function ....................... 219
Index 21
Seat belts Engine oil ....................................... 398

Adjusting the driver's and front- Fuel ................................................ 394
passenger seat belt ......................... 50 Important safety notes .................. 394
Adjusting the height ......................... 49 Washer fluid ................................... 400
Cleaning ......................................... 356 Setting the date/time format
Fastening ......................................... 49 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Important safety guidelines ............. 47 Setting the language
Introduction ..................................... 47 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 50 Setting the time
Releasing ......................................... 49 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Warning lamp ................................. 299 Settings
Warning lamp (function) ................... 50 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 261
Seats On-board computer ....................... 257
Adjusting (AMG Performance SETUP (on-board computer,
Seat) .............................................. 112 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 263
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109 Side lamps
Adjusting (manually and electri- Switching on/off ........................... 122
cally) .............................................. 109 Side running board
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Cleaning ......................................... 354
port ................................................ 112 Side windows
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 110 Convenience closing ...................... 100
Calling up a stored setting (mem- Convenience opening .................... 100
ory function) .................................. 120 Important safety notes .................... 98
Cleaning the cover ......................... 356 Opening/closing .............................. 99
Important safety notes .................. 107 Problem (malfunction) ................... 101
Seat heating .................................. 112 Resetting ....................................... 101
Seat heating problem .................... 113 Reversing feature ............................. 99
Seat ventilation .............................. 113 Sidebag ................................................ 52
Seat ventilation problem ................ 113 SIM card
Storing settings (memory func- Inserting ........................................ 320
tion) ............................................... 119 Ski/snowboard bag .......................... 325
Securing a load .................................. 329 Sliding sunroof
Securing luggage ............................... 329 Important safety information ......... 102
Selector lever Problem (malfunction) ................... 105
Cleaning ......................................... 356 see Panorama sliding sunroof
see Automatic transmission SMS
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 354 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310
Service Centre Snow chains ...................................... 379
see Qualified specialist workshop Socket (12 V)
Service menu (on-board com- Centre console .............................. 338
puter) .................................................. 257 General notes ................................ 338
Service message Luggage compartment ................... 338
see ASSYST PLUS Rear compartment ......................... 338
Service products Socket (230 V) ................................... 339
AdBlue® special additives .............. 397 SOS
Brake fluid ..................................... 399 display message ............................ 272
Coolant (engine) ............................ 399
22 Index
Sound Steering wheel

Switching on/off ........................... 311 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 114
Spare wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 114
see Emergency spare wheel Button overview ............................... 39
Specialist workshop ............................ 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 246
Spectacles compartment ................. 324 Cleaning ......................................... 356
Speed limiter EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 115
Display message ............................ 288 Important safety notes .................. 114
Important safety notes .................. 190 Storing settings (memory func-
Selecting ........................................ 191 tion) ............................................... 119
Storing the current speed or Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 169
recalling the last stored speed ....... 191 Steering wheel heating
Speed, controlling Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
see Cruise control Switching on/off ........................... 114
Speedometer Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 264
Activating/deactivating the addi- Stowage areas ................................... 323
tional speedometer ........................ 261 Stowage compartment
Digital ............................................ 251 Map pockets .................................. 325
In the Instrument cluster ................. 38 Stowage compartments
Segments ...................................... 245 Armrest (under) ............................. 325
Selecting a display unit .................. 260 Centre console .............................. 324
SPORT handling mode Cup holder ..................................... 335
Deactivating/activating Door ............................................... 325
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 77 Glove compartment ....................... 324
Warning lamp ................................. 303 Important safety information ......... 323
Sports exhaust system Rear ............................................... 325
AMG ............................................... 159 Spectacles compartment ............... 324
Start not possible see Stowage areas
display message ............................ 283 Stowage net ....................................... 325
Start/Stop button Stowage space
Key positions ................................. 154 Stowage net ................................... 325
Starting the engine ........................ 155 Summer tyres
Start/stop function In winter ........................................ 378
see ECO start/stop function Sun blind
Starting (engine) ................................ 155 Rear side windows ......................... 336
Starting button Sun visor ............................................ 336
display message ............................ 298 Suspension mode
STEER CONTROL .................................. 82 SETUP (on-board computer,
Steering Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 263
Display message ............................ 297 Suspension settings
Warning lamps ............................... 309 AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 206
Steering assistant STEER CON- Suspension tuning
TROL AMG sports suspension based on
see STEER CONTROL AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 207
Steering Pilot Switching
Display message ............................ 289 the interior motion sensor on/off .... 84
with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ...... 198
Index 23
Switching on media mode Switching between mobile

Via the device list .......................... 321 phones ........................................... 318
Switching the auxiliary heating/ Telephone compartment ................ 325
ventilation see Mobile phone
On/off ........................................... 146 Telephone module with Bluetooth®
Swivelling (SAP profile)
the ball coupling in/out ................. 237 Activating and connecting the
module ........................................... 319
T Charging a mobile phone ............... 321
Tail lamps Connecting the mobile phone ........ 320
Connecting the module via a USB
Display message ............................ 278
Tailgate cable .............................................. 319
Data modem mode ........................ 320
Display message ............................ 295
Installing the module ..................... 319
Emergency unlocking ....................... 98
Introduction ................................... 318
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ..................... 96
Saving/deleting the PIN for the
SIM card ........................................ 321
Limiting the opening angle ............... 98
Settings ......................................... 321
object detection ............................... 94
SIM card mode .............................. 320
Opening dimensions ...................... 400
Text messages ............................... 321
Opening/closing (automatically
Transferring the phone book .......... 321
from inside) ...................................... 97
Temperature
Opening/closing (automatically
Coolant (display in the instrument
from outside) ................................... 94
cluster) .......................................... 246
Opening/closing (manually from
Engine oil (on-board computer,
outside) ............................................ 94
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262
Reversing function ........................... 94
Technical data Outside temperature ...................... 246
Setting (climate control) ................ 140
Capacities ...................................... 394
Transmission oil (on-board com-
Drawbar load (maximum) ............... 403
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 262
Information .................................... 392
TEMPOMAT
Trailer loads ................................... 403
Function/notes ............................. 188
Vehicle data ................................... 400
Text messages
Telephone
Telephone module with Blue-
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 256 tooth® (SAP profile) ....................... 321
Authorising a mobile phone (con- Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 264
necting) ......................................... 318 TIREFIT Kit
Connecting a Mobile phone (gen- Declaration of conformity ................ 32
eral information) ............................ 317 Important safety notes .................. 361
Display message ............................ 297 Storage location ............................ 359
Introduction ................................... 255 Tyre pressure not reached ............. 363
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 255 Tyre pressure reached ................... 363
Number from the phone book ........ 256 Using ............................................. 362
Redialling ....................................... 256 Top Tether ............................................ 63
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 256 Topping up
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 AdBlue® ......................................... 175
Total distance recorder .................... 249
24 Index
Touchpad Traffic Sign Assist

Changing the station/music Activating/deactivating the warn-
track .............................................. 313 ing function .................................... 257
Character suggestions ................... 312 Display message ............................ 287
Deleting characters ....................... 312 Function/notes ............................. 225
Entering a space ............................ 312 Important safety notes .................. 226
Entering characters ....................... 312 Instrument cluster display ............. 226
Gesture control .............................. 312 Message function .......................... 226
Handwriting recognition ................ 312 Trailer coupling
Operating the touchpad ................. 312 see Towing a trailer
Overview ........................................ 311 Trailer towing
Quick access for audio .................. 313 7-pin connector ............................. 240
Switching ....................................... 311 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 228
Switching input line ....................... 312 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 355
Tow-away protection Coupling up a trailer ...................... 239
Deactivating ..................................... 83 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 239
Function ........................................... 83 Driving tips .................................... 236
Priming/deactivating ....................... 83 Important safety notes .................. 235
Tow-starting Lights display message .................. 278
Emergency engine starting ............ 373 Power supply ................................. 239
Important safety notes .................. 369 Problem (fault) ............................... 241
Towing Trailer loads ................................... 403
Important safety notes .................. 369 Transfer case ..................................... 172
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 373 Transmission
Transporting the vehicle ................ 372 Display message ............................ 294
Towing a trailer see Automatic transmission
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 232 Transmission oil
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 235 temperature (on-board computer,
Axle load, permissible .................... 403 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Transmission position display ......... 165
gram) ............................................... 79 Transporting the vehicle .................. 372
Failure check for LEDs ................... 240 Travelling uphill
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 212 Brow of hill ..................................... 187
Parking Pilot .................................. 208 Driving downhill ............................. 188
Pulling away with a trailer .............. 156 Maximum gradient-climbing capa-
Swivelling the ball coupling bility ............................................... 187
in/out ............................................ 237 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Trailer tow hitch display message .. 296 tions) .................................................. 356
Towing away Trip computer (on-board com-
Fitting the towing eye .................... 371 puter) .................................................. 250
Removing the towing eye ............... 371 Trip meter
With both axles on the ground ....... 372 Calling up ....................................... 249
Towing eye ......................................... 359 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 251
Traction system Turn signal lamp
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 130
tion System) Turn signals
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 129
Index 25
Switching on/off ........................... 123 Wheel and tyre combinations ........ 389
TV see Flat tyre
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 255
Two-way radio U
Frequencies ................................... 392
Unlocking
Installation ..................................... 392
Emergency unlocking ....................... 93
Transmission output (maximum) .... 392
Type identification plate From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 92
see Vehicle identification plate
USB devices
Tyre changing tool kit ....................... 359
Connecting to the Media Inter-
Tyre inflation compressor
face ............................................... 322
see TIREFIT kit
Using the TIREFIT
Tyre pressure
tyre pressure kit ............................ 362
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 381
Display message ............................ 291
V
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 363
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 363 Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 336
Recommended ............................... 379 Vehicle
Tyre pressure loss warning Correct use ...................................... 33
General notes ................................ 380 Data acquisition ............................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 381 Display message ............................ 293
Restarting ...................................... 381 Electronics ..................................... 392
Tyre pressure monitor Equipment ....................................... 30
Checking the tyre pressure elec- Implied warranty .............................. 33
tronically ........................................ 382 Individual settings .......................... 257
Function/notes ............................. 381 Leaving parked up ......................... 181
General notes ................................ 381 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 93
Important safety notes .................. 382 Locking (key) ................................... 86
Radio type approval for the tyre Lowering ........................................ 389
pressure monitor ........................... 384 Operating safety .............................. 30
Restarting ...................................... 383 Parking .......................................... 178
Warning lamp ................................. 308 Pulling away ................................... 156
Warning message .......................... 383 Raising ........................................... 387
Tyres Registration ..................................... 33
Changing a wheel .......................... 385 Securing from rolling away ............ 386
Checking ........................................ 376 Technical data ............................... 392
Direction of rotation ...................... 386 Towing away .................................. 369
Display message ............................ 291 Transporting .................................. 372
Important safety notes .................. 376 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 93
Information on driving .................... 376 Unlocking (key) ................................ 86
MOExtended tyres ......................... 378 Vehicle data ................................... 400
Replacing ....................................... 385 Vehicle data
Service life ..................................... 377 Dimensions .................................... 400
Snow chains .................................. 379 Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Storing ........................................... 386 Approach/departure angle ............ 402
Summer tyres in winter ................. 378 Maximum gradient climbing abil-
Tyre size (data) .............................. 389 ity .................................................. 402
Tyre tread ...................................... 377 Maximum water depth ................... 402
26 Index
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 93 Wheels

Vehicle identification number Changing a wheel .......................... 385
see VIN Changing/replacing ....................... 385
Vehicle identification plate .............. 393 Checking ........................................ 376
Vehicle level Cleaning ......................................... 353
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 205 Emergency spare wheel ................. 390
Display message ............................ 284 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 388
Video Fitting a wheel ............................... 386
Operating the DVD ......................... 254 Important safety notes .................. 376
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 Information on driving .................... 376
VIN Removing a wheel .......................... 388
Seat ............................................... 394 Snow chains .................................. 379
Type plate ...................................... 393 Storing ........................................... 386
Tightening torque ........................... 389
W Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 389
Windowbag
Warning and indicator lamps Display message ............................ 275
ABS ................................................ 301 Operation ......................................... 52
Active Brake Assist ........................ 307 Windows
Airbag ............................................ 304 Cleaning ......................................... 353
Brakes ........................................... 300 see Side windows
Distance warning signal ................. 307 Windscreen
Engine diagnostics ......................... 304 Demisting ...................................... 142
ESP® .............................................. 301 Windscreen washer fluid
ESP® OFF ....................................... 303 see Windscreen washer system
Fuel tank ........................................ 304 Windscreen washer system
General notes ................................ 298 Important safety notes .................. 400
LIM (cruise control) ........................ 188 Topping up ..................................... 348
LIM (Distance Pilot DISTRONIC) .... 193 Windscreen wipers
LIM (variable limiter) ...................... 190 Problem (malfunction) ................... 135
Overview .......................................... 38 Rear window wiper ........................ 132
Parking brake ................................ 304 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 132
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 46 Switching on/off ........................... 131
Reserve fuel ................................... 304 Winter operation
Seat belt ........................................ 299 Important safety notes .................. 378
Steering ......................................... 309 Radiator cover ............................... 345
Tyre pressure monitor ................... 308 Slippery road surfaces ................... 184
Warning triangle ................................ 358 Snow chains .................................. 379
Washer fluid Summer tyres ................................ 378
Display message ............................ 297 Winter tyres
Weather display (COMAND Online) Limiting the speed (on-board com-
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 310 puter) ............................................. 261
Wheel and tyre combinations M+S tyres ...................................... 378
Tyres .............................................. 389 Wiper arm
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 389 Moving to a vertical position .......... 133
Wheel chock ...................................... 386 Wiper blades
Wheel sensors Cleaning ......................................... 353
display message ............................ 293 Important safety notes .................. 132
Index 27
Replacing ....................................... 132

Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 134
Replacing (windscreen) .................. 133
Without changing gear
display message ............................ 294
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 356
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
28 Digital Owner's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual provides informa- General notes

tion about the safe operation of your vehicle. Please observe the information about the oper-
The Digital Owner's Manual provides compre- ation of the controller (Y page 311).
hensive and specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Owner's Manual Content pages
via the multimedia system. You can access the pages of content by means
i You will not incur any costs when calling up of a visual search or a keyword search or by
the Digital Owner's Manual. The Digital Own- using the table of contents.
er's Manual works without connecting to the
internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Owner's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Owner's Manual. To access the
vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle
interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn the
controller 3.
The keyword search allows you to search for a
X To display in full screen or animation: slide
keyword by entering characters.
the controller to the left 8 :.
RContents
You can select individual sections in the con- X To select information text or save book-
tents. marks: slide the controller to the right
9 ;.
i The Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated X To select a link: slide the controller down-
for safety reasons while driving.
wards 6 =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
Operation
X To call up the menu of the Digital Owner's
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Manual: select the Þ symbol A.
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button on the centre console. system using the buttons on the centre
The vehicle overview appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Owner's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 and pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Own-
X Confirm the message about the warning and er's Manual remains open in the background.
safety notes 7.
The menu for the Digital Owner's Manual
appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 29
Environmental protection Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
Our objectives are to use the natural resour- Returning an end-of-life vehicle
ces which form the basis of our existence on EU countries only:
this planet sparingly and in a manner which Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
takes the requirements of both nature and vehicle for environmentally friendly disposal in
humanity into consideration. accordance with the European Union (EU) End-
You too can help to protect the environment Of-Life Vehicles Directive.
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- A network of return points and disassembly
tally-responsible manner. plants has been established for you to return
your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, points free of charge. This makes an important
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on contribution to closing the recycling circle and
the following factors: conserving resources.
Roperating conditions of your vehicle For further information on the recycling and dis-
posal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back
Ryour personal driving style conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-
You can influence both factors. Therefore, Benz website for your country.
please bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel
consumption. H Environmental note
Robserve the correct tyre pressure.
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the assemblies and parts which are of the same
vehicle. quality as new parts. For these, the same war-
Rremove the roof rack once you no longer ranty applies as for new parts.
need it.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as
control units and sensors for these restraint
to environmental protection. You should
systems, may be installed in the following
therefore adhere to the service intervals. areas of your vehicle:
Rall maintenance work should be carried out
Rdoors
at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor pillars
Personal driving style: Rdoor sills
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rseats
starting the engine. Rdashboard
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Rinstrument cluster
is stationary. Rcentre console
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and efficiency of the restraint systems.
braking.
Z
30 Operating safety
Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified vehicle may differ from that in the descrip-
specialist workshop. tions and illustrations.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of The original purchase contract documentation
Introduction
your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys-
well as accessories relevant to safety that have tems in your vehicle.
not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This Should you have any questions concerning
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant equipment and operation, please consult a
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
ity. Use only tyres, wheels and accessories that important documents and should be kept in the
have been specifically approved for your vehi- vehicle.
cle.
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conver-
sion parts and accessories that have been spe-
cifically approved for your vehicle for their reli- Operating safety
ability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing Important safety notes
market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to
assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore G WARNING
accepts no responsibility for the use of such
parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they If you do not have the prescribed service/
have been officially approved or independently maintenance work or necessary repairs car-
approved by a testing centre. ried out, this could result in malfunctions or
In Germany, certain parts are officially approved system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
for installation or modification only if they com- Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
ply with legal requirements. This also applies to
some other countries. All genuine Mercedes- nance work as well as necessary repairs car-
Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
use of non-approved parts may invalidate the
vehicle's general operating permit. G WARNING
This is the case: Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
that for which the vehicle's general operating hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
permit was granted of fire.
Rif other road users could be endangered
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
affected
particular, remove parts of plants or other
Always specify the vehicle identification number flammable materials which have become
(VIN) (Y page 393) when ordering genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual G WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their
Vehicle equipment software as well as wiring could affect their
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, function and/or the operation of other net-
standard and optional equipment for your worked components. This could in particular
vehicle that were available at the time of going also be the case for systems relevant to
to press. Country-specific differences are safety. They might not function properly any-
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be more and/or jeopardise the operational
fitted with all features described. This is also
the case for systems and functions relevant to safety of the vehicle. There is an increased
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your risk of an accident and injury.
Operating safety 31
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can
electronic components or their software. obtain further information from any Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.
Always have work on electrical and electronic
Introduction
components carried out at a qualified special-
Electromagnetic compatibility
ist workshop.
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- components has been checked and certified
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- according to the currently valid version of Reg-
dered invalid. ulation ECE-R 10.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Jack
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
kerb or an unpaved road Copy and translation of the original declaration
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. of conformity:
a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pothole in EC declaration of conformity
the road 1. The signatory, as a representative
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
Manufacturer:
parts of the chassis
BRANO a.s.
In situations like this, the body, underbody,
chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be dam- 74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opav-
aged without the damage being visible. Com- ská 1000,
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect- Czech Republic
edly fail or, in the case of an accident, no lon- ID no.: 64-387-5933
ger withstand the strain they are designed to VAT ID no.: CZ64-387-5933
withstand.
declares, as our sole responsibility, that the
If the underbody panelling is damaged, com- product:
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
2. Description:
twigs can gather between the underbody and
a) Jack
the underbody panelling. If these materials
come into contact with hot parts of the Model, number:
exhaust system, they can catch fire. A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
In such situations, have the vehicle checked B) A 240 580 00 18
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- C) A 639 580 02 18
cialist workshop. If, on continuing your jour-
ney, you notice that driving safety is impaired, Year of manufacture: 2015
stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- Fulfils all relevant conditions
tion to road and traffic conditions. In such Directive no. 2006/42/EC
cases, consult a qualified specialist work- b) Description and purpose of use:
shop. The jack is intended only for raising the
specified vehicle according to the operating
instructions affixed to the jack.
Declarations of conformity 3. Reference data of the harmonised stand-
ards or specifications
Wireless vehicle components
A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL
The following information applies to all compo- 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693
nents of the vehicle and the information sys- B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10,
tems and communication devices integrated in MBN 10435
the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10
waves.
Technical documentation for the product is
The components of this vehicle that receive held by the manufacturer. Authorised rep-
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with resentative for the compilation of the tech-
the basic requirements and all other relevant
Z
32 Operating safety
nical documentation: director of the tech- City

nical department at Brano a.s. 5. 05.05.2015
4. Hradec nad Moravicí Date
Introduction
Signed by:
Director of Quality
TIREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:
EC declaration of conformity
In accordance with EC directive 2006/42/EC
We hereby declare that the product
Product designation: Daimler electric air pump
Model designation: 0851, DT/UW 200045
MB part no.: A 000 583 8000
complies with the following relevant regulations:
EMC 2004/108/EC (2014/30/EU)
Applied harmonised standards, in particular:
DIN EN 55014-1:2012-05
DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06
Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau, Germany
Authorised representative: IMS department
Date: March 2015
Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L
Diagnostics connection ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a

The diagnostics connection is used for connect- risk of an accident.
ing diagnostic equipment at a qualified special- Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
ist workshop. they do not get into the driver's footwell.
G WARNING Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-
scribed in order to ensure that there is always
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
loose floormats and do not place several floor-
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
mats on top of one another.
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- on the diagnostics connection is used, the
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for starter battery may discharge.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
G WARNING mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the next emissions test during the main inspec-
the clearance around the pedals or block a tion.
depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
Data stored in the vehicle 33
Qualified specialist workshop Rtraffic rules and regulations

Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
A qualified specialist workshop has the neces- vehicles
sary special skills, tools and qualifications to
Introduction
correctly carry out any necessary work on your
vehicle. This particularly applies to work rele-
vant to safety. Implied warranty
Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. ! Follow the instructions in this manual about
Always have the following work carried out at a the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
qualified specialist workshop: about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
Rwork relevant to safety your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
ventions against these instructions are not
Rservice and maintenance work
covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied
Rrepair work warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-
Rmodifications, installations and conversions ranty.
Rwork on electronic components
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. QR code for rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and

Vehicle registration on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi- for your vehicle. The current rescue card con-
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is tains, in a compact form, the most important
improved as a result of the inspection. information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing
Mercedes-Benz can inform you about vehicle of the electric cables.
inspections only if it has your registration data. You can find more information under
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
registered in your name in the following cases:
Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an
authorised specialist dealer. Data stored in the vehicle
Rif your vehicle has not yet been inspected at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Information from electronic control
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
units
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Your vehicle is fitted with electronic control
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible units. Some of them are essential for ensuring
about any change in address or vehicle owner- that your vehicle runs safely, while others assist
ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Ser- you with driving (driver assistance systems).
vice Centre, for example. Your vehicle also offers a range of comfort and
entertainment functions, which are also enabled
by means of electronic control units.
Correct use Electronic control units contain data memories
that can store, either temporarily or perma-
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- nently, technical information about the vehicle's
ers could fail to recognise certain dangers. operating state, component stress, mainte-
Leave warning stickers in position. nance requirements and technical events and
Observe the following information when driving errors.
your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rtechnical data for the vehicle
Z
34 Data stored in the vehicle
This information generally documents the state These include:

of a component, module, system or the sur- RMultimedia data such as music, films or pho-
roundings, such as: tos for playback on an integrated multimedia
Introduction
ROperating conditions of system components system

(e.g. levels, battery status, tyre pressure) RAddress book data for use in connection with
RStatus messages concerning the vehicle or its an integrated hands-free system or integra-
individual components (e.g. wheel revolution ted navigation system
number / speed, deceleration in movement, REntered destinations
lateral acceleration, display showing fastened RData concerning use of internet services
belts)
These data are stored either locally in the vehi-
RMalfunctions and defects in key system com-
cle or on a device connected to the vehicle. If
ponents (e.g. lights, brakes) these data are stored in the vehicle, you can
RInformation on vehicle-damaging events delete it at any time. These data are transferred
RSystem responses in special driving situa- to third parties only if you explicitly request this;
tions (e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of in the case of online services in particular,
stability control systems) whether or not your data are transferred
RAmbient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain depends on your chosen settings.
sensor) You can store convenience settings / custom
In addition to implementing the control unit settings in the vehicle and change these at any
function of the vehicle, these data are used by time.
the manufacturer to identify and rectify faults Depending on the equipment, these settings
and optimize vehicle functions. Most of these include:
data are stored in a volatile memory and pro- RSeat and steering wheel position settings
cessed only in the vehicle itself. Only a small
RChassis and air-conditioning settings
amount of these data are stored in event or fault
memories. RCustom settings such as interior lighting
If you want to make use of service activities, the If your vehicle contains the necessary equip-
technical data can be read from the vehicle by ment, you can connect your smartphone or
ServiceNetwork employees or by third parties. another mobile end device to your vehicle. You
Service activities include repairs, maintenance, can then operate this device via the controls
warranty claims and quality assurance meas- integrated in the vehicle. The image and sound
ures. The data are read via the legally prescribed on your smartphone, for example, can be output
OBD ("on-board diagnostics") connection in the via the multimedia system. At the same time,
vehicle. The ServiceNetwork centres or third you can have specific information sent to your
parties collect, process and use the data. The smartphone.
data documents the technical condition of the Depending on the type of integration, such infor-
vehicle, provides assistance for troubleshooting mation includes:
and improving quality and is sometimes sent to RGeneral vehicle data
the manufacturer. The manufacturer is also sub-
RPosition data
ject to product liability, for which the manufac-
turer needs access to technical data from vehi- This allows you to use selected apps on your
cles. smartphone, such as navigation or music play-
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset dur- back. No further interaction between the smart-
ing repairs or maintenance work carried out by a phone and vehicle – in particular, active access
service outlet. to vehicle data – takes place. The form in which
data are further processed is determined by the
Depending on the chosen equipment, you can provider of the app in question. Whether you can
add data yourself to the various vehicle comfort apply any settings at all and, if so, which settings
and infotainment functions. you can apply depends on the app and your
smartphone’s operating system.
Copyright information 35
Service providers found on the data carrier in your vehicle docu-

ment wallet and, including updates, on the fol-
Wireless network connection lowing website:
Introduction
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tion, you can share data between your vehicle
and other systems. The wireless network con-
nection is enabled by either an in-vehicle trans-
mitter and receiver or your own mobile end
device (e.g. smartphone). This wireless network
connection allows you to use online functions
including online services and apps provided by
the manufacturer or other providers.
Services provided by the manufacturer

In the case of online services provided by the
manufacturer, the manufacturer describes the
various functions at a suitable point and the
associated data privacy information. Personal
data may be required in order for you to use
online services. Data are exchanged via a secure
connection (e.g. using the IT system specially
provided for this purpose by the manufacturer).
Any collection, processing or use of personal
data beyond the purpose simply of providing
services takes place only on the basis of a legal
permit or consent.
You can normally activate or deactivate the
services and functions (some of which are sub-
ject to a fee). In some cases, this also applies to
the entire data connection system in the vehi-
cle. However, this does not apply in particular to
legally prescribed functions and services such
as the "eCall" emergency call system.
Third-party services
If it is possible to use online services from third-
party providers, these services are the respon-
sibility of and subject to the data privacy and
terms of use of the provider in question. The
manufacturer has no influence on the content
that is shared.
For this reason, please contact the service pro-
vider to find out about the type, scope and pur-
pose of the collection and use of personal data
when you use third-party services.
Copyright information
Information on licences for free and open-

source software used in your vehicle can be
Z
36 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel gearshift pad- I Diagnostics connection 32
dles 169
J Opens the bonnet 345
; Combination switch 123
K Light switch 121
= Horn
L Control panel for:
? Instrument cluster 38 Y Activating Distance
A DIRECT SELECT lever 163 Pilot DISTRONIC with Steer-
ing Pilot 198
B Climate control systems 136 Ç Activating Active Lane
Keeping Assist 233
C Overhead control panel 43
c Deactivating Parking
D Control panel for multimedia Assist PARKTRONIC 214
system and vehicle functions 40 Ô Switching on the 360°
camera 219
E Ignition lock 153
Switching on the head-up
Start/Stop button 154
display 248
F Adjusts the steering wheel 114 Vehicles without a driver
assistance system: card/
G Cruise control lever 188 coin holder
H Electric parking brake 179
Cockpit 37
At a glance
: Overhead control panel 43 E Light switch 121
; Climate control systems 136 F Opens the bonnet 345
= Combination switch 123 G Diagnostics connection 32
? Instrument cluster 38 H Electric parking brake 179
A Horn I Ignition lock 153
B Start/Stop button 154
DIRECT SELECT lever 163
J Adjusts the steering wheel 114
C Steering wheel gearshift pad-
dles 169 K Cruise control lever 188
D Control panel for: L Control panel for multimedia
Y Activating Distance system and vehicle functions 40
Pilot DISTRONIC with Steer-
ing Pilot 198
Ç Activating Active Lane
Keeping Assist 233
c Deactivating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC 214
Ô Switching on the 360°
camera 219
Switching on the head-up
display 248
Vehicles without driver assis-
tance systems: card/coin
holder
38 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance
i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page

(km/h)
Indicator and warning lamps:
Function Page ! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 304
: Speedometer with segments 245
! ABS malfunctioning 301
Indicator and warning lamps:
; Engine diagnostics 304
å ESP® OFF 301 % Diesel engine: preglow 155
÷ ESP® 301 ! Electric parking brake
· Distance warning 307 applied (red) 304
Ð Power steering assis- J Brakes (red) 300
tance malfunctioning 309 J Brakes (yellow) 300
6 Restraint system 46 M SPORT handling mode
ü Seat belt not fastened 299 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 303
K Main-beam headlamps 123
A Coolant temperature display 246
L Dipped-beam head-
lamps 122 Indicator and warning lamp:
T Side lamps 122 ? Coolant too hot/cold 305
R Rear foglamp 122 B Fuel gauge display
h Tyre pressure monitor 308 Indicator and warning lamp:
; #! Turn signals 123 8 Fuel reserve with fuel
filler flap location indicator
= Multifunction display 247 (right-hand side) 304
? Rev counter 246
i Information on displaying the outside tem- found under "Outside temperature display"
perature on the multifunction display can be (Y page 246).
Multifunction steering wheel 39
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 247 ? ò Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operates the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 255 puter 246
W X Adjusts the vol- ñ Switches on voice-
ume operated control for naviga-
8 Mute tion or LINGUATRONIC
ó Switches on voice-
operated control for naviga-
tion or LINGUATRONIC
i Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys- i Vehicles with COMAND Online multime-
tem: you can find further information dia system: you can find further information
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Owner's Manual Owner's Manual
Ron voice-operated control of the navigation Ron the single DVD drive in the Digital Own-
system in the manufacturer's operating er's Manual
instructions Ron LINGUATRONIC in the separate operat-
ing instructions
40 Centre console
Centre console
Centre console, upper section
At a glance

: Climate control systems 136 B Õ Media button (see Dig-
ital Owner's Manual)
; £ Hazard warning lamps 123
C $ Radio button (see Digi-
= Ø Vehicle functions/ tal Owner's Manual)
system settings button (see
Digital Owner's Manual) D Ø Navigation button (see
Digital Owner's Manual)
? % Telephone button (see
Digital Owner's Manual) E þ Inserts or ejects a CD
or DVD (see Digital Owner's
A PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- Manual)
tor lamps 46
ATA indicator lamp 83
Centre console 41
Centre console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
At a glance
: Stowage compartment 323 D Activates/deactivates the
Ashtray 337 off-road program 202
Cigarette lighter 337 E è ECO start/stop func-
Power socket 338 tion 157
Cup holders 335
F p Manual gearshifting (per-
; Adjusts the volume 311 manent setting) 169
Switches the sound on/off 311 G É Adjusts the vehicle
= Ü Switches the multime- level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 205
dia system on/off 311 c Deactivates Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC 214
? å Activates/deactivates
ESP® 77 H DYNAMIC SELECT switch 161
A Touchpad 311 I % Back button 311
B Ã DSR (Downhill Speed J Controller 311

Regulation) 201 K g Favourites button 313
C Opens stowage space with
media interface 323
42 Centre console
Centre console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

At a glance

: Stowage compartment 323 B Stowage space with media
Ashtray 337 interface 323
Cigarette lighter 337 C Touchpad 311
Power socket 338
D å Activates/deactivates
Cup holders 335
ESP® 77
; Adjusts the volume 311 M Activates/deactivates
Switches the sound on/off 311 SPORT handling mode 77
Vehicles with AMG Perform- E AMG sports suspension
ance exhaust system: based on AIR BODY CON-
Ü Switches the multime- TROL 207
dia system on/off 311
F Manual gearshifting (perma-
= AMG switchable perform- nent setting) 169
ance exhaust system 159
Ü Switches the multime- G DYNAMIC SELECT switch 161
dia system on/off 311 H % Back button 311
? è ECO start/stop func- I Controller 311
tion 157
J g Favourites button 313
A É Adjusts the vehicle
level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 205
Overhead control panel 43
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: p Switches the left-hand C ï Info call button 341
reading lamp on/off 127
D Spectacles compartment 324
; | Switches the automatic
interior lighting control E 3 Operates the pano-
on/off 127 rama sliding sunroof 103
Operates the roller sunblinds 104
= G SOS button 340
F Rear-view mirror
? c Switches the front inte- Automatic anti-dazzle 118
rior lighting on/off 127
Manual anti-dazzle 116
A u Switches the rear inte-
rior lighting on/off 127 G F Breakdown assistance
call button 341
B p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 127
44 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: r45= E 7Zª\
Stores settings for the seat, Adjusts and folds the exterior
exterior mirrors and steering mirrors in/out electrically 117
column 119
F W Opens/closes the right
; Electric seat adjustment 109 side window 98
= c Seat heating 112 G W Opens/closes the rear
right side window 98
? s Seat ventilation 113
H n Override feature for the
A Opens the door 91 controls in the rear compart-
B % & Unlocks/locks ment 71
the vehicle 92 I Ü Swivels the ball cou-
C W Opens/closes the rear pling in/out 237
left side window 98 J p Opens/closes the tail-
D W Opens/closes the left gate 97
side window 98
Occupant safety 45
Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only offer
protection if all vehicle occupants always:
Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened
(Y page 48)
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 107)
As the driver, you must also make sure that the
steering wheel is also adjusted properly.
Safety
Observe the information on the correct driver's
seat position (Y page 107).
In addition, you must make sure that the airbags
can inflate properly if they are deployed
(Y page 50).
X To activate: press and hold the ! but- An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat
ton : for approximately one second. belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the increases the level of protection for vehicle
alarm system is activated. occupants in the event of an accident. The air-
X To deactivate: press the ! button : bags are not deployed, for example, in the event
again. of an accident in which sufficient protection is
or offered by the seat belt. In addition, only those
airbags, which in the applicable accident situa-
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
tions offer additional protection, are deployed in
or the event of an accident. However, the seat belt
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function and airbag generally do not protect against
or KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop but- objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
ton. side.
The key must be in the vehicle. Information on how the restraint system oper-
ates can be found under "Deployment of belt
The panic alarm function is available only in cer-
tensioners and airbags" (Y page 57).
tain countries.
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
children travelling with you in the vehicle as well
as on child restraint systems (Y page 60).
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
Important safety notes
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of G WARNING
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. If the restraint system is modified, it may no
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during longer work as intended. The restraint system
an accident. may then not perform its intended protective
The restraint system includes the: function by failing in an accident or triggering
Rseat belt system
unexpectedly, for example. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Rairbags
Rchild restraint system Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do
Rchild seat securing system
not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accom-

modate a person with disabilities, contact a
Z
46 Occupant safety
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running.
Safety
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in

good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
nents of the restraint system are in operational part of the automatic deactivation system of the
readiness. front-passenger front airbag.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint The indicator lamps display the status of the
system warning lamp: front-passenger front airbag.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
on onds, then both indicator lamps are off
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-
engine running passenger front airbag is able to deploy in the
Rlights up again while the engine is running event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
G WARNING passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, not be deployed in the event of an accident.
restraint system components may be trig- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
intended during an accident. This may affect lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
fatal injury.
seat, the front-passenger front airbag must be
Have the restraint system checked and either disabled or enabled; see the following
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist points. You must make sure of this both before
workshop. and during a journey.
RChildren in a rearward-facing child
restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit. The front-
passenger front airbag is disabled. Make sure
that you read the notes on the "Automatic
front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-
tem" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 60).
RChildren in a forward-facing child
restraint system: depending on the installed
child restraint system and the age and size of
the child, the front-passenger front airbag is
either disabled or enabled. Therefore, make
sure that you read the notes on the "Auto-
matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-
Occupant safety 47
tion system" (Y page 53) and on "Children in The belt force limiters on the front seats are
the vehicle" (Y page 60). synchronised with the front airbags, which take
RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG on a part of the deceleration force. This can
OFF indicator lamp must be off. The front- reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu-
passenger front airbag is enabled. Depending pants are subjected during an accident.
on the build of the person on the front- ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
OFF indicator lamp may light up. The front- buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then wise, the belt tensioner and sidebag could be
Safety
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In triggered in the event of an accident and
this case, the front-passenger seat should not would need to be replaced.
be used.
Make sure that you read the notes on the Important safety notes
"Automatic front-passenger front airbag
deactivation system" (Y page 53) as well as G WARNING
on "Seat belts" (Y page 47) and "Airbags"
(Y page 50). There, you can also find infor- If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot
mation on the correct seat position. perform its intended protective function. Fur-
thermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can
cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of
Seat belts an accident, heavy braking or sudden
changes of direction. There is an increased
Introduction risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
means of restraining the movement of vehicle their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
occupants in the event of a collision or if the
ting properly.
vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The The components of the restraint system work in
seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occu- conjunction with each other. They can only offer
pants in the best position in relation to the air- protection if all vehicle occupants always:
bag being deployed. Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened
The seat belt system consists of: (Y page 48)
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
Rseat belts
properly (Y page 107)
Rbelt tensioners for the front seat belts and the
outer seat belts in the rear G WARNING
Rbelt force limiters for the front seat belts and The seat belt does not offer the intended level
the outer seat belts in the rear of protection if you have not moved the back-
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply from rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt ing or in the event of an accident, you could
strap cannot be pulled out any further.
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the
event of a collision so that it fits tightly across abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
occupants back in the direction of the seat injury.
backrest. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
The belt tensioner does not, however, correct an your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
incorrect seat position or correct the routing of is in an almost vertical position and that the
a seat belt that is worn incorrectly.
shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed
If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force across the centre of your shoulder.
limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by
the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced.
Z
48 Occupant safety
G WARNING Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners,

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure
seat belts correctly without an additional suit- that seat belts are not damaged or worn and
able restraint system. If the seat belt is worn are clean. After an accident, have the seat
incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended belts checked immediately at a qualified spe-
protective function. Furthermore, an incor- cialist workshop.
rectly worn seat belt can cause additional
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy
Safety
seat belts that have been approved specifically

braking or sudden changes of direction. There for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise,
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even your vehicle's general operating permit could be
fatal. invalidated.
Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed
additional suitable restraint systems. for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit
another multipoint seat belt, e.g. sport or racing
If a child younger than twelve years old and seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide
under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi- the best level of protection.
cle: G WARNING
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
priate to the age, weight and size of the child damaged or may even break in the event of an
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety accident. This poses an increased risk of
notes on the "Automatic front-passenger injury or even fatal injury.
front airbag deactivation system" Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
(Y page 53) Never modify the seat belt system.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 60) in addition to the manufactur- Correct seat belt use
er's operating and installation instructions for Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
the child restraint system (Y page 47).
G WARNING All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
extremely dirty, bleached or dyed is in motion.
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or When fastening a seat belt, always make sure
that:
extremely dirty
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
Rmodifications have been made to the belt
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels
Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across the body
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- coat.
fied or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for Rthe seat belt is not twisted
example in the event of an accident. Modified Only then can any forces that occur be dis-
seat belt tensioners may be deployed unin- tributed across the surface of the seat belt.
tentionally or not function as intended. There Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even across the centre of the shoulder
fatal. The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
Occupant safety 49
arm or behind your back. If possible, adjust X Adjust the seat (Y page 107).
the seat belt to the appropriate height. The seat backrest must be in an almost
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across the lap upright position.
as low down as possible X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
The lap belt must always be routed across and engage belt tongue ; in belt buckle :.
your hip joints and never across your abdo- The seat belt on the driver's seat and the
men. This applies particularly to pregnant front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
women. If necessary, press the lap belt down matically; see "Belt adjustment"
into your hip joints and pull tight with the (Y page 50).
Safety
shoulder section of the belt. X If necessary, pull upwards on the seat belt in
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin- front of your chest so that the belt sits tightly
ted or fragile objects across your body.
If you have such items located on or in your The shoulder section of the seat belt must
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store always be routed across the centre of the shoul-
these in a suitable place. der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
Infants and children must never travel sitting The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event tions.
of an accident, they could be crushed X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. the belt outlet downwards.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
the seat belt is also being used by one of the position and make sure that the belt outlet
vehicle's occupants engages.
Also ensure that no objects are placed
between a person and the seat. e.g. a cush-
ion. Seat belt for the centre rear seat
Seat belts are intended only to secure and If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the and back up again, the rear centre seat belt may
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug- lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
gage or loads (Y page 323).
X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at the
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts belt outlet on the backrest and then release it
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt again.
(Y page 47) and the information on the correct The seat belt is retracted and released.
use of the seat belt (Y page 48).
If a passenger is wearing the centre rear seat Releasing seat belts
belt, also observe the information on the seat
belt for the centre rear seat (Y page 49). ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfil their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X Press release button in belt buckle, hold belt
tongue firmly and guide the seat belt back.
Basic illustration
Z
50 Occupant safety
Belt adjustment Airbags

Seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the Introduction
PRE-SAFE® convenience function. With this
function, the driver's and co-driver's seat belts The installation location of an airbag is identified
are adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle by the AIRBAG symbol.
occupant. An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat
The belt strap is tightened slightly when: belt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt. The
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and airbag offers additional protection in corre-
sponding accident situations.
Safety
Rthe ignition is switched on

Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain different airbag systems work independently of
tightening force if any slack is detected between each other (Y page 57).
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust- However, no system available today can com-
ing. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
You can switch the seat belt adjustment on and It is also not possible to completely rule out a
off using the multimedia system. Information on risk of injury caused by an airbag due to the
switching the seat belt adjustment on and off speed at which the airbag must be deployed.
can be found in the Digital Operating Instruc-
tions. Important safety notes
Seat belt warning for the driver and G WARNING

front-passenger If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro-
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- tective function and can even cause addi-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up tional injuries when deployed. There is an
continuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
may sound. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and that all vehicle occupants:
the warning tone ceases when the driver and the
Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including
front passenger have fastened their seat belts.
pregnant women
Rear seat belt status indicator Rare seated correctly and maintain the fur-
thest possible distance from the airbags
Robserve the following notes
Always ensure that there are no objects loca-
ted between the airbag and the vehicle occu-
pant.
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning

your journey. Always make sure that the seat
The rear seat belt status indicator is available is in an almost upright position. The centre of
only in certain countries. the head restraint must support the head at
The rear seat belt status indicator informs you about eye level.
which rear seat belt is not fastened. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
Cancelling the rear seat belt status indicator as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
immediately (Y page 265). tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
RHold the steering wheel only by the rim. This
allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the
Occupant safety 51
door or side window. You may otherwise be in function correctly. There is an increased risk
the deployment area of the airbags. of injury.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash- Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise to it.
be in the deployment area of the airbag.
RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in G WARNING
suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. the doors. Modifications or work not per-
Safety
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
observe the following notes:
ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
RAlways secure children under twelve years of function of the sensors being impaired. The
age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child airbags might therefore not function properly
restraint systems.
any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot
RChild restraint systems should preferably be
protect vehicle occupants as they are
fitted to the rear seats.
designed to do. This poses an increased risk
RSecure a child to the front-passenger seat
only when the front-passenger front airbag is of injury.
disabled, and then only in a rearward-facing Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR Always have work on the doors or door pan-
BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the elling carried out at a qualified specialist
front-passenger front airbag is disabled workshop.
(Y page 46).
RBe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Automatic front-passenger Front airbags
front airbag deactivation system"
(Y page 53) and on "Children in the vehicle" ! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
(Y page 60) in addition to the manufactur- passenger seat. This could cause the system
er's operating and installation instructions for to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
the child restraint system. event of an accident, the restraint systems on
the front-passenger side may be triggered
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
and have to be replaced.
the airbag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an airbag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows, Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steer-
rear side trim or side walls ing wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ;
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in deploys in front of and above the glove com-
the pockets of your clothing. Store such partment.
objects in a suitable place. When deployed, the front airbags offer addi-
G WARNING tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer
Z
52 Occupant safety
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front airbag (Y page 46).
The front-passenger front airbag will deploy only
if:
Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag
deactivation system has detected that the
front-passenger seat is occupied
(Y page 53). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Safety
indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 53)

Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy
next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest.
Driver's kneebag
When deployed, the sidebag offers additional
thorax protection. However, it does not protect
the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
When the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side
on which the impact occurs.
Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger
front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on
the front-passenger side deploys under the fol-
Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering lowing conditions:
column. The driver's kneebag is triggered Ran occupant is detected in the front-
together with the front airbags. passenger seat or
The driver's kneebag offers additional thigh, Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
in the driver's seat. If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
i The driver's kneebag is only available in cer- the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys
tain countries. if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In
this case, deployment is independent of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or
Sidebags not.
G WARNING
Windowbags
Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even
prevent deployment of the airbags integrated
into the seats. The airbags may then fail to
protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
Operation of the automatic co-driver's front
airbag deactivation system may also be
impaired. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
Use only seat covers which have been specif-
ically approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety 53
Windowbags : are integrated in the side of the the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat
roof frame and deploy in the area from the A- backrest and the head restraint position accord-
pillar to the C-pillar. ingly. Only then is the correct function of the
When deployed, the windowbag enhances the automatic front-passenger front airbag deacti-
level of protection for the head. However, it does vation system guaranteed. Always observe the
not protect the chest or arms. information on suitable positioning of the child
When the restraint system control unit detects a restraint system (Y page 65) in addition to the
side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the child restraint system manufacturer's installa-
side on which the impact occurs. tion instructions.
Safety
If the system determines that it can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the seat Operation of automatic front-passenger
belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other airbag deactivation
accident situations (Y page 57).
Automatic front-passenger front air-

bag deactivation
Introduction
In order to recognise a child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat, the automatic front-
passenger front airbag deactivation system cat-
egorises the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front airbag is either enabled or disabled. If a : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
to the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER The indicator lamps inform you whether the
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up after front-passenger front airbag is disabled or ena-
the system self-test and remain lit. The front- bled.
passenger front airbag is disabled.
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
The system does not disable:
turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
Rthe sidebag tion lock.
Rthe windowbag The system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Rthe seat belt tensioner The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
Make sure that your vehicle is equipped with the AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
automatic front-passenger front airbag deacti- taneously for approximately six seconds.
vation system (Y page 64). If this is not the The indicator lamps display the status of the
case, always install a child restraint system on a front-passenger front airbag:
suitable rear seat (Y page 65).
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child onds, then both indicator lamps are off
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-
sure to observe the correct positioning of the passenger front airbag is able to deploy in the
child restraint system. Never place objects event of an accident.
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length.
The entire base of the child restraint system passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then
must always rest on the seat cushion of the not be deployed in the event of an accident.
front-passenger seat. The backrest of a forward- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
facing child restraint system must, as far as off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
possible, rest flat against the backrest of the lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
must not touch the roof or be put under strain by cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Z
54 Occupant safety
If the status of the front-passenger front airbag bled in accordance with the person in the
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an airbag front-passenger seat.
display message appears on the instrument
cluster (Y page 276). When the front-passenger Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the back as far back as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be Rthe person is seated correctly.
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
airbag both before and during the journey. Make sure, both before and during the jour-
If a person sits in the front-passenger seat, they ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front airbag is correct.
Safety
must be:
Rseated with the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their back
G WARNING
against the seat backrest If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible restraint system on the co-driver's seat and
If the front passenger does not observe these the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
conditions, the automatic front-passenger front is off, the co-driver's front airbag can deploy in
airbag deactivation system may be influenced, the event of an accident. The child could be
e.g. because the front passenger: struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- of injury, possibly even fatal.
selves on a vehicle armrest In this case, always make sure that the co-
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised driver's front airbag has been disabled. The
from the seat cushion PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The front-passenger front airbag may be disa- must be lit.
bled by mistake as a result of these or similar
actions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
OFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. The stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
front-passenger front airbag then does not restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
deploy during an accident. Further information can be found under "Prob-
G WARNING lems with the automatic front-passenger front
airbag deactivation system" (Y page 57).
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disa- G WARNING
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
accident and cannot perform its intended pro- restraint system on the front-passenger seat
tective function. A person in the front- and you position the front-passenger seat too
passenger seat could then, for example, come close to the dashboard, in the event of an
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- accident, the child could:
cially if the person is sitting too close to the Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
injury or even fatal injury.
cator lamp is lit, for example
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
always make sure that:
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
passenger seat is correct and that the front- fatal injury.
passenger front airbag is enabled or disa-
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
Occupant safety 55
belt guide on the child restraint system. The Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards son with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt the system self-test depending on the result
sash guide and the front-passenger seat of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
accordingly. Always observe the child - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
restraint system manufacturer's installation lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
instructions. as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-
Safety
son with a small build can sit on a rear seat.
Always observe the vehicle-specific information - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
for the correct positioning of the child restraint lamp is lit, a person with a smaller build
system (Y page 65). should not use the front-passenger seat.
If the automatic front-passenger front airbag Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
deactivation system detects that: adult or a person with the build of an adult, the
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
lights up after the system self-test and cates that the front-passenger front airbag is
remains lit. This indicates that the front- enabled.
passenger front airbag is disabled. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
child in a rearward-facing child restraint sys- (Y page 60).
tem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If the automatic front-passenger front airbag
lamp lights up after the system self-test and deactivation system is malfunctioning, the red
remains lit. This indicates that the front- 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
passenger front airbag is disabled. instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR
But in the case of a child in a rearward-facing BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR The front-passenger front airbag is disabled in
BAG OFF indicator lamp can also go out after this case and does not deploy during an acci-
the system self-test. This indicates that the dent. Have the automatic front-passenger front
front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The airbag deactivation system checked and
result of the classification is dependent on, repaired immediately at a qualified specialist
among other factors, the child restraint sys- workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
tem and the child's build. It is recommended you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
that you fit the child restraint system to a purpose.
suitable rear seat. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
child in a forward-facing child restraint sys- repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
tem, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
the system self-test depending on the result purpose.
of the classification, or it goes out. The result For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
of the classification is dependent on, among mends that you use only a child restraint system
other factors, the child restraint system and that has been tested and approved by
the child's build. Mercedes-Benz in combination with the auto-
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as matic front-passenger front airbag deactivation
possible. Always observe the information in system.
"Child restraint systems on the front-
passenger seat" (Y page 64) and in "Suita- System self-test
ble positioning of the child restraint system"
(Y page 65). Alternatively, you can fit the G DANGER
child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
Z
56 Occupant safety
not light up during the system self-test, the passenger seat may not be used. Do not
system is malfunctioning. The front- install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger front airbag might be triggered passenger seat. Have the automatic front-
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all passenger front airbag deactivation system
in the event of an accident with high deceler- checked and repaired immediately at a quali-
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or fied specialist workshop.
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not G WARNING
Safety
be used. Do not install a child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the
on the front-passenger seat. Have the auto- child restraint system could affect the func-
matic front-passenger front airbag deactivation of the automatic front-passenger front
tion system checked and repaired immedi- airbag deactivation system. This could result
ately at a qualified specialist workshop. in the front-passenger front airbag not func-
tioning as intended during an accident. This
G WARNING poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp injury.
remains lit after the system self-test, the Do not place any objects between the seat
front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will surface and the child restraint system. The
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In entire base of the child restraint system must
this case, the front-passenger front airbag always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
cannot perform its intended protective func- passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- facing child restraint system must, as far as
passenger seat. possible, be resting on the backrest of the
That person could, for example, come into rear reclining seat. Always comply with the
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
if the person is sitting too close to the dash- lation instructions.
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
even fatal injury.
BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
always ensure that: front airbag (Y page 53). If the front-passenger
front airbag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
passenger seat is correct and the front- and then goes out.
passenger front airbag is enabled or disa- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
bled in accordance with the person in the off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
front-passenger seat. lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
rectly fastened seat belt.
Further information can be found under "Prob-
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved lems with the automatic front-passenger front
as far back as possible. airbag deactivation system" (Y page 57).
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
Occupant safety 57
Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 55).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is false.
BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
lights up and remains lit, on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).
even though the front-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
Safety
passenger seat is occu-
passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a per-
son with a build corre- X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-
sponding to that of an tem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is
BAG OFF indicator lamp malfunctioning.
does not light up and/or X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint
does not stay on. system.
The front-passenger seat X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
is: the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.
Rempty X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
Roccupied with a rear- X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
ward-facing child belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger
restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger
seat. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a
suitable rear seat.
X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-
tem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Deployment of belt tensioners and air- G WARNING

bags Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have
been triggered are no longer operational and
therefore cannot protect as intended. There is
G WARNING an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have
hot. There is a risk of injury. been triggered replaced at a qualified special-
Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a ist workshop immediately.
deployed airbag replaced at a qualified spe-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
cialist workshop as soon as possible. vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, par-
Z
58 Occupant safety
ticularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or On vehicles with the automatic front-passenger
an airbag was deployed. front airbag deactivation system: depending on
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- the person in the front-passenger seat, the
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or
situations. This procedure is reversible. enabled. The front-passenger front airbag can
be deployed in an accident only if the
If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
amount of powder may also be released. The
BAG indicator lamps (Y page 46).
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Safety
Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the

Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-
first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled
ing. In general, the powder released is not haz-
with propellant gas. The front airbag is fully
ardous to health but may cause short-term
deployed if the second deployment stage is acti-
breathing difficulties to persons suffering from
vated within a few milliseconds.
asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle The activation threshold for the seat belt ten-
immediately or open the window in order to pre- sioners and airbags is determined based on the
vent breathing difficulties. evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration
or acceleration at various points in the vehicle.
This process is pre-emptive in nature. The trig-
Operation gering/deployment process should take place
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint in good time at the start of the collision.
system control unit evaluates important physi- The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- and the direction of the force are essentially
eration, such as: determined by:
Rduration Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rdirection Rthe collision angle
Rintensity Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe characteristics of the object with which
restraint system control unit triggers the seat the vehicle has collided
belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rear Factors that can be seen and measured only
collision. after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
A seat belt tensioner can be triggered only if: sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with-
Rthe components of the restraint system are
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
operational. You can find further information only parts that are relatively easily deformed are
under: "Restraint system warning lamp" affected and the rate of deceleration is not high.
(Y page 46) Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
the belt buckle of the respective front seat tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
The seat belt tensioners in the rear compart- vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-
ment are triggered independently of the lock bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
status of the seat belts. as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a If the restraint system control unit detects a side
high-severity accident, in certain head-on colli- impact or if the vehicle overturns, the applicable
sions, additional components of the restraint components of the restraint system are activa-
system are deployed independently of each ted independently of each other depending on
other: the apparent type of accident.
Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag RSidebags on the side on which an impact
Rwindowbag, if the system determines that occurs, independently of the seat belt ten-
deployment can offer additional protection to sioner and seat belt usage
that provided by the seat belt Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger
front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag
Occupant safety 59
on the front-passenger side deploys under the adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
following conditions: road and weather conditions and maintain a
- an occupant is detected in the front- safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
passenger seat or carefully.
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat Function
RWindowbag on the side on which an impact
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
occurs, independently of seat belt usage and
regardless of whether the front-passenger Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
Safety
seat is occupied BAS is activated
RFront seat belt tensioners, if the system Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
determines that deployment can offer addi- cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
tional protection for the vehicle occupants in steers or oversteers severely
this situation Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:
RRear seat belt tensioners in certain situations when a driver assistance system intervenes
if the vehicle overturns powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
RWindowbags on the driver's and front- an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
passenger side in certain situations if the uations
vehicle overturns and if the system deter- PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
mines that deployment can offer additional depending on the hazardous situation detected:
protection to that provided by the seat belt Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
The different airbag systems work independ- panorama sliding sunroof are closed
ently of each other. Rvehicles with the memory function for the
How the airbag system works is determined front-passenger seat: the front-passenger
by the severity of the accident detected, seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- position
eration, and the apparent type of accident: If the hazardous situation passes without result-
Rfrontal collision ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt
Rside impact pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®
Roverturn
can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant when the vehicle is stationary.
protection) Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the
locking mechanism is released.
Introduction The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® tion about the convenience function can be
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi- found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50).
cle occupants.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-
! Make sure that there are no objects in the pant protection PLUS)
footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk
that the seats and/or the objects could be Introduction
damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is available only in vehicles
Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE- with the Driving Assistance package.
SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®
event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit- Automatic measures after an acci-

uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive dent
measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Immediately after an accident, the following
Important safety notes measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
prevent an imminent collision. Rthe emergency lighting is activated
The driver is not warned before the intervention Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Safety
of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
Rthe front side windows are lowered
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene: Rvehicles with the memory function: the elec-
Rif the vehicle is reversing trically adjustable steering wheel is raised
Rwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer and there when the driver's door is opened
is a risk of a rear-end collision Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park- is cut off
ing space with assistance from Parking Pilot, Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency
PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. call system: automatic emergency call
Function
Children in the vehicle
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an Important safety notes
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
Accident statistics show that children secured
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures on the rear seats are safer than children secured
depending on the hazardous situation detected: on the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts the child restraint system on a rear seat. Chil-
are pre-tensioned dren are generally better protected there.
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear- If a child younger than twelve years old and
end collision is imminent: under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi-
- the rear hazard warning lamps are activa- cle:
ted and flash at a higher frequency Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta- The child restraint system must be appropri-
tionary ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can- notes in this section in addition to the child
celled: restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
gear is engaged
notes on the automatic front-passenger front
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer airbag deactivation system (Y page 53).
detected
Rif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an
intention to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
ing in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
Children in the vehicle 61
G WARNING Child restraint system

If you leave children unattended in the vehi- Observe the instructions for correct use of the
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in child restraint system (Y page 65).
motion if, for example, they: For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Rrelease the parking brake mends that you use only a child restraint system
recommended by Mercedes-Benz
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park (Y page 69).
position P
G WARNING
Safety
Rstart the engine
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit-
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ted on the seat position suitable for this pur-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
pose, it cannot perform its intended protec-
an accident and injury.
tive function. In the event of an accident,
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key sharp braking or a sudden change in direction,
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave the child may not be held securely. There is an
children unattended in the vehicle. increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
G WARNING instructions and the correct use for the child
If persons (particularly children) are exposed restraint system. Make sure that the entire
to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is surface of the child restraint system is resting
a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never on the seat surface. Never place objects
leave persons (particularly children) unatten- under or behind the child restraint system,
ded in the vehicle. e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-
tems with the original cover designed for
G WARNING them. Only replace damaged covers with gen-
If the child restraint system is placed in direct uine covers.
sunlight, the parts could become very hot.
Children could be suffer burns by touching G WARNING
these parts, in particular on the metallic parts If the child restraint system is fitted incor-
of the child restraint system. There is a risk of rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
injury. the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
If you and your child leave the vehicle, always sudden change in direction. The child
make sure that the child restraint system is restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
for example. If the child restraint system has risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to Always fit child restraint systems properly,
cool down before securing the child in it. even if they are not being used. Make sure
Never leave children unattended in the vehi- that you observe the child restraint system
cle. manufacturer's installation instructions.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have You will find further information on stowing
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting objects, luggage and loads securely under
properly. Particular attention must be paid to "Loading guidelines" (Y page 323).
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt G WARNING
(Y page 47) and the information on the correct Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
use of the seat belt (Y page 48). tems that have been damaged or subjected to
a load in an accident cannot perform their
Z
intended protective function. In the event of the child restraint system with the Top Tether
an accident, sharp braking or a sudden belt, if available.
change in direction, the child may not be held
securely. There is an increased risk of serious When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to
or even fatal injuries. observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions and the instructions for
Immediately replace child restraint systems correct use of the child restraint system
that have been damaged or subjected to a (Y page 65).
load in an accident. Have the child restraint Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX
Safety
securing systems checked in a qualified spe- child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint
cialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-
system again. Size securing rings.
The securing systems of child restraint systems

are:
Rthe seat belt system
Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
If circumstances require you to fit a child
restraint system to the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the information on "Child
restraint systems on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 64).
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- This symbol indicates an ISOFIX position that is
rior and on the child restraint system. suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care system. A similar symbol can be found on the
products to clean child restraint systems rec- ISOFIX child restraint system.
ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing

systems
G WARNING
ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child
restraint systems do not offer sufficient pro-
tection for children whose weight is greater
This symbol indicates an i‑Size position that is
than 22 kg, who are secured using the safety suitable for attaching an i-Size child restraint
belt integrated in the child restraint system. system. A similar symbol can be found on the i-
The child could, for example, not be restrained Size child restraint system.
correctly in the event of an accident. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
! When fitting the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the centre
injury. seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use seat belt could be damaged.
ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child
restraint systems with which the child is also
secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. It helps reduce
the risk of injury even further. If the child
restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt,
this should always be used.
Safety
: ISOFIX securing rings
G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a
; i-Size securing rings Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification
Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the indicator.
rear seat armrest so that ISOFIX securing
rings : or i-Size securing rings ; are acces- If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
sible for the ISOFIX child restraint system or i- locked, this will be shown on the multifunction
Size child restraint system. display on the instrument cluster.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on
both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Size secur- Top Tether anchorages
ing rings ;.
or
X Install the i-Size child restraint system on both
i-Size securing rings ;.
ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing sys-
tems for special child restraint systems. ISOFIX
child restraint systems are approved in accord-
ance with ECE R-44. i-Size child restraint sys-
tems are approved in accordance with ECE
R-129.
Only child restraint systems that have been
approved in accordance with ECE R-44 may be
attached to ISOFIX securing rings. ISOFIX child Top Tether anchorages ? are located on the
restraint systems in accordance with ECE R-44 rear side of the backrests on both outer rear
and i‑Size child restraint systems that have been seats.
approved in accordance with ECE R-129 may be X Move head restraint : upwards.
attached to i-Size securing rings. ISOFIX secur-
ing ring : or i-Size securing ring ; are instal- X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system
led on the left and right sides of the rear seats. with Top Tether. Always comply with the child
Z
restraint system manufacturer's installation You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
instructions when doing so. a result of:
Ra child restraint system that is not detected
by the automatic front-passenger front airbag
deactivation system
Runintentional disabling of the front-passenger
front airbag
Runsuitable positioning of the child restraint
system, e.g. too close to the dashboard
Safety
X Guide Top Tether belt B under head

restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Guide the Top Tether belt B downwards
between the luggage compartment cover =
and seat backrest ;.
X Hook the Top Tether hook A into the Top
Tether anchorage ? on the rear of the seat Please observe the warning notice on the
backrest ;. front-passenger sun visor; see illustration.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not twis-
G WARNING
ted.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
with the child restraint system manufactur- restraint system on the front-passenger seat
er's installation instructions when doing so. and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
X If necessary, move head restraint : back lamp is off, the front-passenger front airbag
down again slightly (Y page 111). Make sure can deploy in the event of an accident. The
that you do not interfere with the correct rout- child could be struck by the airbag. This poses
ing of Top Tether belt B. an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air-
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
Child restraint system on the front- BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
passenger seat
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
General notes on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
Accident statistics show that children secured
child can occur.
on the rear seats are safer than children secured
on the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
a child restraint system on a rear seat. goes out, the front-passenger front airbag is
enabled (Y page 46).
Vehicles with the automatic front-
passenger front airbag deactivation system:
if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint
system to the front-passenger seat, always
observe the information on the "Automatic
front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-
tem" (Y page 53).
Vehicles without the automatic front- retract the seat cushion length. The entire base
passenger front airbag deactivation of the child restraint system must always rest on
system the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.
The backrest of the child restraint system must,
as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of
the front-passenger seat. The child restraint sys-
tem must not touch the roof or be put under
strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of
the seat backrest and the head restraint posi-
tion accordingly. Always make sure that the
Safety
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the
vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forwards and downwards
from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust
the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger
seat accordingly.
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not
equipped with the automatic front-passenger Always observe the information on suitable
front airbag deactivation system, this is indica- positioning of the child restraint system
ted by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to (Y page 65) in addition to the child restraint
the side of the dashboard on the front- system manufacturer's installation and operat-
passenger side. The sticker is visible when you ing instructions.
open the front-passenger door.
In this case, never fit a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat Suitable positioning of the child
(Y page 65). restraint system
Observe the following information under "Rear-
ward-facing child restraint system"
Introduction
(Y page 65) and "Forward-facing child Only child restraint systems approved in accord-
restraint system" (Y page 65) as well as infor- ance with ECE standards ECE R44 or ECE R129
mation on the suitable positioning of the child (i-Size child restraint systems) are permitted for
restraint system (Y page 65). use in the vehicle.
"Universal"-category child restraint systems can
Rearward-facing child restraint system be recognised by their orange approval label and
the text "Universal" or an "i-Size" label.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
lit continuously (Y page 46) is the front-
passenger front airbag disabled.
Always observe the information on suitable
positioning of the child restraint system
(Y page 65) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
Z
approval label. These can be used if the vehicle

and the seat are listed in the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's vehicle model list. For fur-
ther information, contact the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer or visit the manufacturer's
website.
If circumstances require you to fit a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat:
X Always pay attention to the instructions under
Safety
"Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat" (Y page 64).
There you will find instructions on how to cor-
rectly route the shoulder belt strap from the
vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide
on the child restraint system (Y page 65).
X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
possible and fully retract the seat cushion
length.
X Move the backrest to an almost vertical posi-
tion.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of a
forward-facing child restraint system must, as
Example: approval label on the child restraint sys-
tem far as possible, rest flat against the backrest
of the front-passenger seat. The child
The following "Universal"-category ISOFIX or i- restraint system must not touch the roof or be
Size child restraint systems can be used on put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
seats labelled U, UF, IUF or i-U according to the the angle of the seat backrest and the head
following tables: restraint position accordingly. In addition,
Rsuitability of the seats for attaching a belt- observe the child restraint system manufac-
secured child restraint system turer's installation instructions.
Rsuitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX X Set the seat cushion angle in such a way that
child restraint system the front seat cushion edge is in the topmost
Rsuitability of the seats for attaching an i-Size
position and the rear seat cushion edge in the
lowest position.
child restraint system
Semi-universal child restraint systems are indi-
cated by the text "semi-universal" on the
Suitability of the seats for attaching a belt-secured child restraint system

If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category
I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch
the child restraint system.
If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you must remove the head restraint
from the respective seat if possible and if applicable(Y page 111). The backrest of the child restraint
system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
When you remove the child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again immedi-
ately (Y page 111). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before begin-
ning the journey.
Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forwards
slightly.
For certain ISOFIX child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area
of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system may not be possible due
to possible contact with the roof.
Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 61) and the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Legend for the table:
X Seat that is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this
weight category.
Safety
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and
are approved for use in this weight category.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint
systems" table (Y page 69). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle
and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Weight category Front-passenger seat Rear seat
Front- Front- Left, right Centre2
passenger passenger
front airbag front airbag
enabled disabled1
0 up to 10 kg X U, L U, L U, L
0+ up to 13 kg X U, L U, L U, L
I 9 kg to 18 kg UF, L U, L U, L U, L
II 15 kg to 25 kg UF, L U, L U, L U, L
III 22 kg to 36 kg UF, L U, L U, L U, L
Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system

If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you must remove the head restraint
from the respective seat if possible and if applicable(Y page 111). The backrest of the child restraint
system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
When you remove the ISOFIX child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again
immediately (Y page 111). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before
beginning the journey.
slightly.
For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use
is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system may not be possible due to
possible contact with the roof.
1 The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
2 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
Z

X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category
and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" cat-
egory and are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child
restraint systems" table (Y page 69).
The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your
vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For
Safety
more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website.
Weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat left,
right
Carry cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0 up to 10 kg up to approx. E ISO/R1 IL
6 months
0+ up to 13 kg up to approx. E ISO/R1 IL
15 months
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL3
I 9 to 18 kg approx. 9 months to D ISO/R2 IL
4 years
C ISO/R3 IL3
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint position accordingly. In addition, observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation instructions..
Suitability of the seats for attaching an i-Size child restraint system

If you are using a forward-facing child restraint system, you must remove the head restraint from the
respective seat if possible and if applicable(Y page 111). The backrest of the child restraint system
must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
When you remove the child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again immedi-
ately (Y page 111). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before begin-
ning the journey.
3 If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position
and move the backrest to an upright position. Make sure that the front seat backrest does not rest against the
child restraint system.
slightly.
X Seat that is unsuitable for i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
i‑U Suitable for a forward or rearward-facing i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" cate-
gory.
Safety
Seat
Front- Rear seat
passenger
seat Left Centre Right
i‑Size child restraint sys- X i‑U X i‑U

tems
Recommended child restraint systems

General notes
Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 64)
and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 65).
You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt
Weight categories Manufac- Type Approval number Order number
turer (E1 ...) (A 000 ...)4
Category 0: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 36 00
up to 10 kg plus II 970 57 00
up to approximately
6 months
Category 0+: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 36 00
up to 13 kg plus II 970 57 00
up to approximately
15 months
Category I: Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301133 970 37 00
9 kg to 18 kg 970 58 00
between approx-
imately 9 months and
4 years
4 Colour code 9H95.
Z
Weight categories Manufac- Type Approval number Order number

turer (E1 ...) (A 000 ...)4
Category II/III: Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 38 00
15 kg to 36 kg 970 59 00
between approx-
Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00
imately 4 years and
12 years
Safety
Recommended "Universal" and "Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint

systems
Weight cate- Size cat- Manufac- Type Approval Order number4
gories egory turer number
(E1 ...)
Category 0+: E Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224
up to 13 kg plus
Category I: B1 Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301133 A 000 970 37 00
9 kg to 18 kg A 000 970 58 00
Child-proof locks Observe the important safety notes on the dou-

ble-lock function (Y page 85).
G WARNING
G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
could: motion if, for example, they:
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people Rrelease the parking brake
or road users Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming position P
traffic Rstart the engine
Roperate vehicle equipment and become In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
trapped, for example ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
There is a risk of an accident and injury. an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
override feature if children are travelling in the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take children unattended in the vehicle.
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are exposed
Override feature for: to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is
Rthe rear doors (Y page 71) a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 71) leave persons (particularly children) unatten-
ded in the vehicle.
4 Colour code 9H95.

Pets in the vehicle 71
G WARNING Override feature for the rear side win-

If the child restraint system is placed in direct dows
sunlight, the parts could become very hot.
Children could be suffer burns by touching
these parts, in particular on the metallic parts
of the child restraint system. There is a risk of
injury.
If you and your child leave the vehicle, always
Safety
make sure that the child restraint system is
not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,
for example. If the child restraint system has
been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to
cool down before securing the child in it.
Never leave children unattended in the vehi- X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
cle. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is possi-
ble only using the switches on the driver's
Child-proof locks for the rear doors door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-
cured in the vehicle, they may push a button
or a switch, for example.
They could:
You can secure each door individually with the Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be trapped, for example
opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehi- Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus
cle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the endangering other road users
outside.
In the event of an accident, sudden braking or
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
abrupt changes of direction, unsecured ani-
up in the direction of arrow :.
mals could be flung around the vehicle, injur-
X Make sure that the child-proof lock is working
ing the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an
properly.
accident and injury.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals correctly during a
journey, e.g. in an animal transport box.
Z
72 Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Driving safety systems overview General information
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the following driving safety systems: the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
(Y page 72) braking.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 73) The ! ABS warning lamp on the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Safety
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 73)

on. It goes out when the engine is running.
RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 75)
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h,
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS
(Y page 76) works on slippery surfaces, even when you
REBD (electronic brake force distribution) brake only gently.
(Y page 79)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 79) Important safety notes
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
(Y page 80) tion (Y page 72).
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 82)
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
Important safety notes braking. The steerability and braking charac-
The driving safety systems can neither reduce teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
driving style or are not paying attention nor tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
override the laws of physics. Driving safety sys- ding and accidents.
tems are merely aids designed to assist driving. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
You are responsible for maintaining the distance
to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
braking in good time and for staying in lane.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the pre- If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, includ-
vailing road and weather conditions and main- ing driving safety systems, will also become
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS
Drive carefully. warning lamp (Y page 301) and display mes-
sages which may be shown on the instrument
The driving safety systems described work as cluster (Y page 267).
effectively as possible only when there is ade-
quate contact between the tyres and the road
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- Brakes
tion regarding tyres, recommended minimum X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres"
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
section (Y page 376).
uation is over.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter X To make a full brake application: depress
tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety the brake pedal with full force.
systems described in this section work as effec- If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tively as possible. pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
Driving safety systems 73
Off-road ABS Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the
danger of collision with the vehicle in front or
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road reduce the effects of such a collision.
terrain is activated automatically once the off- If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
road program is activated (Y page 202). of collision, you will be warned visually and audi-
At speeds below 30 km/h, the front wheels lock bly. If you do not react to the visual and audible
cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect collision warning, autonomous braking can be
achieved in the process reduces the stopping initiated in critical situations. If you apply the
distance during off-road driving. This limits brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive
steering capability.
Safety
Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist system
supports you.
BAS (Brake Assist System) Important safety notes

General notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired in the following situations:
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
automatically boosts the braking force, thus Rsnow or heavy rain
shortening the stopping distance. Rinterference by other radar sources
Rstrong radar reflections for example, in multi-
Important safety notes storey car parks
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- motorcycle
tion (Y page 72).
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line
G WARNING Rnew vehicles or after servicing is carried out
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance on the Active Brake Assist system
in an emergency braking situation is Observe the important safety notes in the
increased. There is a risk of accident. "Running-in notes" section (Y page 152).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
In an emergency braking situation, depress
have the configuration and operation of the
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
the wheels from locking. workshop. This also applies to collisions at low
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
Braking front of the vehicle.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until Switching on/off

the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Active Brake Assist is automatically active after
switching on the ignition.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 258) on the on-board computer.
When the system is deactivated, the distance
warning function and the autonomous braking
Active Brake Assist function are also deactivated.
General information If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears on the assistance graphic dis-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- play.
tion (Y page 72). Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn- package: If DSR (Y page 201) is activated,
ing function with an autonomous braking func- Active Brake Assist is deactivated.
tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Z
Distance warning function The · distance warning lamp will then

light up on the instrument cluster.
General information ROf approximately 7 km/h or more if you are
The distance warning function can help you to rapidly approaching a vehicle in front. An
minimise the danger of collision with the vehicle intermittent warning tone will then sound and
in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. the · distance warning lamp will light up
If the distance warning function detects a risk of on the instrument cluster.
collision with the vehicle in front, you will be X Brake immediately to increase the distance
warned visually and audibly. from the vehicle in front.
Safety
or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- so.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 72).
Due to the nature of the system, certain com-
G WARNING plex but non-critical driving conditions may also
The distance warning function does not react: cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
Rto people or animals distance warning function can detect obstacles
Rto oncoming vehicles that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
Rto crossing traffic
ded period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the
Rwhen cornering
distance warning function can also react to sta-
The distance warning function may not give tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parked
warnings in all critical situations. There is a vehicles.
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Autonomous braking function
uation and be ready to brake. If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
road and traffic conditions. Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
braking function.
G WARNING Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
the autonomous braking function is available in
The distance warning function cannot always the following speed ranges:
clearly identify objects and complex traffic R7–105 km/h for moving objects
situations. R7–50 km/h for stationary objects
In such cases, the distance warning function Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
may: autonomous braking function is available in the
Rgive an unnecessary warning following speed ranges:
Rnot give a warning R7–200 km/h for moving objects
R7–50 km/h for stationary objects
There is a risk of an accident.
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- non-critical driving conditions may also cause
uation; do not rely on the distance warning the autonomous braking function to engage.
function alone. If the autonomous braking function demands
particularly high braking force, preventative
Function passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)
The distance warning function issues a warning are activated simultaneously (Y page 59).
at speeds:
ROf approximately 30 km/h or more if, over
several seconds, the distance maintained to
the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient.
Adaptive Brake Assist In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:

General information Rintervene unnecessarily
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Rnot intervene
tion (Y page 72). There is a risk of an accident.
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adap- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
the path of your vehicle for an extended period intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
of time.
Safety
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- G WARNING
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
you apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive Brake Rto people or animals
Assist will automatically increase the braking
force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Rto oncoming vehicles
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- Rto crossing traffic
tance in hazardous situations at speeds above Rwhen cornering
7 km/h. It uses the radar sensor system to
assess the traffic situation. As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h, intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to risk of an accident.
moving objects that have already been detected Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
as such at least once over the period of obser- uation and be ready to brake.
vation.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Adap-
tive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. road and traffic conditions.
If Adaptive Brake Assist demands a particularly Due to the nature of the system, complex but
high braking force, preventative passenger pro- non-critical driving conditions may also cause
tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated Brake Assist to engage.
simultaneously (Y page 59).
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the malfunctioning radar sensor system, the brake
emergency braking situation is over. system remains available with full brake boost-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. ing effect and BAS.
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal
Ra danger of collision with the vehicle in front
Adaptive brake lights
no longer exists The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle in an emergency braking situation by:
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Rflashing brake lamps
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
If you brake sharply from a speed of more than
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 72). Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
G WARNING the brake lights flash rapidly. In this way, traffic
travelling behind you is warned in an even more
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly noticeable manner.
identify objects and complex traffic situa- If you brake sharply from a speed of more than
tions. 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning
lamps are switched on automatically. If the
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light
up continuously. The hazard warning lamps
Z
switch off automatically if you travel at speeds G WARNING

greater than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
warning button (Y page 123). stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving
safety systems are switched off. This increa-
ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
General notes
Safety
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
tion (Y page 72). continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-
power transmission between the tyres and the uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-
road surface. tion.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from Read the information on warning lamps
the direction desired by the driver, one or more (Y page 301) and display messages that may be
wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 267).
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- Only use wheels with the recommended tyre
cle on the desired course within physical limits. sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise Characteristics of ESP®
the vehicle during braking.
General notes
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
tion (Y page 72). active.
If ESP® engages, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles flashes in the instrument cluster.
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
If ESP® engages:
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, e.g. if stances.
the road surface is slippery on one side. In addi- X When pulling away, only depress the acceler-
tion, more drive torque is transferred to the ator pedal as far as is necessary.
wheel or wheels with traction. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
Traction control remains active if you deactivate road and weather conditions.
ESP®.
ECO start/stop function
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- The ECO start/stop function switches the
tem) engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
moving. When the vehicle pulls away again, the
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its
terrain is activated automatically once the off- previously selected status, e.g. if ESP® was
road program is activated (Y page 202). deactivated before the engine was automati-
cally switched off.
i Read the "Important safety notes" section
(Y page 72).
Activating/deactivating ESP® (except X To activate: press button :.

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 72). If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp on
You can select between the following ESP® sta- the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tuses:
tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.
Safety
RESP® is activated If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® is deactivated RESP® no longer improves driving stability
G WARNING Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- drive wheels may start to spin
Rtraction control is still activated
bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk
RActive Brake Assist is not available; it is not
of skidding and an accident.
activated even if you brake firmly with assis-
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- tance from ESP®
bed in the following. RPRE-SAFE® is not available; it is not activated
even if you brake firmly with assistance from
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- ESP®
ing situations:
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is
Rwhen snow chains are used not activated even if the brakes are firmly
Rin deep snow applied with assistance from ESP®
Ron sand or gravel RESP® still provides support when you brake
Rduring off-road driving (vehicles without off- firmly
road program)
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, Deactivating/activating ESP®
which enhances traction. (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will Important safety notes
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to tion (Y page 72).
spin.
You can select between the following ESP® sta-
Activating/deactivating ESP® tuses:
RESP® is activated
RSPORT handling mode is activated
RESP® is deactivated
ESP® is activated every time the engine is star-
ted, regardless of whether ESP® was deactiva-
ted before the engine was switched off.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
X To deactivate: press button :. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the uations described in the following.
instrument cluster lights up.
Z
G WARNING X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until

the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up on
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- the instrument cluster.
bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk The ÷ OFF message appears on the mul-
of skidding and an accident. tifunction display.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
bed in the following. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON
In the following situations, it may be better to message appears on the multifunction dis-
Safety
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate play.

ESP®:
Rwhen snow chains are used Characteristics when SPORT handling
Rin deep snow mode is activated
Ron sand or gravel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
Ron specially designated roads when the vehi- more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-
cle's own oversteering and understeering ing lamp on the instrument cluster flashes. In
characteristics are desired such situations, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, only to a limited degree.
which enhances traction. When SPORT handling mode is activated:
Driving in SPORT handling mode or with ESP® RESP® improves driving stability only to a limi-
deactivated requires a highly qualified and expe- ted degree
rienced driver. Rtraction control is still activated
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
described above no longer apply. ESP® will drive wheels may start to spin
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle RESP® still provides support when you brake
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to firmly
spin.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
Activating/deactivating ESP® If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp on
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels may start to spin
Rtraction control is still activated
RActive Brake Assist is not available; it is not
activated even if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP®
X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly RPRE-SAFE® is not available; it is not activated
press button :. even if you brake firmly with assistance from
The M SPORT handling mode warning ESP®
lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. The
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is
message SPORT handling mode appears on
the multifunction display. not activated even if the brakes are firmly
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
applied with assistance from ESP®
briefly press button :. RESP® still provides support when you brake
The M SPORT handling mode warning firmly
lamp on the instrument cluster goes out.
Off-road ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds

above 80 km/h when driving straight ahead or
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road cornering slightly.
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 202). Important safety notes
Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac-
oversteering or understeering, thus improving tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
traction.
Safety
ESP® trailer stabilisation EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
General notes
lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com- while braking.
bination has stabilised.
Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 72).
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent G WARNING
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is risk of skidding and an accident.
a risk of an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- to the different handling characteristics. Have
ing road and weather conditions. the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
lurch, you can stabilise the vehicle/trailer com- Observe information regarding indicator and
bination only by depressing the brake firmly. warning lamps (Y page 301) as well as display
ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds messages (Y page 269).
of approximately 65 km/h.
ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP®
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc- ADAPTIVE BRAKE
tion.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
Crosswind Assist the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 200) and hill start
General information assist (Y page 156).
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-
wind driving assistance function integrated in
ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.
Depending on the direction and intensity of the
crosswind affecting your vehicle, ESP® auto-
matically intervenes.
ESP® intervenes with stabilising braking to
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Z
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic application of the brakes if a danger of colli-
function sion is detected. There may be a collision
unless you brake yourself. Even after subse-
General information quent full application of the brakes a collision
i Observe the important safety notes in the cannot always be avoided, particularly when
"Driving safety systems" section (Y page 72). approaching at too high a speed. There is a
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function risk of an accident.
can help you to minimise the risk of a collision Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
Safety
with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake so.
Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and audi- If you partially apply the brakes, the vehicle is
bly and, if necessary, your brake application will braked with up to 50% of the full braking force.
be assisted according to the situation. If you do
not react, the system can also react by braking G WARNING
automatically. If a risk of collision due to cross-
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
ing traffic is detected, you will also be warned
visually and audibly as well as assisted by the cannot always clearly identify objects and
brake boosting effect, according to the situa- complex traffic situations.
tion. In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is traffic function might:
only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
tance Plus package. Rissue an unnecessary warning or engage
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func- Rneither issue a warning nor intervene
tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensor There is a risk of an accident.
system and the camera system must be opera-
tional. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
If the radar sensor system or the camera system situation and be prepared to brake, especially
is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a
available. The brake system is still available with non-critical driving situation.
complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
The radar sensor system and camera system G WARNING
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to detect obstacles that are in the path of
your vehicle for an extended period of time. cannot always clearly identify people, partic-
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist
cle can be detected. with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
detects pedestrians using typical characteris- Always pay particular attention to the traffic
tics such as body contours and the posture of a situation and be prepared to brake, especially
person standing upright. if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
i Observe the restrictions described in the tion alerts you.
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 80). To maintain the appropriate distance to the
vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you
Important safety notes must apply the brakes yourself.
G WARNING
will initially brake your vehicle by a partial
G WARNING there is no visible damage to the front of the

vehicle.
Following damage to the windscreen, have the
does not react: configuration and operation of the camera sys-
Rto small people, e.g. children tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rto animals
Function
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rwhen cornering X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-
Safety
tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross- function using the on-board computer
traffic function may not warn you or engage in (Y page 258).
all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- If Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
dent. tion is deactivated, the æ symbol appears
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- on the multifunction display.
uation and be ready to brake. Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
package: If DSR (Y page 201) is activated,
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
can be impaired. deactivated.
Detection by the radar sensor system is also This function will issue a warning if:
impaired in the following situations: Rabove a speed of around 30 km/h or more,
Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors the distance maintained to the vehicle travel-
Rinterference by other radar sources ling in front is insufficient for several seconds
Rstrong radar reflections for example, in multi- The · distance warning lamp will then
storey car parks light up on the instrument cluster.
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or more,
motorcycle you rapidly approach a vehicle in front or a
pedestrian
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
Rvehicles moving quickly into the radar sensor
and the · distance warning lamp will light
system detection range up on the instrument cluster.
Detection by the camera system is also impaired
X Brake immediately to rectify the situation.
in the following situations:
or
Rdirt on the camera or obscured camera
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
so.
being low in the sky
Rdarkness
can also brake the vehicle automatically under
Rif:
the following conditions:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat
of the vehicle
belts fastened
- the camera system no longer detects a
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
ing or other objects 7 km/h and 200 km/h
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Active
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may
- the typical outline of a pedestrian is not
react to:
distinguishable from the background
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the radar sensor settings and operation e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
also applies to collisions at low speeds where
Z
82 Protection against theft
i If an increased danger of collision exists, You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake
preventative passenger protection measures Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:
(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 59). Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further
If the danger of collision with the vehicle in front Ractivating kickdown
remains and you do not brake, take evasive Rreleasing the brake pedal
action or accelerate quickly, the vehicle may The braking application of Active Brake Assist
perform automatic emergency braking up to the with cross-traffic function is ended automati-
point of full brake application. Automatic full cally if:
brake application is not performed until imme-
Safety
diately prior to an imminent accident. Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit- Rthe danger of collision has passed
uation or during autonomous braking, situation- Ran obstacle is no longer detected in front of
dependent braking assistance is provided. If your vehicle
necessary, this increases the brake pressure up
to full brake application.
To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with STEER CONTROL
cross-traffic function calculates the brake force
necessary if: General information
Ryou approach an obstacle and
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
has detected a risk of a collision in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.
When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if This steering support is provided in particular if:
you depress the brake pedal, Active Brake
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
Assist with cross-traffic function is activated.
Braking assistance from Active Brake Assist wet or slippery road surface when you brake
with cross-traffic function is carried out at the Rthe vehicle begins to skid
last possible moment.
When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: if Important safety notes
you depress the brake pedal sharply, Active
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function auto- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
matically increases the brake pressure to a tion (Y page 72).
degree suited to the traffic situation. No steering support is provided from STEER
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function CONTROL, if:
provides braking assistance in hazardous situa- RESP® is deactivated
tions with vehicles in front within a speed range
RESP® is malfunctioning
between 7 km/h and 250 km/h.
Rthe steering is faulty
Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Active
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function assists If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
you with braking in hazardous situations with: further by the electrical power steering.
Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi- Protection against theft
cle
Immobiliser
Robstacles crossing your path that move in the
detection range of the sensors and are detec- The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
ted being started without the correct key.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Protection against theft 83
X To activate with the key: remove the key X To stop the alarm with the key: press the
from the ignition lock. % or & button on the key.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start func- The alarm stops.
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off or
and open the driver's door. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key ton from the ignition lock (Y page 154).
with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
the engine if a valid key has been left inside the The alarm stops.
Safety
vehicle. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
i The immobiliser is always deactivated when grasp the outside door handle. The key must
you start the engine. be outside the vehicle.
The alarm stops.
or
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The key must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm stops.
The alarm does not stop, even if you close the
open door that has triggered it, for example.
Tow-away protection
Function
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while
tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if
X To activate: lock the vehicle with the key or the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for exam-
KEYLESS-GO. ple.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is activated after approximately ten seconds. Switching on/off
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is automatically activated
or deactivated with the ATA (anti-theft alarm
or system) when:
Rthe doors are closed
or
Rthe tailgate is closed
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop but- Tow-away protection is active around
60 seconds after the ATA has been switched on
ton.
(Y page 83).
The key must be in the vehicle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the Deactivating
alarm system is primed and you open:
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away
Ra door
protection if you lock your vehicle and it:
Rthe vehicle with the emergency key element
Ris being transported
Rthe tailgate
Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car trans-
Rthe bonnet
porter
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-
level garage
Z
84 Protection against theft
The tow-away alarm remains deactivated until

you switch the ATA on again after opening a
door.
You can deactivate tow-away protection via the
multimedia system (see the Digital Owner's
Manual).
Interior motion sensor

Safety
Function
When the interior motion sensor is primed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This can
occur if someone reaches into the vehicle inte-
rior, for example.
Switching on/off
The interior motion sensor is automatically
switched on or off via the ATA (anti-theft alarm
system) when:
Rthe doors are closed
Rthe tailgate is closed
The interior motion sensor is active around ten
seconds after the ATA has been switched on
(Y page 83).
You can prevent false alarms by doing the fol-
lowing before priming the ATA:
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof
Rmake sure that no objects, such as mascots,
are attached to the rear-view mirror or the
grab handles on the roof trim
Deactivating
If you want to lock your vehicle and people or
animals are inside it, you can deactivate the
interior motion sensor.
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated
until you switch the ATA on again after opening
a door.
You can deactivate the interior motion sensor
via the multimedia system (see the Digital Own-
er's Manual).
Key 85
Key children unattended in the vehicle. Always

keep the key out of reach of children.
United Kingdom only: G WARNING
G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key,
the key could be unintentionally turned in the
When the double locks are activated, the
ignition lock. This could cause the engine to
doors can no longer be opened from the
be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
risk of injury. key. Remove any bulky keyrings before insert-
Opening and closing

ing the key into the ignition lock.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic
erly people or people in need of special assis- fields. Otherwise, the remote control function
tance. Do not activate the double lock when could be affected.
people are in the vehicle. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,
Do not store the key:
the double lock function is activated as stand-
ard. It is then not possible to open the doors Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the or another key
double lock function by deactivating the interior Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
motion sensor (see Digital Owner's Manual). Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
The doors can then be opened from the inside
after the vehicle has been locked from the out- This can impair the key's function.
side. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
the door is opened from the inside. Switch off not keep the key in the luggage compartment.
the alarm (Y page 83). Otherwise, the key may not be detected, e.g.
All countries: when starting the engine using the Start/Stop
button.
G WARNING A check that periodically establishes a radio
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, connection between the vehicle and the key
they can: determines whether a valid key is in or in the
direct vicinity of the vehicle. This occurs, for
Ropen doors and endanger other persons or example:
road users Rwhile starting the engine
Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Rduring driving
Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ple, trap themselves. Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, Rduring convenience closing
for example by:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
Z
86 Key
Key functions the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press

the F button on the key.
When the tailgate closes, you can then
release the button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in
Opening and closing
the vehicle (Y page 155).
: & Locks the vehicle Locking and unlocking centrally

; F Opens/closes the tailgate
= % Unlocks the vehicle You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you need to carry the
X To unlock centrally: press the % button. key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO
If you do not open the vehicle within approx- functions with the functions of a conventional
imately 40 seconds of unlocking: key. Unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO, for
Rthe vehicle locks again
instance, and lock it using the & button on
the key.
Rprotection against theft is reactivated
The driver's door and the door on which the
X To lock centrally: press the & button. handle is used must both be closed. The key
The key centrally locks and unlocks the follow- must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
ing components: unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the key and the corresponding door
Rthe doors handle must not be greater than 1 m.
Rthe tailgate A check that periodically establishes a radio
Rthe fuel filler flap connection between the vehicle and the key
During unlocking, the turn signals flash once. determines whether a valid key is in or in the
During locking, they flash three times. direct vicinity of the vehicle. This occurs, for
You can also set an audible signal to confirm example:
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible Rwhile starting the engine
signal can be activated and deactivated via the Rwhile driving
multimedia system (see Digital Owner's Man- Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ual).
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Only when all the components have been locked
Rduring convenience closing
is the visual or audible locking confirmation
issued.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the key (see
Digital Owner's Manual).
X To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens.
X To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the key is located in
Key 87
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- X To change the setting: press and hold down
face of the door handle. the % and & buttons simultaneously
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : for about six seconds until the battery indica-
or ;. tor lamp flashes twice (Y page 88).
Make sure that you do not touch the inner If the setting of the locking system is changed
surface of the door handle. within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
X Convenience closing feature: touch
the & or % button:
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended Rlocks or
period. Runlocks the vehicle
Further information on the convenience clos- The key now functions as follows:
ing feature (Y page 100).
X To unlock: press the % button once.
Opening and closing

X To unlock the tailgate: pull the tailgate han-
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
dle.
twice.
X To lock: press the & button.
Activating and deactivating
X To restore the factory settings: press and
If you do not intend to use a key for an extended hold down the % and & buttons simul-
period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS- taneously for approximately six seconds until
GO function of the key. The key will then use very the battery check lamp flashes twice
little power, thereby conserving battery power. (Y page 88).
For the purposes of activation or deactivation,
The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as
the vehicle does not have to be nearby.
follows:
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
key twice in rapid succession.
The battery indicator light (Y page 88) of the surface of the door handle on the driver's
key flashes twice briefly and lights up once; door.
KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
X To activate: press any button on the key. of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
or
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
KEYLESS-GO and all its associated features
are available again.
Emergency key element

KEYLESS-GO start function General notes
General notes If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the
key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key ele-
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by ment.
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in
the vehicle (Y page 155). If you use the emergency key element to unlock
and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 83).
Changing the settings of the locking If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency
system key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
You can change the settings of the locking sys- unlocked automatically.
tem. This means that only the driver's door and X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle into the ignition lock.
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone.
Z
88 Key
Removing the emergency key element environmentally responsible

recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used batter-
ies.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

Opening and closing
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-

X Push release catch : in the direction of the shop.
arrow and, at the same time, remove emer-
gency key element ; from the key. Checking the battery
For further information about:
RLocking/unlocking the driver's door
(Y page 93)
RUnlocking the tailgate (Y page 98)
Inserting the emergency key element

X Push emergency key element ; completely
into the key until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
Key battery X Press the & or % button.

The battery is OK if battery check lamp :
Important safety notes lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
G WARNING lamp : does not light up briefly.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- X Replace the battery (Y page 88).
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in If the key battery is checked within the signal
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the
& or % button:
injury.
Rlocks or
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
Runlocks the vehicle
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately. i You can obtain a battery from any qualified
specialist workshop.
Batteries contain pollutants. Replacing the battery
It is illegal to dispose of them You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
with the household rubbish. X Take the emergency key element out of the
They must be collected sep- key (Y page 88).
arately and disposed of in an
Key 89
X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until

battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing and then press to
close it.
X Insert emergency key element ; into the key
Opening and closing

X Press emergency key element ; into the (Y page 88).
opening in the key in the direction of the arrow X Check the function of all key buttons on the
until battery compartment cover : opens. vehicle.
When doing so, do not hold battery compart-
ment cover : shut.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
Problems with the key

You can no longer lock or The key battery is weak or discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the key battery (Y page 88) and replace if necessary
the key. (Y page 88).
If this does not work:
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 93).
Interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

(Y page 93).
The key is faulty.

(Y page 93).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
90 Key

You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated.
unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 87).
KEYLESS-GO.
The key battery is weak or discharged.
X Check the key battery (Y page 88) and replace if necessary
(Y page 88).
(Y page 93).
Opening and closing

(Y page 93).
Fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
key.
X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked even using the remote
control function:
(Y page 93).
X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 366).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 367).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The key is in
the vehicle. The key battery is weak or discharged.
X Check the key battery (Y page 88) and replace if necessary
(Y page 88).
X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.
Doors 91

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors Children could also set the vehicle in motion,
Opening and closing

for example by:
United Kingdom only:
G WARNING park position P
When the double locks are activated, the Rstarting the engine.
doors can no longer be opened from the There is a risk of an accident and injury.
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a
risk of injury.
children unattended in the vehicle. Always
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- keep the key out of reach of children.
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-
erly people or people in need of special assis-
tance. Do not activate the double lock when
Unlocking and opening the doors
people are in the vehicle.
from the inside
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been
the double lock function is activated as stand- locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the
ard. It is then not possible to open the doors double lock function is activated as standard. It
from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the is then not possible to open the doors from
double lock function by deactivating the interior inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the dou-
motion sensor (see Digital Owner's Manual). ble lock function by deactivating the interior
The doors can then be opened from the inside motion sensor (see Digital Owner's Manual).
after the vehicle has been locked from the out- The doors can then be opened from the inside
side. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if after the vehicle has been locked from the out-
the door is opened from the inside. Switch off side. You can open the rear side doors from
the alarm (Y page 83). inside the vehicle only if they are not secured by
All countries: the child-proof locks (Y page 71). The anti-theft
alarm system is triggered if the door is opened
G WARNING from the inside. Switch off the alarm
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, (Y page 83).
they can: For all countries except the United Kingdom:
Ropen doors and endanger other persons or
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the rear
road users side doors from inside the vehicle only if they are
Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic not secured by the child-proof locks
Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- (Y page 71). If the vehicle has previously been
locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, open-
ple, trap themselves.
ing a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
Z
92 Doors
theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been
(Y page 83). locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the
double lock function is activated as standard. It
is then not possible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the dou-
ble lock function by deactivating the interior
motion sensor (see Digital Owner's Manual).
Opening/closing doors is then possible as fol-
lows: the doors can be opened from inside. You
can open the rear side doors from inside the
vehicle only if they are not secured by the child-
proof locks (Y page 71).
Opening and closing
When a locked door is opened from inside the

vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be
observed if the vehicle has been:
X Pull door handle ;.
Rlocked with the locking button for the central
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens. locking or
Rlocked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. Only the door that has
Centrally locking and unlocking the been opened from the inside is unlocked if only
vehicle from the inside the driver's door had previously been unlocked.
You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The switches are on the driver's
door. Automatic locking feature
X To unlock: press button :. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for

X To lock: press button ;. approximately five seconds until a tone
When the front-passenger door is closed, the sounds.
vehicle is locked. X To activate: press and hold button ; for
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. approximately five seconds until a tone
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the sounds.
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key If you press one of the two buttons and do not
or KEYLESS-GO. hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
For all countries except the United Kingdom: been selected.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with The vehicle is locked automatically when the
the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm ing.
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 83).
Luggage compartment 93
Therefore, you could be locked out if: X To lock: turn the emergency key element
Rthe vehicle is being pushed clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
Rthe vehicle is being towed X To unlock: turn the emergency key element
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer

anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position
1.
You can also switch the automatic locking func-
tion on and off via the multimedia system (see Right-hand-drive vehicle: turn the emergency
the Digital Owner's Manual). key element in the opposite direction in both
cases.
If you use the emergency key element to unlock
Locking/unlocking the driver's door and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
with the emergency key element (Y page 83).
Opening and closing

i In order to lock all of the vehicle's locks,
begin by pressing the button for locking the
vehicle from the inside while the driver's door Luggage compartment
is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's
door using the emergency key element. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
X Insert the emergency key element into open- G WARNING

ing : in the protective cap. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
X Pull and hold the door handle. not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
X Pull the protective cap on the emergency key over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
as straight as possible away from the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially
until it releases. when braking or abruptly changing directions.
X Release the door handle.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
You will find details on the tailgate opening
dimensions in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 400).
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate
(Y page 98).
Z
94 Luggage compartment
Do not leave the key in the luggage compart- Opening and closing manually
ment. If you do so, you could lock yourself out.
Stow luggage or loads preferably in the luggage Opening
compartment. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 323).
Object detection with reversing func-

tion of the tailgate
Vehicles with remote tailgate closing:
The tailgate is equipped with automatic object
Opening and closing
detection with reversing function. If a solid

object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto-
matically opening, this process is stopped. If a
solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when
automatically closing, the tailgate automatically X Press the F button on the key.
opens again slightly. Automatic object detection or
with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a X Pull handle :.
substitute for your attention when opening and The tailgate opens.
closing the tailgate.
G WARNING Closing
The reversing function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one being trapped in these situations in par-
ticular. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped:
Rpress the F button on the key or
Rpull or press the remote operating switch X Pull the tailgate down using recesses : and
push it closed.
on the driver's door or
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
Rpress the closing or locking button on the button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO
tailgate or (Y page 86).
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Opening and closing automatically

It is also possible to stop the closing process by from the outside
making a kicking movement under the rear
bumper. Important safety notes
G WARNING
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment. or

There is a risk of poisoning. X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull the tailgate upwards.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- You can release the tailgate as soon as the
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. tailgate starts to open.
G WARNING Closing automatically

Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
Opening and closing

during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the key
: Closing button
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
; Locking button
on the driver's door
X Press closing button : on the tailgate.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
or
tailgate
X Pull the tailgate downwards slightly.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
It is also possible to stop the closing process by When the driver's door is closed, you can simul-
making a kicking movement under the rear taneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle.
bumper. To do this, the key must be in the KEYLESS-GO
detection range to the rear of the vehicle.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear X Press locking button ; on the tailgate.
when opened. Therefore, make sure that If KEYLESS-GO detects a key outside the vehi-
there is sufficient clearance above and behind cle, the tailgate closes. The vehicle is locked.
the tailgate.
or
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
opening or closing. KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-
You will find details on the tailgate opening tion: if the key is located in the immediate
dimensions in the "Vehicle data" section vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button
(Y page 400). on the key.
You can release the button as soon as the
Opening automatically tailgate starts to close.
You can open the tailgate automatically using If KEYLESS-GO detects a key only in the luggage
the key or the handle on the tailgate. compartment after it is closed, the tailgate is
unlocked again.
X Press and hold the F button on the key
If a second key is detected outside the vehicle,
until the tailgate opens.
the tailgate remains locked.
or
If KEYLESS-GO detects a key only in the luggage
X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate compartment before the closing process starts,
handle and release it again immediately. the tailgate remains open.
Z
96 Luggage compartment
HANDS-FREE ACCESS The tailgate could thus be opened or closed

unintentionally, for example, if you:
General notes - fold the ball coupling in or out
- couple or uncouple a trailer
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the - fit or remove a rear-mounted bicycle rack
process without using your hands. This is useful - load/unload bicycles on/from a rear-
if you have your hands full. To do this, make a mounted bicycle rack
kicking movement under the bumper with your - sit on the edge of the luggage compartment
foot. - set down or lift up an object behind the
Observe the following points: vehicle
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key with you. The key - polish the rear of the vehicle
Opening and closing
must be in the KEYLESS-GO detection range Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key with you in
to the rear of the vehicle. such situations. This will prevent uninten-
RWhen making the kicking movement, make tional opening or closing of the tailgate.
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance Important safety notes
to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
lose your balance, e.g. on ice. G WARNING
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you make the kicking movement
only within the detection range of the sen-
sors .
! If the key is within the rear detection range

of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for
example, could lead to the unintentional
RAlways ensure that you make the kicking opening of the tailgate:
movement only within the detection range of Rwhen using an automatic car wash
sensors :. Rwhen using a high-pressure cleaner
RStand at least 30 cm away from the rear area
Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away
while doing so. from the vehicle.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Other- Operation
wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function dur-
ing engine start.
RDirt caused by road salt and snow build-up
around sensors : may restrict functionality.
Using HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-
thetic leg may restrict functionality.
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is in the KEYLESS-GO
detection range to the rear of the vehicle,
HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered.
X To open or close: kick into sensor detection dren, during the closing procedure. There is a
range : under the bumper with your foot. risk of injury.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
X If the tailgate does not open or close after
several attempts: wait at least ten seconds Release the remote operating switch imme-
then kick under the bumper once again. diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-
open the tailgate pull on the remote operating
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat switch.
the kicking movement more quickly if this
occurs. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
It is also possible to stop the closing process by
Opening and closing

To stop the opening or closing process, you have making a kicking movement under the rear
the following options: bumper.
Rkick with your foot into sensor detection
range : under the bumper ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
Rpress the closing button on the tailgate the tailgate.
Rpress the F button on the key
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
If the tailgate closing process has been stopped: opening or closing.
Rkick your foot under the bumper again and the You will find details on the tailgate opening
tailgate will open dimensions in the "Vehicle data" section
If the tailgate opening process has been stop- (Y page 400).
ped:
Rkick your foot under the bumper again and the Opening and closing
tailgate will close
Opening and closing automatically

from the inside
G WARNING
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes X To open: pull remote operating switch : for
could enter the passenger compartment. tailgate until tailgate opens.
There is a risk of poisoning. X To close: Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press and hold remote operating switch for
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. tailgate : until tailgate is completely closed.
G WARNING When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the
tailgate from the driver's seat. When the vehicle
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- is also unlocked, you can also open the tailgate
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi- from inside.
tion, people may be standing in the closing
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-
Z
98 Side windows
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
gate when opened. Therefore, make sure that
General notes the tailgate.
You will find details on the tailgate opening
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to dimensions in the "Vehicle data" section
open the tailgate fully when setting the open- (Y page 400).
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
side. To unlock
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
This is possible in the top half of its opening
Opening and closing
range, up to approximately 20 cm before the

stop.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically. This does not delete the stored
position.
Switching on
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate. X Remove the luggage compartment cover
X To stop the opening process at the (Y page 329).
desired position: press the closing button on X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside (Y page 326).
of the tailgate again. X Insert emergency key element ; into open-
X To store the position: press and hold the ing : in the trim and push it in.
closing button on the tailgate until you hear a X Open the tailgate.
short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The When you lock the vehicle, the luggage com-
tailgate then stops in the stored position partment is also locked again.
when opened.
Switching off Side windows

X Press and hold the closing button on the tail- Important safety notes
gate until two short tones sound.
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
Unlocking the tailgate using the emer- could become trapped between the side win-
gency key element dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
General notes Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
Use the emergency key element if the tailgate dow during the opening procedure. If some-
can no longer be unlocked: body becomes trapped, release the switch or
Rusing the key pull the switch to close the side window again.
Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Rusing the remote operating switch on the door
control panel
Side windows 99
G WARNING Opening and closing the side win-

While closing the side windows, body parts in dows
the closing area could become trapped. There The switches for all side windows are located on
is a risk of injury. the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
When closing make sure that no parts of the door for the corresponding side window.
body are in the closing area. If somebody The switches on the driver's door take prece-
becomes trapped, release the switch or press dence.
the switch to open the side window again.
G WARNING
Opening and closing

If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle. : Front left
; Front right
= Rear right
Side window reversing feature ? Rear left
The side windows are equipped with an auto- X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks tion lock.
or restricts a side window from travelling X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
upwards during the automatic closing process, responding switch.
the side window opens again automatically. Dur- X To open fully: press the button beyond the
ing the manual closing process, the side window point of resistance and release it.
only opens again automatically after the corre- Automatic operation is started.
sponding switch is released. The automatic
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-
tute for your attention when closing a side win- button and hold it.
dow. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
G WARNING Automatic operation is started.
The reversing function does not react: X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

pull the corresponding switch again.
gers If you push/pull the switch beyond the point of
resistance and release, automatic operation is
Rwhile resetting started in the corresponding direction. You can
This means that the reversing feature cannot stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- again.
uations. There is a risk of injury. You can continue to operate the side windows
When closing, make sure that no parts of the after switching off the engine or removing the
key. This function remains active for five
body are in the closing area. If someone minutes or until you open a front door.
becomes trapped, press the switch to open The side windows cannot be operated from the
the side window again. rear when the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 71).
Z
100 Side windows
Information on opening and closing the roller Observe the complete closing procedure
sunblinds on the rear side windows when the convenience closing feature is oper-
(Y page 336).
ating. When closing make sure that no parts of
the body are in the closing area.
Convenience opening feature Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
General notes start function: if the key is in the immediate
vicinity of the vehicle, the "convenience closing"
If the key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi- feature is available.
cle, the "convenience opening" feature is avail- When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
able. ously:
Opening and closing
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO Rclose the side windows

start function: you can ventilate the vehicle Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof
before you start driving.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,
To do this, the key is used to carry out the fol- you can then close the roller sunblinds.
lowing functions simultaneously:
Notes on the automatic reversing function for:
Runlock the vehicle
Rthe side windows (Y page 99)
Ropen the side windows
Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 102)
Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblind
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's
Using the key
seat X Press and hold the & button until the side
The "Convenience opening" feature is also avail- windows and the panorama sliding sunroof
able when the vehicle is unlocked. are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Convenience opening feature panorama sliding sunroof are closed.
X Press and hold the % button on the key X Press and hold the & button again until the
until the side windows and the panorama slid- roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sun-
ing sunroof are in the desired position. roof are closed.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding X To interrupt convenience closing: release
sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are the & button.
opened first.
X Press and hold the % button again until the
panorama sliding sunroof is in the desired Using KEYLESS-GO
position. The driver's door and the door on which the
X To interrupt convenience opening: release handle is used must both be closed. The key
the % button. must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
the key and the corresponding door handle
should not be greater than 1 m.
Convenience closing feature
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Side windows 101
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all doors.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 99).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Opening and closing

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the If the side window opens again slightly:
door handle until the side windows and the X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. the door control panel until the side window is
Make sure you touch only recessed sensor completely closed (Y page 99).
surface :. X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the X If the corresponding side window remains
panorama sliding sunroof are closed. closed after the button has been released, the
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the side window has been reset correctly. If this is
door handle again until the roller sunblinds of not the case, repeat the steps above.
the panorama sliding sunroof close.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Z
102 Panorama sliding sunroof

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
Opening and closing
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Panorama sliding sunroof G WARNING

At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers trap you or other persons. There is a risk of
to the panorama sliding sunroof. injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
G WARNING the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, vehicle is in motion.
body parts in close proximity could become If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
trapped. There is a risk of injury. pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
Make sure that no body parts are in close ing sunroof lifts during opening.
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it
cedures. is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunc-
If somebody becomes trapped: tions may occur.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
Rduring automatic operation, press the damaged.
switch briefly in any direction
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
ped. open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
G WARNING tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Sliding sunroof reversing feature
In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers
to the panorama sliding sunroof.
children unattended in the vehicle.
Panorama sliding sunroof 103
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated
matic reversing function. If a solid object blocks only when the roller sunblinds are open.
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto- tion lock.
matically. The automatic reversing function is
X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-
tion when closing the sliding roof. sponding direction.
If you push or pull the 3 switch beyond the
G WARNING point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
The reversing feature does not react: ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pushing or pulling again.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
If the panorama sliding sunroof is raised at the
gers
Opening and closing

rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is
Rduring resetting reduced as a result. At low speeds, it rises again
automatically.
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
ually immediately after automatic reversing lowering. To do so, press the 3 button. The
This means that the reversing feature cannot panorama sliding sunroof rises again automati-
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- cally.
uations. There is a risk of injury. You can continue to operate the panorama slid-
ing sunroof after switching off the engine or
When closing make sure that no body parts removing the key. This function remains active
are in the closing area. for five minutes or until you open a front door.
If someone is trapped: If a roof carrier is fitted, the panorama sliding
Rrelease the switch immediately or sunroof cannot be opened. In order to allow
ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can still
Rpress the switch in any direction during the raise the panorama sliding sunroof. If a roof car-
automatic closing process rier approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact
The closing process is stopped. with the panorama sliding sunroof, the sunroof
will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.
Rain-closing feature when the engine is

Operating the panorama sliding sun- switched off
roof
When the key is in position u in the ignition
Opening and closing lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sun-
roof closes automatically
Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at
the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehi-
cle interior.
If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed
when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it
opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is
: To raise then deactivated.
; To open
= To close/lower
Z
The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
Rit is raised at the rear from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can be
opened and closed only when the panorama
Rit is blocked
sliding sunroof is closed.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen
being monitored by the rain sensor, e.g. Roller sunblind reversing function
because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a
carport The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing function. If a solid object blocks
Rain-closing feature when driving or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing
process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
The raised panorama sliding sunroof automati- matically. However, the automatic reversing
cally lowers when you are driving if it starts to function is only an aid, not a substitute for your
Opening and closing
rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending attention when closing the roller sunblind.
on:
Rthe road speed
G WARNING
Rthe intensity of the rain The reversing function does not react in par-
You can manually cancel the automatic closing ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
procedure. Push or pull the 3 switch in any fingers. This means that the reversing feature
direction. cannot prevent someone being trapped in
To raise the panorama sliding sunroof again, these situations. There is a risk of injury.
push the 3 switch in direction :. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
The "Rain-closing feature when driving" function that no body parts are in the sweep.
is deactivated until you: If someone is trapped:
Rpush or pull the 3 switch in any direction
Rrelease the switch immediately or
or
Rturn the key to another position in the ignition Rpress the switch in any direction during the
lock (Y page 153) automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the panorama sliding sun- Opening and closing roller sunblinds
roof roller sunblinds
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
If someone is trapped: : To open
; To open
Rrelease the switch immediately or = To close
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
You can close the roller sunblinds only when the
automatic opening/closing process panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
The opening/closing process is stopped.
Panorama sliding sunroof 105
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- If the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sun-
tion lock. blinds do not move smoothly, reset the pano-
X Push the 3 switch in direction :. rama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds.
Both roller sunblinds open, then the sliding X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
roof is raised. tion lock.
X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
The sunblinds open. resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed.
X Pull the 3 switch in direction =.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
The roller sunblinds close when the panorama second.
sliding roof is closed.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly in the direc-
If you push or pull the 3 switch beyond the tion of arrow : until the roller sunblinds are
Opening and closing

point of resistance, automatic operation is star- closed.
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
automatic operation by pushing or pulling again.
second.
X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof
and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened
Resetting the panorama sliding sun- and closed again.
roof or the front roller sunblind X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or
closed after resetting, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Problems with the panorama sliding sunroof

In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
Z
The closing process is stopped.

The panorama sliding If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and
sunroof cannot be reopens again slightly:
closed and you cannot X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
see the cause. point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
The panorama sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and
reopens again slightly:
Opening and closing
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the

point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
The panorama sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic
reversing function.
Seats 107
Correct driver's seat position Ryou have a good overview of traffic conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
and must be routed across the centre of your
G WARNING shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic
You could lose control of the vehicle while area
driving if you: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or RAdjusting the seats mechanically and electri-
mirrors cally (Y page 109).
RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 109).
Rfasten the seat belt
RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 114).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat (Y page 114).
belt before starting the engine. RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 49).
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (Y page 117).
RYou can store the seat, steering wheel, exte-
rior mirror and head-up display settings with
the memory function (Y page 119).
Seats
G WARNING
If children adjust the seats, they could
become trapped, especially if they are unat-
tended. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the following when adjusting steering children unattended in the vehicle.
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
The seats can be adjusted when there is no key
Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as in the ignition lock.
possible
Ryou are sitting in an upright position G WARNING
Ryour thighs are gently supported by the seat When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle
cushion occupant could become trapped by the guide
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of
can depress the pedals properly injury.
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level Make sure that no one has any part of their
by the centre of the head restraint body within the sweep of the seat when
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
adjusting it.
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"
Ryou can see all the displays on the instrument (Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle"
cluster clearly (Y page 60).
Z
108 Seats
G WARNING lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-

The head restraints cannot provide the inten- tem.
ded protection unless they are fitted and
adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk G WARNING
of injury to the head and neck in the event of The seat belt does not offer the intended level
an accident or sudden braking, for example. of protection if you have not moved the back-
Always drive with the head restraints fitted. rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
Ensure that the centre of the head restraints ing or in the event of an accident, you could
support the back of each vehicle occupant's slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
head at eye level before driving off. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
Do not interchange the head restraints of the injury.
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be Adjust the seat properly before beginning
able to adjust the height and angle of the head

restraints correctly. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position is in an almost vertical position and that the
so that it is as close as possible to the back of shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed
your head. across the centre of your shoulder.
G WARNING ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it heating, observe the following information:
could unexpectedly move while driving. This Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid
could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as
There is a risk of an accident. possible.
Always ensure that the driver's seat is Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
engaged before starting the vehicle. switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
G WARNING see "Interior care".
You could lose control of the vehicle while Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
driving if you: Do not place sharp objects on the seat
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passen-
mirrors gers, if possible.
Rfasten the seat belt Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
There is a risk of an accident. not cover the seats with insulating materi-
als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
child seats or booster seats.
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
belt before starting the engine. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
G WARNING seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and i The rear seat head restraints can be
removed (Y page 111).
thereby injured. Children in particular could
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
cialist workshop.
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury. i Related topic:
While moving the seats, make sure that your REASY-PACK quickfold rear bench seat
hands or other body parts do not get under the (Y page 326)
Seats 109
Adjusting the seats mechanically and Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
electrically
Vehicles without the seating comfort
Adjusting the front seat package
X Lift lever = and slide the seat forwards or
Vehicles without the seating comfort backwards.
package X Release lever = again.
Ensure that the seat engages audibly.
Vehicles with the seating comfort pack-

age
X Lift lever ? and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
X Release lever ? again.

Ensure that the seat engages audibly.
Adjusting the seat cushion length

mechanically
: Backrest angle X Lift lever A and slide the seat cushion for-
; Seat height wards or backwards.
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Release lever A again.
Vehicles with the seating comfort pack- The seat cushion engages.
age i Mechanical seat cushion length adjustment
is available in vehicles with the seating com-
fort package.
Adjusting the seats electrically
: Backrest angle
; Seat height
= Seat cushion angle
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Seat cushion length
Electrically adjustable seats with memory
i In vehicles with the seating comfort pack- function
age, the seat cushion length is adjusted : Head restraint height
mechanically. ; Backrest angle
= Seat height
? Seat cushion length
A Seat cushion angle
B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Z
110 Seats
i Further related subjects: Adjusting the head restraints

RYou can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 119). Important safety notes
RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
G WARNING
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavour- You could lose control of the vehicle while
able position (Y page 59). driving if you:
RWhen the seat is moved forwards or back- Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
wards, the head restraint is moved up or mirrors
down automatically.
Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the
height of the head restraint cannot be adjusted. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
The head restraints cannot provide the inten-
ded protection unless they are fitted and
adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or sudden braking, for example.
Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Electrically adjustable seats without mem- Ensure that the centre of the head restraints
ory function
support the back of each vehicle occupant's
: Backrest angle
head at eye level before driving off.
; Seat height
= Seat cushion angle
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment General notes
Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 107).
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints to the correct position.
Electrically adjustable seats without mem-

ory function
: Seat cushion length
X Lift lever : and slide the seat cushion for-
wards or backwards.
X Release lever : again.
The seat cushion engages.
Seats 111
Adjusting the head restraint height Adjusting the head restraints electri-
mechanically cally
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for the head restraint adjustment
(Y page 109) up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Adjusting the rear-seat head restraint

height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-

aft position mechanically X If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is nec-
essary to press release catch : first.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired height.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Fitting and removing rear head

restraints
X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly forwards (Y page 327).
This function allows you to adjust the distance X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
between the head restraint and the back of the stop.
head.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint restraint out of the guides.
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the
engages in the desired position. notches on the bar are on the left when
X To move backwards: press and hold release viewed in the direction of travel.
catch :. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
X Push the head restraint back. engage in position.
X Release the release catch once the head X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
restraint is in the desired position. engages.
X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged
properly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position
so that it is as close as possible to the back of
your head.
Z
112 Seats
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Adjusting the seat cushion length mechani-
cally
X Lift lever A and slide the seat cushion for-
wards or backwards.
X Release lever A again.
The seat cushion engages.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
: To raise the backrest contour If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the
; To soften the backrest contour seat cushion and backrest padding may
= To lower the backrest contour become very hot. The health of vehicle occu-
? To harden the backrest contour pants with limited temperature sensitivity or a
You can adjust the contour of the front seat limited ability to react to high temperatures
backrests individually to provide optimum sup- may be affected or they may even suffer burn-
port for your back. like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating
repeatedly.
Adjusting the AMG performance seat
To adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can adjust the
front seats individually.
Front seats
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-

ion
X To set narrower: press : button.
X To set wider: press ; button.
To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest
X To set narrower: press = button.
X To set wider: press ? button.
Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
Seats 113
The system automatically switches down from The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight the ventilation level you have selected.
minutes. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
The system automatically switches down from tion lock (Y page 153).
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
minutes. until the desired ventilation level is set.
The system automatically switches off approx- X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. until all the indicator lamps go out.
tion lock (Y page 153). i If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, the
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
seat ventilation may switch off.
until the desired heating level is set. i You can open the side windows and the slid-
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
until all the indicator lamps go out. feature (Y page 100). The seat ventilation of

i If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, the the driver's seat automatically switches to the
seat heating may switch off. highest level.
i If drive program E is selected, the power of i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
the seat heating is reduced. speed may be reduced automatically. This
reduces the noise of the seat ventilation.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off
Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation

The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window heating or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Z
114 Steering wheel
Steering wheel X Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.
Important safety notes X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion.
G WARNING X Push release lever : up as far as it will go.
You could lose control of the vehicle while The steering column is locked.
driving if you: X Check that the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering wheel
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
mirrors direction.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat cally
belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped by the steer-
ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of
injury.
children unattended in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can

still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni- : To adjust the steering wheel height
tion lock. ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
Adjusting the steering wheel mechan-
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 115)
ically
RStoring settings (Y page 119)
Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off
: Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
= To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
Steering wheel 115
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel
(Y page 153). heating is deactivated.
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched itself ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window heating or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
G WARNING complete before driving off.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle and out of your vehicle easier.
occupants – particularly children – could You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. ENTRY/EXIT feature via the multimedia system
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- (see the Digital Owner's Manual).
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering Position of the steering wheel when the
wheel. EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering Rremove the key from the ignition lock
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Rwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start
function: open the driver's door; the voltage
You can stop the adjustment process by press-
supply must be switched on
ing one of the memory function's position but-
tons. This function is available only on vehicles Rwith the key: open the driver's door; the key
with the memory function. must be in position g or 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 153)
G WARNING Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- switched off
ture, they can become trapped, particularly i The steering wheel tilts upwards only if the
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. driving position is stored after the seat or
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key steering column has been adjusted
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave (Y page 119).
children unattended in the vehicle. The most recent driving position of the steering
wheel is stored if:
G WARNING Rthe ignition is switched off
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT Rthe setting is stored using the memory func-
feature is making adjustments, you could lose tion (Y page 119)
Z
116 Mirrors
i The steering wheel moves upwards only if it Mirrors

has not already reached the upper steering
limiter. Rear-view mirror
Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing
The steering wheel is moved to the previously
set position if:
Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the
key into the ignition lock
Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO

start function X Anti-dazzle mode: move anti-dazzle lever :
i The steering wheel returns to the last set forwards or backwards.
position only if the driving position is stored
after the seat or steering column has been
adjusted (Y page 119). Exterior mirrors
The most recent driving position of the steering
wheel is stored if: Important safety notes
Rthe ignition is switched off G WARNING
Rthe setting is stored using the memory func-
You could lose control of the vehicle while
tion (Y page 119)
driving if you:
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirrors
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
gered in an accident, the steering column will Rfasten the seat belt
move upwards when the driver's door is opened There is a risk of an accident.
or the key is removed from the ignition lock. This Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants. ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is belt before starting the engine.
operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the multimedia system (see G WARNING
Digital Owner's Manual). The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects visible in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. You could misjudge
the distance from road users driving behind
you when changing lanes, for instance. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always look over your
shoulder to determine the actual distance
from road users driving behind you.
Mirrors 117
Adjusting the exterior mirrors X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 153).
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. Other-
wise, they could vibrate.
i If you are driving at speeds of more than
47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- If the battery has been disconnected or com-

tion lock (Y page 153). pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
press button ;. fold in if you have activated the Automatic
mirror-folding function on the multimedia
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but- system.
ton =.
The indicator lamp lights up in the button that X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
has been pressed. tion lock (Y page 153).
The indicator lamp goes out again after some X Briefly press button :.
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button : as long as the indicator Folding the exterior mirrors in/out
lamp is lit. automatically
X Press button : up, down, left or right until
you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the When the Automatic mirror-folding func‐
correct position. You should have a good tion is activated via the multimedia system (see
overview of traffic conditions. Digital Owner's Manual):
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
of vision. soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside
After the engine has been started, the exterior Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win- cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle
dow heating is switched on and the outside tem- i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
perature is low. manually, they do not fold out.
Folding the exterior mirrors in/out elec- Exterior mirror pushed out of position
trically
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position (forwards or backwards), proceed as
follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: manually move the exterior mir-
rors into the correct position.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold button : until you
hear a click and then the mirror engaging in
position (Y page 117).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 117).
Z
118 Mirrors
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors Storing using reverse gear
G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electro-
lyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must
not come into contact with your skin, eyes,
respiratory organs or clothing or be swal-
lowed. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
: Memory button M
immediately with water.
; Button for the exterior mirror setting

RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
= Button for the exterior mirror on the front-
your eyes thoroughly with clean water. passenger side
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately ? Button for the exterior mirror on the driver's
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not side
induce vomiting. X Start the engine.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your X Press button =.
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical X Engage reverse gear.
attention immediately. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
RImmediately change out of clothing which side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to
has come into contact with electrolyte.
a position that allows you to see the rear
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical wheel and the kerb.
attention immediately. The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the gears to another position, the
The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-daz- returns to the driving position.
zle mode if, at the same time:
Storing using the memory button
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror You can store the parking position of the front-
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if passenger-side exterior mirror using memory
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting button M :. Reverse gear must not be
is switched on. engaged.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 153).
Parking position for the front- X Press button =.
passenger side exterior mirror X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
Storing the parking position wheel and the kerb.
X Press memory button M : and one of the
You can set the front-passenger-side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on arrows on button ; within three seconds.
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. The parking position is stored if the exterior
You can store this position. mirror does not move.
Memory function 119
X If the exterior mirror moves out of position, G WARNING

repeat the steps.
If children activate the memory function, they
X After successfully storing, reset the driving
position of the exterior mirror. could become trapped, especially if they are
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock children unattended in the vehicle.
(Y page 153).
X Select the front-passenger-side exterior mir- The memory function can be used at any time,
ror using button =. e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position. Storing settings

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position: Using the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h people.
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged The following settings are stored as a single
reverse gear memory preset:
Rwhen you press button ? to select the exte-
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
rior mirror on the driver's side restraint
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Memory function Rposition of the head-up display

G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, the adjustments could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side while the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 109).
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 114) and the exterior mirrors
pants – particularly children – could become
(Y page 117).
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Press memory button M and then press one of
While the memory function is making adjust- the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
ments, make sure that no one has any body three seconds.
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering The settings are stored in the selected mem-
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- ory position. A tone sounds when the settings
diately release the memory function position have been completed.
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
Z
120 Memory function
Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the relevant memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo-
nents are in the stored position:
RSeat
RSteering wheel
RExterior mirrors
RHead-up display
i If you release the memory position button,
the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The head-up dis-
play continues to be adjusted.
Exterior lighting 121
Exterior lighting Light switch

General notes Operation
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with lights switched on
even during the daytime. In some countries,
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal
requirements and voluntary recommendations.
Driving abroad
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
It is not necessary to switch your headlamps to
symmetrical dipped beam when driving in coun- 1 W Left-hand parking lamps
tries where vehicles are driven on the opposite 2 X Right-hand parking lamps
side of the road to the country in which the vehi-
Lights and windscreen wipers

3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
cle is registered. Legal requirements are fulfilled
without switching the headlamps to symmetri- ment cluster lighting
cal dipped beam. 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled
by the light sensor
5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System
B R Rear foglamp
It is necessary to switch your headlamps to sym- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
metrical dipped beam before crossing the bor- vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
der into countries where vehicles are driven on
the opposite side of the road. This prevents X Turn the light switch to position Ã.
oncoming traffic from being dazzled. The exterior lighting, except the side/parking
You can switch the headlamps to symmetrical or lamps, switches off automatically if you:
asymmetrical dipped beam using the "dipped- Rremove the key from the ignition lock
beam headlamps for driving on the right/left"
function via the on-board computer Ropen the driver's door with the key in position
(Y page 260). This must be switched back to u in the ignition lock
asymmetrical dipped beam upon your return.
Automatic headlamp mode
Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an
area of the edge of the carriageway. In this case, G WARNING
"highway mode" and "extended-range fog When the light switch is set to Ã, the
lamps" are not available. dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
Setting the exterior lighting
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
Setting options accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
L.
Rlight switch (Y page 121)
Rcombination switch (Y page 123) The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
Rheadlamp range control for vehicles with hal- The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting
ogen headlamps (Y page 123) at all times.
Ron-board computer (Y page 260) Ã is the preferred light switch position.
Z
122 Exterior lighting
The light setting is automatically selected ments for the country in which you are currently
according to the brightness of the ambient light, driving when operating the rear fog lamp.
but not in the event of poor visibility due to X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the key
weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray. in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the
RWith the key in position 1 in the ignition lock, engine.
the side lamps are switched on or off auto- X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
matically depending on the brightness of the position.
ambient light. X Press the R button.
RThe daytime driving lights or the side lamps Yellow indicator lamp R on the instrument
and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on cluster lights up.
or off automatically while the engine is run-
ning depending on the ambient light condi- Side lamps
tions.
! When the battery is discharged heavily, the
X To switch on the automatic headlamps:
side lamps or parking lamps are automatically
turn the light switch to position Ã. switched off to facilitate an engine start.
The daytime driving lights improve the visibility Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
of your vehicle during the day. area, in accordance with the relevant legal
When the side lamps and dipped-beam head- stipulations. Avoid using the T side lamps
lamps are switched on, the green T side for periods lasting several hours. Where pos-
lamps and L dipped-beam headlamps indi- sible, switch on the right X or left W
cator lamps on the instrument cluster light up. parking lamp.
X To switch on the side lamp: turn the light
Dipped-beam headlamps switch to position T.
G WARNING The green T indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched Parking lamps
on automatically if there is fog, snow or other Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the
causes of poor visibility due to the weather corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an X To switch on the parking lamp: turn the key
accident. to position u in the ignition lock or remove
In such situations, turn the light switch to the key.
L. X Turn the light switch to position W (left-
hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand
When the ignition is switched on and the light side of the vehicle).
switch is in the L position, the side lamps
and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on
even if the light sensor does not sense dark
ambient light conditions. This is advantageous
when there is fog or rain.
X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps:
turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to position L.
The green L indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear foglamp
The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
heavy fog. You must observe the legal require-
Adjusting the headlamp range (vehicles X To indicate briefly: push the combination
with halogen headlamps) switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: push the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X To switch on the main-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
X Push the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the Ã position, the main-beam head-
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat lamps are switched on only when it is dark and
occupied the engine is running.
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the main-beam

seats occupied
2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear headlamps are switched on.
seats occupied, luggage compartment X To switch off the main-beam headlamps:
laden move the combination switch back to its nor-
3 Driver's and front-passenger seat occupied mal position.
and maximum permissible rear axle load uti- The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-
lised, e.g. when towing a trailer ment cluster goes out.
The headlamp range control allows you to adjust Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto-
vehicle load. matically controls activation and deactivation of
X Start the engine.
the main-beam headlamps (Y page 125).
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
X Turn the headlamp range controller to the
Plus:
position that corresponds to the load in your
vehicle. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, it
automatically controls activation and deactiva-
tion of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 126).
X Headlamp flasher: pull the combination
Combination switch
switch in the direction of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
: Main-beam headlamps
; Turn signal lamp, right
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal lamp, left
Z
X To switch the hazard warning lamps on or Cornering light function

off: press the : button.
All the indicator lamps will flash when the The cornering light function improves the illu-
hazard warning lamps are switched on. If you mination of the road over a wide angle in the
now switch on an indicator lamp using the direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
combination switch, only the indicator lamp bility in tight bends, for example. It can be acti-
on the corresponding side of the vehicle will vated only when the dipped-beam headlamps
flash. are switched on.
Active:
The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
cally if: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h
Ran airbag has been triggered
and switch on the turn signal or turn the steer-
ing wheel
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h
of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill
and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
The cornering light function may remain lit for a
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
short time, but is automatically switched off
10 km/h again after a full brake application.
after no more than three minutes.
The hazard warning lamps continue to operate Cornering light function with roundabout
even if the ignition is switched off. function:

The cornering light function is activated on both
sides before entering a roundabout through an
Intelligent Light System evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
General notes has left the roundabout. In this way, pedestrians
The Intelligent Light System is a system that crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the by your vehicle in good time.
prevailing driving and weather conditions. It Only vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
offers advanced functions for improved illumi- tem have this function.
nation of the road surface, e.g. depending on the
vehicle speed or weather conditions. The sys- Motorway mode
tem includes the active light function, cornering
light function, motorway mode, extended-range Motorway mode increases the range of the
fog lamps and off-road lights. The system is beam.
active only when it is dark. Active: if you are driving at a speed above
You can activate/deactivate the Intelligent 110 km/h and do not make any large steering
Light System function using the on-board movements for at least 1000 m or if you are
computer (Y page 260). driving at a speed above 130 km/h.
Not active: if you drive at speeds below
Active light function 80 km/h following activation.
The active light function is a system that moves
the headlamps according to the steering move- Extended range fog lamps
ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevant The extended-range fog lamps reduce the glare
areas remain illuminated while you are driving. experienced by the driver and improve the illu-
This allows you to recognise pedestrians, mination of the edge of the carriageway.
cyclists and animals sooner.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
Active: when the lights are switched on. 70 km/h and you switch on the rear fog lamp.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active Not active: if, following activation, you are driv-
light function evaluates the course of the lane in ing at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch
which you are driving and adjusts the light in off the rear fog lamp.
advance.
Off-road lights Important safety notes

The off-road lights facilitate the early recogni- G WARNING
tion of objects/obstacles when driving off-road
thanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter dis- Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise
tribution of light from the dipped-beam head- road users:
lamps. Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Active: at speeds below 50 km/h.
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
The off-road lights are active only with the fol-
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
lowing off-road programs:
RSlippery On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
ROff-road
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
RTravelling uphill
that have lights, or may recognise them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
RRocking free
matic main-beam headlamps will not be deac-
Not active: at speeds above 50 km/h.
tivated or will be activated despite the pres-
If the off-road lights are switched on, ence of other road users. There is a risk of an

Rthe cornering lights are permanently accident.
switched on
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
Rthe active light function is switched off
and switch off the main-beam headlamps in
Rheadlamp range control is set to static mode
good time.
(vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
General notes to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to switch automatically between dipped beam In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
and main beam. The system recognises vehicles impaired in the case of:
with their lights on, either approaching from the Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
opposite direction or travelling in front of your snow
vehicle, and consequently switches the head- Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
lamps from main beam to dipped beam.
The system automatically adapts the dipped- Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system no on/off
longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
the main-beam headlamps again. Ã position.
The system's optical sensor is located behind X Press the combination switch forwards
the windscreen near the overhead control beyond the pressure point (Y page 123).
panel. The indicator lamp _ on the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor switches on the dipped-beam head-
lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 25 km/h:
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users.
Z
If you are driving at speeds above approx- Important safety notes

imately 30 km/h and no other road users are
detected: G WARNING
The main-beam headlamps are switched on Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec-
automatically. The K indicator lamp on the ognise road users:
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h or Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
other road users are detected or the roads are Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
adequately lit: Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
the main-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically The K indicator lamp on the In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi- Plus may not recognise road users who do
cator lamp on the multifunction display have lights, or may recognise them too late. In
remains lit. this, or in similar situations, the automatic
X To switch off: move the combination switch main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
back to its normal position or move the light or will be activated despite the presence of
switch to another position. other road users. There is a risk of an acci-
The K indicator lamp on the instrument
dent.
cluster goes out.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the main-beam headlamps in
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus good time.
General notes Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.
With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.
automatically switch between dipped-beam, You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
partial main-beam and main-beam headlamps. lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf-
Partial main-beam illumination is a form of illu- fic conditions.
mination whereby the main beam is directed In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
past other road users. Other road users are kept impaired in the case of:
out of the main beam. This prevents glare. If Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
there is a vehicle in front, for example, the main- snow
beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right
Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by
the dipped-beam headlamps.
The system automatically adapts the dipped- Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- Plus on/off
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system no
longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
the main-beam headlamps again. Ã position.
X Press the combination switch forwards
If the main-beam or partial main-beam head-
lamps are causing too much reflection from traf- beyond the pressure point (Y page 123).
fic signs, the lights are automatically dimmed The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction
and glare for the driver caused by the reflections display lights up when it is dark and the light
is thus avoided. sensor switches on the dipped-beam head-
lamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control At speeds above approx. 25 km/h: the head-
panel. lamp range is automatically controlled
according to the distance to other road users.
Interior lighting 127
At speeds above approximately 30 km/h: = c Front interior lighting

Rif no other road users are detected, the ? u Rear interior lighting
main-beam headlamps are automatically A p Right-hand front reading lamp
switched on
Rif other road users are detected, the partial Control panel in the grab handle (rear
main-beam headlamps are automatically compartment)
switched on
cluster also lights up.
At speeds below approx. 25 km/h or when
there is sufficient street lighting:
Rthe partial main-beam headlamps are
switched off automatically
Rthe main-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically
cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp on

the multifunction display remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination switch : Reading lamp
back to its normal position or move the light ; p Switches the reading lamp on/off
switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction
display goes out. Interior lighting control
General notes
Headlamps misted up on the inside In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
Certain climatic and physical conditions may discharging, the interior lighting functions are
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This automatically deactivated after some time
moisture does not affect the functionality of the except for when the key is in position 2 in the
headlamp. ignition lock.
The colour and brightness of the ambient light-
ing are set via the multimedia system (see Dig-
Interior lighting ital Owner's Manual).
Overview of interior lighting Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel X To switch on or off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is
switched on, the button is flush with the over-
head control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a certain
length of time when the key is removed from the
ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be
adjusted via the multimedia system (see Digital
: p Left-hand front reading lamp Owner's Manual).
; | Automatic interior lighting control
Z
128 Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs Overview of bulb types

Important safety notes You can replace the following bulbs. The details
for the bulb type can be found in the legend.
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during use. When replacing a
bulb, you could burn yourself on these com-
ponents. There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
replacing the bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its

glass has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Halogen headlamps
: Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Rit is hot
; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Ryou drop it
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Ryou scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Fit only spare bulbs of
the same type and the specified voltage.
Marks on the glass reduce the service life of the
bulbs. Do not touch the glass with your bare
hands. If necessary, clean the glass when cold
with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free
cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 128). Rear lamp cluster
Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
; Reversing lamp: W 16 W
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped
with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your-
self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
with the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools to carry out the work required.
Replacing bulbs 129
Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
halogen headlamps) X Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at
top.
Dipped-beam headlamps X Push bulb holder ; down until it engages
audibly.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise.
Turn signals
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Push bulb holder ; upwards and pull out.
X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Remove the cover in the front wheel arch
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. (Y page 129).
X Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise using grip
top. under headlamp casing and remove it down-
X Push bulb holder ; down until it engages
wards with bulb.
audibly. X Turn defective bulb anti-clockwise and pull it
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
out of bulb holder :.
wise. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder :, turn it clockwise and
lock.
Main-beam headlamps
X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch
(Y page 129).
Fitting/removing the cover on the front

wheel arch
You must remove the cover in the front wheel
arch before you can change the front turn signal
lamp.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Push bulb holder ; upwards and pull out.
X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Z
130 Replacing bulbs
Rear lamp cluster

Replacing the bulbs in the turn signal
lamps
X Open the tailgate.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 130).
X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Use a suitable object to turn rotary knob :
180° outwards until it stops.
Cover ; is released.
X Lift cover ; off.

X To fit: insert cover ; into the left, right and
two lower catches. X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull it
X Use a suitable object to turn rotary knob : out.
180° inwards until it stops. X Gently turn the defective bulb anti-clockwise
Cover ; is locked. and pull it out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and
turn it clockwise.
Replacing rear bulbs (vehicles with X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise.
halogen headlamps) X Close the side trim panel (Y page 130).
Opening and closing the side trim pan- Replacing the bulbs in the reversing lamp
els Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
reversing lamp in the tailgate replaced at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Example: right-hand side trim panel

You must open the side trim panel in the luggage
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
X To open: release right or left side trim Example: right-hand-side handle
panel : at the top and fold it down in the
X In recess ? on the inside of the closing han-
direction of the arrow.
dle, prise out and remove the upper section of
X To close: reinsert side trim panel :.
Windscreen wipers 131
handle = with a flat, smooth object, e.g. a

screwdriver.
X Pull the lower section of handle : with a
strong tug to remove it from the trim and then
place it to one side.
X Pull the defective bulb out of bulb holder E.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E.
X Position trim D and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand.
X Check that all of the metal clips are inserted in

X Reach under the right-hand side of trim B the parts that were placed to one side: 2
and lightly tug along the entire length of the clips ; in the upper part of handle = and 4
trim in order to unclip it. clips A in trim B.
X Pull out plug connector C of the surround X If not, remove the missing metal clips from
lighting by releasing both latches. the panel apertures in the tailgate and insert
X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: pull out the
them in the corresponding positions.
plug connector for the switch at the top right X Grasp trim B and connect plug connector C
of the trim. to the surround lighting.
X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow i The surround lighting only illuminates when
hitch: unlock and pull out the plug connector the tailgate has been closed and reopened.
for the switch at the top left of the trim. X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: insert the
X Place trim B to one side. plug connector for the switch at the top right
of the trim.
X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow
hitch: insert the plug connector for the switch
at the top left of the trim.
X Position trim B and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand, starting from the
outer edge.
X Clip in the lower section of handle : again.
X Insert and engage the upper section of handle
= into lower section :.
X On the appropriate side, unclip the remaining Windscreen wipers

part of trim D with a strong tug until bulb
holder E is accessible. Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when
the windscreen is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windscreen can scratch the
glass if wiping takes place when the wind-
screen is dry.
Z
132 Windscreen wipers
If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen Switching the rear window wiper on/
wipers in dry weather conditions, always off
operate them using washer fluid.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may be
due to wax or other residue. Clean the wind-
screen with washer fluid after an automatic
car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windscreen becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
screen wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could damage the windscreen wiper
blades or scratch the windscreen. : è Switch
For this reason, you should always switch off 2 b Wipes with washer fluid
the windscreen wipers in dry weather. 3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping

5 b Wipes with washer fluid
X Turn switch : on the combination switch to
the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the è symbol appears on the instrument
cluster.
1 $ Windscreen wipers off Replacing the wiper blades

2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent Important safety notes
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
G WARNING
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
î Wipe with washer fluid you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- injury.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre- Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
sponding position. ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Å or
! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper
Ä position, the appropriate wiping frequency arm is folded away from the windscreen/rear
is automatically set according to the intensity of window.
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus- Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a
ing the windscreen wiper to wipe more fre- wiper blade back onto the windscreen/rear
quently. window.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you change the wiper blade. If you release the
you from observing the traffic conditions. wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windscreen/rear window, the wind-
screen/rear window may be damaged by the X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
force of the impact. the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe- as far as it will go.
cialist workshop. X Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the removal position with a
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper noticeable click.
blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

Moving the wiper blades to a vertical posi-
tion
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS‑GO start function:

X Set the windscreen wipers to the ° posi-
tion on the combination switch. X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the bon- arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
net, turn the key to position u in the ignition
lock and remove the key. Fitting the wiper blades
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-

LESS‑GO start function:
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Set the windscreen wipers to the ° posi-
tion on the combination switch.
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windscreen wipers start.
X When the wiper arms are vertical to the bon-
net, press the Start/Stop button.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow :.
Removing the wiper blades
Z
134 Windscreen wipers
X Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow = X Switch off the engine.
until it engages in the locking position with a X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
noticeable click. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
X Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. LESS‑GO start function:
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as the key having been
removed.
X Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear window.
X Press both release clips ;.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Fitting a wiper blade

X Remove the protective film : from the ser-

vice indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
When the colour of the service indicator
changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades
should be replaced.
i The duration of the colour change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade
X Position new wiper blade : with recess B
on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow
= onto the wiper arm until retaining clips ;
engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is sitting cor-
rectly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
dow.
Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windscreen wiper move-
are jammed. ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in setting u. This is the same as
“key removed”.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
centre of the wind-
screen.
Z
136 Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems The integrated filter filters out most particles of
dust and soot and completely filters out pollen.
General notes It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odours. A
clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied
Observe the settings recommended on the fol- to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you
lowing pages. Otherwise, the windows could should always observe the interval for replacing
mist up. the filter, which is specified in the Service Book-
To prevent the windows from misting up: let. As this depends on environmental condi-
tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly

be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
Ractivate air-recirculation mode only briefly
Ractivate the "Cooling with dehumidification" i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
function warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
Ractivate the "Windscreen demisting" function opening feature (Y page 100). This will speed
briefly, if required up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
Climate control regulates the temperature and quickly.
air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior
filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior i It is possible that the blower may be activa-
climate. ted automatically 60 minutes after the key
The "Cooling with dehumidification" function is has been removed depending on various fac-
available only when the engine is running. Opti- tors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehi-
mum climate control is achieved only with the cle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the
side windows and roof closed. automatic climate control.
The "Residual heat" function can only be i Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the
switched on or off if the ignition is switched off information in the supplement. Otherwise,
(Y page 144). you may fail to recognise dangers.
Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control
Vehicles with auxiliary heating (example)

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 140)
; Sets the air distribution (Y page 140)
= Sets the airflow (Y page 141)
Switches climate control off (Y page 138)
Overview of climate control systems 137
? Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)

A Demists the windscreen (Y page 142)
B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 314)
Vehicles with auxiliary heating: to switch ! residual heat on/off (Y page 144)
C Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 142)
D Vehicles with auxiliary heating: to switch the & auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 146)
Vehicles without auxiliary heating: to switch the0 synchronisation on/off (Y page 141)
Climate control
E Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 143)
F Activates/deactivates cooling with dehumidification (Y page 139)
G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 140)
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (three-zone)
Vehicles with auxiliary heating (example)

Front control panel
: Setting the temperature, left (Y page 140)
; Setting the air distribution, left (Y page 140)
= Setting the airflow (Y page 141)
Switching climate control off (Y page 138)
? Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)
A Demisting the windscreen (Y page 142)
B Calling up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 314)
Switching residual heat on/off (Y page 144)
C Switching the rear window heating on/off (Y page 142)
D Vehicles with auxiliary heating: switches the & auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 146)
Vehicles without auxiliary heating: activates/deactivates ¿ cooling with dehumidification
(Y page 139)
E Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 143)
F Setting the air distribution, right (Y page 140)
G Setting the temperature, right (Y page 140)
Rear control panel
H Setting the temperature (Y page 140)
138 Operating the climate control systems
I Display
J Setting the airflow (Y page 141)
Notes on using automatic climate If you have selected drive program C, S or S+,
control the current climate settings are maintained.
Optimum use of automatic climate con- ECO start/stop function

Climate control
trol
During automatic engine stop, the climate con-
The following contains notes and recommenda- trol operates only at a reduced capacity. If you
tions on how best to use THERMATIC automatic require the full climate control output, you can
climate control or THERMOTRONIC. switch off the ECO start/stop function by press-
X Activate climate control using rocker switch
ing the ECO button (Y page 158).
Ã. The indicator lamp above rocker switch
Ã lights up. The "Cooling with dehumidifi-
cation" function is activated in automatic Operating the climate control sys-
mode. tems
X Set the temperature to 22 †.
Switching the climate control on/off
i Use the "Windscreen demisting" function
only briefly until the windscreen is clear again. General notes
i Use the "Air-recirculation mode" function When climate control is switched off, the air
only briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out- supply and air circulation are also switched off.
side odours or when in a tunnel. The windows The windows could mist up. Therefore, switch
could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is off climate control only briefly.
drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation Switch on climate control preferably using
mode. rocker switch Ã (Y page 140).
Vehicles with THERMATIC automatic climate
control with auxiliary heating or Switching on/off
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: use
the "Residual heat" function if you want to heat X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition (Y page 153).
is switched off. The "Residual heat" function can X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
be switched on or off only with the ignition higher using rocker switch H.
switched off. The "Residual heat" function is X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
switched off when the ignition is switched on. rocker switch H.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control:

Mercedes-AMG when climate control is switched off, "OFF"
appears on the rear-compartment display.
GLC 63 4MATIC / GLC 63 S 4MATIC)
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
(Y page 161).
If you have selected drive program E:
Rduring heating, the electrical heater booster
is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a
result
Rthe rear window heating running time is
reduced
Operating the climate control systems 139
Activating/deactivating cooling with dehumidification

General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be
cooled during warm weather. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows
can mist up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the "Cooling with dehumidification" function only
briefly.
The "Cooling with dehumidification" function is available when the engine is running. The air inside
Climate control
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Switching on/off
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control without auxiliary heating and THERMATIC
automatic climate control
X Press rocker switch ¿ up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control with auxiliary heating

You can activate or deactivate the "Cooling with dehumidification" function via the multimedia
system (Y page 315).
Problems with the "Cooling with dehumidification" function

THERMATIC or The "Cooling with dehumidification" function has been deactivated
THERMOTRONIC with- due to a malfunction.
out auxiliary heating: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
the indicator lamp above
rocker switch
¿ remains off. The
"Cooling with dehumidi-
fication" function can no
longer be activated via
the multimedia system
(Y page 315).
THERMOTRONIC auto- The "Cooling with dehumidification" function has been deactivated
matic climate control due to a malfunction.
with auxiliary heating: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
the "Cooling with dehu-
midification" function
can no longer be activa-
ted via the multimedia
system (Y page 315).
Sets climate control to automatic Setting the temperature

mode
THERMATIC automatic climate control
General notes
Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- er's and front-passenger sides.
tained automatically at a constant level. The X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
system automatically regulates the temperature (Y page 153).
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
Climate control
X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch

tribution. w up or down.
During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with Change the temperature setting only in small
dehumidification" function is activated. increments. Start at 22 †.
Automatic control
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock control
(Y page 153).
X To activate: press rocker switch Ã up or General notes
down. Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
The indicator lamp above rocker switch Ã er's and front-passenger sides as well as for the
lights up. rear compartment.
X Set the desired temperature using rocker
switch w on the front control panel. Setting the temperature in the front com-
X To switch to manual operation: press partment using the front control panel
rocker switch H up or down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
or (Y page 153).
X Press rocker switch _ up or down. X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
The indicator lamp above rocker switch Ã w up or down.
goes out. Change the temperature setting only in small
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or increments. Start at 22 †.
air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
above rocker switch Ã goes out. The func- Setting the temperature in the rear com-
tion that has not been changed manually, how- partment using the rear control panel
ever, continues to be controlled automatically. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
When the manually set function switches back (Y page 153).
to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
rocker switch Ã lights up again. w up or down on the rear control panel
(Y page 137).
Change the temperature setting only in small
Setting the climate mode increments. Start at 22 †.
This function is available only with The set temperature appears on the rear-
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. compartment display.
In automatic mode, you can select the following
airflow settings for the driver's and front-
passenger areas: Setting the air distribution
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting Air distribution settings
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister
draught-free setting vents
P Directs the airflow through the centre
X To set: set the climate mode via the multi- and side air vents
media system (Y page 315).
O Directs the airflow through the footwell Activating/deactivating the synchro-

air vents nisation function
S Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents as well as the footwell General notes
air vents
a Directs the airflow through the footwell The "Synchronisation" function is available only
and demister vents with THERMATIC automatic climate control
(dual-zone) and THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
_ Directs the airflow through the demister mate control.
Climate control
vents, the centre and side air vents as
well as the footwell air vents Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronisation function. The temperature set-
b Directs the airflow through the centre ting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For
and side air vents as well as the demister THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, the
vents temperature setting is adopted for the front-
W Sets the air distribution to automatic passenger side and rear compartment.
Settings Switching on/off

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: you THERMATIC automatic climate control
can set the air distribution separately for the
without auxiliary heating
driver's and front-passenger sides.
X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 153).
X Press rocker switch 0 up or down.
The indicator lamp above rocker switch 0
X Press rocker switch _ up or down.
lights up or goes out.
The various air distribution settings appear on
the multimedia system. The synchronisation function is deactivated if
the settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
Setting the airflow THERMATIC automatic climate control
with auxiliary heating and
Setting the front-compartment airflow THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock trol
(Y page 153). X Activate or deactivate the "Synchronisation"
X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch function via the multimedia system
H up or down. (Y page 316).
The synchronisation function is deactivated if:
Setting the rear compartment airflow Rthe settings for the front-passenger side are
using the rear control panel changed
RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
It is only possible to set the airflow using the rear
only: the settings for the rear compartment
control panel on vehicles with THERMOTRONIC
are changed
automatic climate control.
You can set the airflow separately for the front
and rear compartment.
Demisting the windscreen
(Y page 153). General notes
X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
K or I up or down on the rear control You can use this function to defrost the wind-
panel. screen or to demist the inside of the windscreen
The selected airflow level appears on the rear and the front side windows.
display. Switch off the "Windscreen demisting" function
as soon as the windscreen is clear again.
Switching the "Windscreen demisting" X Switch on automatic mode using the Ã

function on or off rocker switch.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock the "Windscreen demisting" function using
(Y page 153). the ¬ rocker switch.
X To switch on: press rocker switch ¬ on
i You should select this setting only until the
the front control unit up or down. windscreen is clear again.
The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¬
lights up. The current climate control settings
Climate control
are deactivated. Windows misted up on the outside

The climate control system switches to the XSwitch on the windscreen wipers.
following functions: XSwitch on automatic mode using the Ã
Rhigh airflow rocker switch.
Rhigh temperature i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
Rair distribution to the windscreen and front not mist up as quickly.
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
i If necessary, the "Cooling with dehumidifi- Rear window heating
cation" function is activated. In this case, the
indicator lamp above rocker switch General notes
¿ remains switched off. The rear window heating has a high current
X To switch off: press rocker switch ¬ up or draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
down. as the window is clear. The rear window heating
The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¬ otherwise switches off automatically after sev-
goes out. The previous settings are reactiva- eral minutes.
ted. Air-recirculation mode remains deactiva- If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
ted. heating may switch off.
Switching on/off
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside (Y page 153).
X Press rocker switch ¤ up or down.
XActivate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¤
tion" function with the ¿ rocker switch. lights up or goes out.
i For THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
control with auxiliary heating, the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function can be
activated only via the multimedia system.
Problems with the rear window heating

The rear window heating The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
has switched off prema- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
turely or cannot be interior lighting or the seat heating.
switched on. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating
can be switched on again.
Activates/deactivates air-recircula- Convenience opening or closing using

tion mode the air-recirculation button
General notes G WARNING
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of When the convenience closing feature is oper-
fresh air manually if unpleasant odours are ating, parts of the body could become trapped
entering the vehicle from outside. The air in the closing area of the side window and the
already inside the vehicle will then be recircula- sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Climate control
ted.
Observe the complete closing procedure
If you activate air-recirculation mode, the win-
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
dows can mist up more quickly, particularly at
low temperatures. Activate air-recirculation ating. When closing make sure that no parts of
mode only briefly to prevent the windows from the body are in the closing area.
misting up.
G WARNING
Switching on/off During convenience opening parts of the body
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock could be drawn in or become trapped
(Y page 153). between the side window and window frame.
X To activate: press rocker switch g up or There is a risk of injury.
down. When opening, make sure that nobody is
The indicator lamp above rocker switch g touching the side window. If someone
lights up. becomes trapped, immediately press
Air-recirculation mode is activated automati- the W switch in the door to stop the move-
cally: ment of the side windows. To continue closing
Rat high outside temperatures the side window, pull on the W switch.
Rat high levels of pollution (THERMOTRONIC
automatic climate control only) X Convenience closing feature: press and
Rin tunnels (vehicles with a navigation system hold rocker switch g up or down until the
only) side windows start to close automatically.
Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof:
The indicator lamp above rocker switch g is the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sun-
not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is roof closes simultaneously.
activated. Outside air is added after approx-
imately 30 minutes. The indicator lamp above rocker switch g
lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
X To deactivate: press rocker switch g up
If you open the side windows or the panorama
or down.
sliding sunroof manually after closing with the
The indicator lamp above rocker switch g
convenience closing feature, they will remain
goes out.
in this position when opened using the con-
"Air-recirculation" mode is deactivated auto- venience opening feature.
matically:
If parts of the body are in the closing area during
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside convenience closing, proceed as follows:
temperatures below approximately 5 †
X Press button W to stop the side windows.
Rafter approximately five minutes if "Cooling
The side windows stop.
with dehumidification" is deactivated
X Then, to open the side windows, press button
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
W again.
temperatures above approximately 5 † if the
"Cooling with dehumidification" function is
activated
Z
X Only vehicles with panorama sliding sun- X To switch off: press rocker switch ! up or
roof: press the 3 switch to stop the pan- down.
orama sliding sunroof. The indicator lamp above rocker switch !
The panorama sliding sunroof stops. goes out.
X Then, to open the panorama sliding sunroof, Residual heat is switched off automatically:
pull back on switch 3. Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Notes on the automatic reversing function for: Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rthe side windows (Y page 99) Rif the battery voltage drops
Climate control
Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 102) Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on
X Convenience opening feature: press and
hold rocker switch g up or down until the
side windows start to open automatically. Perfume atomiser
Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof:
the panorama sliding sunroof opens simulta- Operating the perfume atomiser
neously.
The indicator lamp above rocker switch g G WARNING
goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactiva- If children open the vial, they could drink the
ted. perfume or it could come into contact with
their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Therefore,
do not leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Switches the residual heat on/off cle.
General notes If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with
The "Residual heat" function is available only your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean
with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
and THERMATIC automatic climate control with water. If you continue to experience difficul-
auxiliary heating. ties, consult a doctor.
When the engine is switched off, it is possible to
make use of the residual heat of the engine to H Environmental note
heat or ventilate the front compartment of the Full vials must not be dis-
vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. The heat- posed of with household
ing or ventilation time depends on the set inte-
waste. They must be collec-
rior temperature.
ted separately and disposed
of in an environmentally
Switching on/off
responsible recycling sys-
X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock tem.
or remove it (Y page 153).
X To switch on: press rocker switch ! up or
Dispose of full vials in an
down. environmentally responsible
The indicator lamp above rocker switch ! manner and take them to a
lights up. harmful substance collec-
The blower will run at a low speed regardless of tion point.
the airflow setting.
If you switch on the "Residual heat" function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
The perfume atomiser is provided with a pre-fil-

led vial. You can also choose from a variety of
filled perfume vials and an empty vial that you
can fill yourself.
If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the
separate information sheet attached to the vial.
! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz
interior perfumes, observe the manufactur-
Climate control
ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.
Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is
empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.
: Vial lid X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove
; Vial compartment (Y page 324).
The perfume atomiser helps to improve driving X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as
comfort. it will go.
Via the multimedia system you can: X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
Rswitch the perfume atomiser on or off

perfume vial.
(Y page 315) X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of
Radjust the perfume intensity (Y page 315) the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.
The following conditions can affect your percep- X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the
tion of the perfume intensity: desired liquid perfume.
Roperating mode of automatic climate control X Screw the lid back on to the vial.
Rinterior temperature
! Only refill the vial when you are outside the
Rtime of year or day vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip
Rair humidity into the interior and contaminate it.
Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati- Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
gue or hunger same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
The perfume atomiser is active only when the ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
glove compartment is closed. iser.
Problems with the perfume atomiser

The vehicle interior is not The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will
perfumed although the go.
perfume atomiser has X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
been activated.
The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.
X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.
X Use a new pre-filled vial.
X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the same
perfume.
The perfume atomiser is faulty.

X Have the perfume atomiser checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Z
Ionisation When the auxiliary heating is switched on,

Ionisation is used to purify and freshen the air in make sure that:
the vehicle interior, which is conducive to a Rno flammable materials come into contact
pleasant climate. with hot vehicle components
The ionisation of the interior air is odourless and Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the
cannot, directly, be perceived in the vehicle inte-
rior. exhaust pipe unhindered
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact
Climate control
You can switch ionisation on or off using the

multimedia system (Y page 315). with flammable materials.
Ionisation can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air The auxiliary heating unit is fitted under the front
vent on the driver's side must be open. wing on the right-hand side of the vehicle. The
emissions outlet is found behind the front wheel
on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Auxiliary heating ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation
draws on the vehicle battery. After you have
Important safety notes heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of
two times, drive for a longer distance.
G DANGER
Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly – once
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient a month – for about ten minutes.
ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle
fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car- interior to the set temperature. This occurs with-
bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in out using the heat of the running engine. The
enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in auxiliary heating is operated directly using the
snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank level
must be above the reserve range to ensure that
You should switch off the auxiliary heating in the auxiliary heating functions.
enclosed spaces which do not have an extrac- The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is automatically adjusts to changes in tempera-
stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary ture and weather conditions. For this reason,
heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the auxiliary heating could switch from ventila-
the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To tion mode to heating mode or from heating
mode to ventilation mode.
guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle away from The auxiliary heating switches off when the
engine is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation
the wind. is not active if the engine is running.
The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
G WARNING switches off automatically after 50 minutes.
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, This time limit can be altered. To do this, consult
parts of the vehicle can become very hot. a qualified specialist workshop.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool
the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
twigs may ignite if they come into contact the outside temperature.
with:
Rhot parts of the exhaust system Before switching on
Rthe exhaust gas itself X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
There is a risk of fire. (Y page 153).
X Set the desired temperature using rocker
switch w on the front control panel.
If you do not alter the temperature before Switching on/off

switching on the auxiliary heating or auxiliary X To switch on auxiliary heating or auxiliary
ventilation, the last temperature setting will be ventilation: press the : rocker switch up or
adopted. down.
Auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation can also The red or the blue indicator lamp above
be switched on if the manually set climate con- rocker switch : lights up.
trol is activated. Optimum comfort is attained X To set the temperature: switch on auxiliary
when the system is set to automatic mode. Set
heating or auxiliary ventilation.
the temperature to 22 †.
Climate control
The multimedia system is activated for
You can switch the auxiliary heating or auxiliary approximately one minute.
ventilation on or off: X Set the desired temperature via the multime-
Rusing the rocker switch on the centre console dia system (see the Digital Owner's Manual).
(Y page 147) X To switch off auxiliary heating or auxiliary
Rusing the remote control (Y page 147) ventilation: press the : rocker switch up or
The remote control can be used to set up to down.
three departure times, one of which may be pre- The red or the blue indicator lamp above
selected. rocker switch : goes out.
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-

lation on/off using the centre console lation on or off using the remote control
rocker switch
General notes
General notes Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
You may use two additional remote controls for
your vehicle. For more information, please con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Store the remote control for the auxiliary heat-
ing so that the auxiliary heating cannot be acti-
vated unintentionally. In particular, ensure that
the remote control for the auxiliary heating is
kept out of the reach of children.
The remote control has a range of approximately
300 metres. This range is reduced by:
Rsources of radio interference
Rsolid objects between the remote control and
The colours of the indicator lamps above rocker the vehicle
switch : have the following meanings: Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable
Rblue: auxiliary ventilation is switched on position in relation to the vehicle
Rred: auxiliary heating is switched on Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
Ryellow: departure time is preselected If the remote control battery is low, the battery
Operation using the app: the auxiliary heat- symbol on the left of the display is shown as
ing/ventilation can also be operated via the empty. Replace the remote control battery and
Mercedes me connect app. For more informa- observe the important safety notes when doing
tion, refer to the separate Owner's Manual: so (Y page 149).
http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/ con-
nectme/en_GB/index.html.
Z
Activating/deactivating the auxiliary The auxiliary heating is

heating or auxiliary ventilation activated. The number on
the display shows the
remaining time (in
minutes) for the auxiliary
heating.
A departure time has been
activated. The departure
Climate control
time appears on the dis-

play.
A departure time has been
activated. The auxiliary
ventilation is currently
: Display activated. The number on
; u Activates the auxiliary heating or aux- the display shows the
iliary ventilation remaining time (in
Checks the status ventilation.
= . Sets the departure time
? ^ Deactivates the auxiliary heating or A departure time has been
auxiliary ventilation activated. The auxiliary
A , Sets the departure time heating is currently activa-
ted. The number on the
X To activate: press and hold the u button. display shows the remain-
ON is shown on the remote control display. ing time (in minutes) for
X To deactivate: press and hold the ^ but- the auxiliary heating.
ton.
OFF is shown on the remote control display. If the engine has not yet reached operating tem-
perature when it is started, the auxiliary heating
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat- running time is increased. The auxiliary heating
ing or auxiliary ventilation continues to run until the engine has reached its
X Briefly press the u button. operating temperature. If this is the case, the
y symbol appears on the remote control dis-
The following messages may appear on the display and the running time is zero minutes.
play:
Setting the departure time
Display Meaning
Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is
The auxiliary heating or correct before setting the departure time (see
auxiliary ventilation is the Digital Owner's Manual). Otherwise, the aux-
deactivated. iliary heating may activate at the wrong time and
at an unsuitable location. When setting the
The auxiliary ventilation is departure time, also observe the important
activated. The number on safety notes (Y page 146).
the display shows the X Briefly press the u button.
remaining time (in X Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the time to be changed appears on the
ventilation.
display.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simultane-
ously.
The Î symbol on the remote control display
flashes.
X Press the , or . button to set the H Environmental note

desired departure time.
Batteries contain pollutants.
i The longer you press the , or . but- It is illegal to dispose of them
ton, the more quickly the time changes.
with the household rubbish.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simultane-
They must be collected sep-
ously.
The new departure time is stored. arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
Climate control
Activating the set departure time recycling system.
X Briefly press the u button. Dispose of batteries in an
X Press the , or . button repeatedly environmentally responsible
until the desired departure time appears on manner. Take discharged
the display. batteries to a qualified spe-
X Press the u button. cialist workshop or to a col-
The Í symbol, the departure time and, lection point for used batter-
depending on the selected departure time, ies.
the letter A, B or C appears on the display.
Deactivating the set departure time Replacing the battery

X Briefly press the u button.
The status of the auxiliary heating is shown on
the display.
X Press the . button.
The first departure time stored appears on the
display.
X Press the ^ button.
OFF is shown on the remote control display.
Replacing the remote control battery

Important safety notes A CR2450 lithium battery is required when
G WARNING replacing the battery.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- X Press a pointed object into recess :.
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in X Slide battery cover ; backwards in the direc-
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal tion of the arrow.
injury. X Insert new battery = with the lettering facing
upwards.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
X Slide battery cover ; in the opposite direc-
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention tion to the arrow on the remote control until it
immediately. engages.
Z
150 Air vents
Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation

FAIL ¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is
faulty.
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.
Climate control
FAIL The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation cannot be switched on or

has switched itself off.
The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
X Charge the starter battery.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation is faulty.

X Have the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation checked at a
The battery symbol on The remote control battery is discharged.

the left of the remote X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 149).
control display is shown
as empty.
Air vents Adjusting the air vents

Important safety notes Air vents are located:
Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-
G WARNING board
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air Rin the middle of the dashboard
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in Rin the rear centre console, depending on
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There equipment in the vehicle
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and
the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves Side air vent (example)
Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in : Side window demister vent
the vehicle interior ; Side air vent, left
= Control for left side air vent
Air vents 151
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = to the

left or right as far as it will go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up or
down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents (see Digital Owner's
Manual).
Climate control
Z
152 Driving
Running-in notes Always observe the maximum permissible

speed.
In certain driving and driving safety systems, the
sensors adjust automatically while a certain dis- Rear axle locking differential
tance is being driven after the vehicle has been (Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
delivered or after repairs. Full system effective- GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
ness is not reached until the end of this teach-in
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
Driving and parking
process.
ferential on the rear axle.
Brake pads/linings and discs that either are new
Change the oil to improve protection of the rear
or have been replaced achieve optimum braking
axle differential:
effect only after several hundred kilometres of
driving. Compensate for the reduced braking Rafter a running-in period of 3000 km
effect by applying greater force to the brake Revery 50,000 km or 3 years
pedal. These oil changes prolong the service life of the
differential. Have the oil change carried out at a
The first 1500 km
The more you treat the engine with sufficient
care at the start, the more satisfied you will be Driving
with the engine performance later on.
RYou should therefore drive at varying road
speeds and engine speeds for the first G WARNING
1500 km.
Objects in the driver's footwell can impede
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this
pedal travel or block a pedal which is
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
depressed. This jeopardises safe operation of
RWhen shifting gears manually, shift up in good
time, before the rev counter needle reaches the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so that
display. they cannot reach the driver's footwell. Make
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to sure the floormats and carpets are properly
brake. secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct
RVehicles with automatic transmission: try to the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or
avoid depressing the accelerator pedal carpets on top of one another.
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
Additional notes on running in Mercedes-AMG G WARNING
vehicles:
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for
of the pedals, e.g.:
the first 1500 km.
RAllow the engine to reach a maximum engine Rshoes with thick soles
speed of 4500 rpm only briefly. Rshoes with high heels
RDrive the vehicle mainly in drive program C for
Rslippers
the first 1500 km.
After 1500 km, you can increase the engine
speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
full speed. usage of the pedals.
You should also observe these notes on running-
in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your G WARNING
vehicle have been replaced.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
Driving 153
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, Key positions

for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably Key
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
Driving and parking

If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off. g To remove the key
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle the windscreen wipers
is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
high engine speeds and driving at full throttle and drive position
until the engine has reached its operating 3 To start the vehicle
temperature.
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it
Only shift the automatic transmission to the can still be turned in the ignition lock. How-
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- ever, the ignition will not be switched on. The
tionary. engine cannot be started.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
Start/Stop button
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil General notes

temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum When you insert the Start/Stop button in the
engine speed is restricted in order to protect ignition lock, the system needs approximately
the engine. To protect the engine and main- two seconds of recognition time. You can then
tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at use the Start/Stop button.
full throttle when the engine is cold. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
Hybrid vehicles: It is essential to read the infor- succession corresponds to the different key
mation in the supplementary manual. Other- positions in the ignition lock. This is the case
wise, you may fail to recognise dangers. only if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check that periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the key
determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle.
This occurs, for example, when the engine is
started.
Z
154 Driving
To start the vehicle without actively using the X To switch on the power supply: press
key: Start/Stop button : once.
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the The power supply is switched on. You can now
ignition lock activate the windscreen wipers, for example.
Rthe key must be in the vehicle The power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or Rthe driver's door is opened and
KEYLESS-GO (Y page 86) Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
Do not keep the key: this position
Driving and parking
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
or another key button : twice.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil The ignition is switched on.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case The ignition is switched off again if:
This can impair the key's function. Ryou do not start the engine from this position
If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote within 15 minutes
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in
this position
Ryou will no longer be able to switch on the
ignition with the Start/Stop button The power supply is switched off again if:
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine Rthe driver's door is opened and
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in
unlocked again this position
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 92), you can continue Removing the Start/Stop button
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
You can switch off the engine while the vehicle is ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ using the key.
Stop button for around three seconds. This func- It is possible to switch between Start/Stop but-
tion operates independently of the ECO start/ ton mode and key operation only when the
stop automatic engine switch-off function. transmission is in position j.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
Key positions with the Start/Stop button lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as
the key is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock
When you switch on the ignition, all the indicator
lamps on the instrument cluster light up. Warn-
ing and indicator lamps: see (Y page 298).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this is the same as the key having been
removed.
Driving 155
Starting the vehicle General notes

Important safety notes Vehicles with a petrol engine: the catalytic
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds
G WARNING after a cold start. The sound of the engine may
change during this time.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they can: Automatic transmission
Ropen doors and endanger other persons or
Driving and parking

X Shift the transmission to position j
road users (Y page 163).
Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic The transmission position indicator on the
Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- multifunction display shows j
(Y page 165).
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, i You can start the engine in transmission
for example by: position j and i.
Starting procedure using the key
park position P To start the engine using the key instead of the
Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button
Rstarting the engine.
out of the ignition lock.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 153).
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave The % preglow indicator lamp on the
children unattended in the vehicle. Always instrument cluster lights up.
keep the key out of reach of children. X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock
and release it as soon as the engine is run-
ning.
G WARNING
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust start the engine without preglow if the engine
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling is warm.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There If the engine will not start:
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
X Reinsert the key in the ignition lock after wait-
out sufficient ventilation.
ing for a short period.
G WARNING (Y page 153).
Flammable materials introduced through The indicator lamps on the instrument cluster
environmental influence or by animals can light up (Y page 298).
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or X Turn the key to position 3 (Y page 153) in
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk the ignition lock and release it as soon as the
of fire. engine is running.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in Starting procedure using the Start/
the engine compartment or in the exhaust Stop button
system. The Start/Stop button is available only on vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
function.
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle manually without inserting the key in the
Z
156 Driving
ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and verter to reach its operating temperature
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the more quickly.
ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine Information on automatically releasing the elec-
manually operates independently of the ECO trical parking brake (Y page 180).
start/stop automatic engine start function.
You can start the engine if a valid key is in the
vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take
Pulling away with a trailer
the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even
if you leave it for only a short time. Observe the
Driving and parking
important safety notes.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 154).
Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine
starts.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
activated and the engine starts.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when

pulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electric
Pulling away parking brake.
General notes X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
G WARNING and prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R, The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster remains lit.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
X Depress the accelerator pedal.
a risk of an accident.
X As soon as the car/trailer combination is held
When engaging transmission position D or R, by the driving force of the engine, release
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do lever :.
not simultaneously accelerate. the electric parking brake is released
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling cluster goes out.
away. For further information on the electric parking
The vehicle automatically locks centrally once brake, see (Y page 179).
you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the
doors drop down.
Hill start assist
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time. Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
You can also deactivate the automatic door wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
locking system; see the Digital Owner's Manual. the vehicle for a short time after you have
It is possible to shift the transmission from posi- removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
tion j to the desired position only if you gives you enough time to move your foot from
depress the brake pedal. Only then is the park- the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
ing lock released. If you do not depress the depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still G WARNING
be moved but the parking lock remains
engaged. After a while, hill start assist no longer holds
the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds of an accident and injury.
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
Driving 157
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the If the ECO symbol è is shown on the multi-
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never function display, the ECO start/stop function
switches the engine off automatically if the vehi-
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start cle stops moving.
assist. If the ECO start/stop function has been
switched off manually (Y page 158) or as the
Hill start assist is not active if: result of a malfunction, the è or ç ECO
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a symbol is not displayed.
downhill gradient Except Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
Driving and parking

Rthe transmission is in position i on vehicles GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: the ECO start/stop func-
with automatic transmission tion is switched on whenever you start the
Rthe electric parking brake is applied engine using the key or the Start/Stop button.
RESP® is malfunctioning Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the ECO start/stop function is auto-
matically switched on only in drive program C.
The ECO start/stop function is switched on
ECO start/stop function whenever you restart the engine using the key or
Introduction the Start/Stop button.
This is the case if:
The ECO start/stop function switches the Rthe ignition was switched off for more than
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
four hours or
under certain conditions.
Rthe ECO start/stop function had been
When the vehicle pulls away again, the engine
switched on before the engine was switched
starts automatically. The ECO start/stop func-
off
tion thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Automatic engine stop
Important safety notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and
the è ECO symbol is shown on the multi-
G WARNING function display if:
If the engine is switched off automatically and Rthe indicator lamp on the ECO button is lit
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted green
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. Rthe outside temperature and atmospheric air
There is a risk of accident and injury. pressure are within a range that is suitable for
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the system
the ignition and secure the vehicle against Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature
rolling away. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
General notes Rthe system does not detect moisture on the
windscreen when the air-conditioning system
is switched on
Rthe bonnet is closed
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
If all conditions for automatic engine stop are
not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown.
: ECO start/stop display All the vehicle's systems remain active when the
engine is switched off automatically.
Hybrid vehicles: It is essential to read the infor-
mation in the supplementary manual. Other-
wise, you may fail to recognise dangers.
Z
158 Driving
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S Switching the ECO start/stop function

4MATIC+: the number of consecutive auto- off/on
matic engine stops is unlimited.
All other models: the engine can be switched Mercedes-AMG vehicles
off automatically a maximum of four times (ini-
tial stop, then three subsequent stops) in suc-
cession. The ç ECO symbol is shown on the
multifunction display after the engine has been
started automatically for the fourth time. When
Driving and parking
the è ECO symbol is shown on the multi-

function display, automatic engine stop is pos-
sible again.
Automatic engine start

The engine is started automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button X To switch off: press ECO button :.
RMercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63
Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO
symbol on the multifunction display go out.
S 4MATIC+: you switch to drive program
X To switch on: press ECO button :.
RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Rall other models: you switch to drive pro-
gram S+ If all conditions for automatic engine stop
(Y page 157) are fulfilled, the è ECO sym-
Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting
bol is shown on the multifunction display.
(Y page 169)
If all conditions for automatic engine stop
Rin transmission position h or i, the brake
(Y page 157) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not symbol is shown on the multifunction display.
active If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal is not available.
Ryou engage reverse gear k
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
Ryou move the transmission out of position j function has been switched off manually or as
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv- the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
er's door not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
Rthe vehicle starts to roll cle stops.
Rthe brake system requires this The ECO start/stop function is switched off if:
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- RMercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: you switch
ates from the set range to drive program S+ (Y page 161)
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- RMercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63
screen when the air-conditioning system is S 4MATIC+: you switch to drive program
switched on RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 161)
Rthe battery's charge status is too low Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting
Shifting the transmission to position j does (Y page 169)
not start the engine. If you have permanently activated manual gear-
If you shift the transmission from k to h, the shifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO
ECO start/stop function is available as soon as start/stop function is switched on.
the è ECO symbol appears on the multifunc-
tion display.
Driving 159
All other models the switchable exhaust flap. The exhaust flap is
adjusted automatically according to the selec-
ted drive program (Y page 161).
You can also adjust the position of the exhaust
flap and therefore the volume of the exhaust
system manually.
The automatic adjustment of the exhaust flap is
always active when you change drive program,
regardless of the manual setting.
Driving and parking

If you switch off the engine for less than four
hours, the last selected setting remains active
the next time the engine is started. If the ignition
is switched off for more than four hours, the
quietest setting is activated when the engine is
X To switch off: press ECO button :. next started.
Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO
symbol on the multifunction display go out.
X To switch on: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine stop (Y page 157) are
fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown on
the multifunction display.
If all conditions for automatic engine stop
(Y page 157) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO
symbol is shown on the multifunction display.
If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function
is not available.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
Setting the volume:
function has been switched off manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then X Press button :.
not be switched off automatically when the vehi- If you select the loudest setting, indicator
cle stops. lamp ; lights up.
Selecting drive program S+ switches off the Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO but- 4MATIC+: you can preset the volume of the
ton :, the ECO start/stop function is switched exhaust system for drive program I (Individual).
on. Information on DYNAMIC SELECT and on con-
figuring drive program I with the multimedia sys-
tem (see Digital Owner's Manual).
AMG switchable performance
exhaust system (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
The volume of the AMG Performance exhaust
system changes depending on the position of
Z
160 Driving
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 201) or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 197).
X Start the engine again (Y page 155).
Driving and parking
The engine does not RThe engine electronics are malfunctioning

start. The starter motor RThe fuel supply is malfunctioning
can be heard. Before attempting to restart the engine:
X Turn the key back to position u in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps on
the instrument cluster go out.
X Start the engine again (Y page 155). Avoid excessively long and
frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display is at the
reserve level.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 367).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to excessively high thermal load.

X Start the engine again (Y page 155).
If the engine still does not start:
Vehicles with a petrol The engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine
engine: management system is malfunctioning.
The engine is not running X Depress the accelerator pedal only slightly.
smoothly and is misfir- Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing. and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 161

The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is not
display is showing more being cooled sufficiently.
than 120 †. A display X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
message may also cool down.
appear on the multifunc-
X Check the coolant level (Y page 348). Observe the warning notes
tion display and a warn-
as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
ing tone may sound.
Driving and parking

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The
coolant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently.
X Continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop only if
the coolant temperature is below 120 †.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch C Comfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
I Individual Individual settings
General information
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to select the Depending on the drive program selected, the
drive program. following vehicle characteristics will change:
Available drive programs for Mercedes- Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: ment)
Rthe suspension
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
Rthe steering
characteristics
Rthe driver assistance systems
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- RESP® (Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
tics
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
C Comfort Comfortable and economi- Rthe position of the exhaust flap (Mercedes-
cal driving characteristics AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+)
Rsetting of the ECO start/stop function
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics Rthe availability of glide mode
Rthe climate control
Further information for automatic drive program
characteristics (Y page 167).
Available drive programs for Mercedes- Additionally, in drive program I you can config-
AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: ure the respective vehicle characteristics via the
multimedia system. You can find information
RACE Driving characteristics suit- about this under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehi-
(S‑MODEL) able for a race circuit cle's Digital Owner's Manual.
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving If the ignition is switched off for less than four
characteristics hours, the previously selected drive program is
activated when the engine is next started. If the
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- ignition is switched off for more than four hours,
tics drive program C is activated when the engine is
next started.
Z
162 DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Selecting the drive program i Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: in a few

countries, the ECO start/stop function is
deactivated at the factory due to the quality of
the available fuel. In this case, the ECO start/
stop function is not available in any drive pro-
gram, regardless of what is shown on the mul-
timedia system display.
Driving and parking
All other models

Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the notes
in the supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognise dangers.
X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the
or back until the desired drive program is drive program.
selected. Depending on the drive program selected, the
The status icon of the selected drive program following vehicle characteristics will change:
is shown on the multifunction display.
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
In addition, the current drive program settings ment)
are shown briefly on the multimedia system
Rthe suspension
display.
Rthe steering
You can also shift gears yourself using the steer-
Rthe ECO start/stop function
ing wheel gearshift paddles. Further information
on manual gearshifting (Y page 169). Rthe climate control
- the climate control settings
Additional settings - the rear window heating operation period
- the performance of the seat heating
If the ignition is switched off for less than four
hours, the previously selected drive program is
activated when the engine is next started. If the
ignition is switched off for more than four hours,
drive program C is activated when the engine is
next started.
: Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 159)

; ECO start/stop function (Y page 157)
= ESP® (Y page 76)
? Suspension (Y page 207)
A Permanently activates manual gearshifting
(Y page 169)
When you press buttons : - A the corre- X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards
sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC or backwards until the desired drive program
SELECT switch setting is overwritten. is selected.
If you switch to drive program I, all stored char- The status icon of the selected drive program
acteristics are applied. This is also the case if is shown on the multifunction display.
you have previously pressed buttons : - A.
Automatic transmission 163
In addition, the current drive program settings The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
are shown briefly on the multimedia system accident.
display.
After switching off the engine, always switch
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
quality of the available fuel. In this case, the cle from rolling away by applying the parking
ECO start/stop function is not available in any brake.
drive program, regardless of what is shown on
the multimedia system display. Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the notes
Driving and parking

Available drive programs: in the supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognise dangers.
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics DIRECT SELECT lever
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- Overview of transmission positions
tics
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information on drive programs

(Y page 167).
You can also shift gears yourself using the steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddles. Further information
on manual gearshifting (Y page 169).
Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering j Park position with parking lock
package: information on the off-road programs k Reverse gear
(Y page 202). i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
Automatic transmission steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
Important safety notes original position. The current transmission posi-
G WARNING tion j, k, i or h is shown in the transmis-
sion position display on the multifunction dis-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed play (Y page 165).
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is Selects park position
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
When engaging transmission position D or R, is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do mission directly from h to k, from k to h
not simultaneously accelerate. or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
G WARNING X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
The automatic transmission switches to neu- direction of arrow j.
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
Z
164 Automatic transmission
Engaging park position automatically When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
Park position j is automatically engaged if: with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle. Always
Ryou switch off the engine using the key and
remove the key keep the key out of reach of children.
Ryou switch off the engine using the key or
X If the transmission is in position h or k:
using the Start/Stop button and open the push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
driver's door or front-passenger door the first point of resistance.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
Driving and parking
X If the transmission is in position j: depress

stationary or when driving at a very low speed the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
and the transmission is in position h or k lever up or down to the first point of resist-
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- ance.
mission shifts to transmission position j auto-
matically if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa- sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
tion on the HOLD function (Y page 201) and mission shifts to i automatically.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 195). With the key: if you then open the driver's door
or the front-passenger door or remove the key
Engaging reverse gear from the ignition lock, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to j automatically.
! Only move the automatic transmission to With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
k when the vehicle is stationary. the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
X Depress the brake pedal. the automatic transmission shifts automatically
to j.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance. If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
The ECO start/stop function is not available cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
when reverse gear is engaged. For further infor- wash:
mation on the ECO start/stop function, see X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
(Y page 157).
GO start function: remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock.
Engaging neutral X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
G WARNING X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
depressed.
they can:
X Engage neutral i.
Ropen doors and endanger other persons or X Release the brake pedal.
road users X Release the electric parking brake.
Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- ignition lock.
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, Engaging the drive position
for example by: X If the transmission is in position k or i:
Rreleasing the parking brake push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
park position P the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
Rstarting the engine. lever down past the first point of resistance.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Transmission position and drive pro- Transmission positions

gram display
B Park position
The current transmission position and drive pro-
This safeguards the vehicle against
gram appear on the multifunction display.
rolling away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion j (Y page 163) when the vehi-
cle is stationary. The parking lock
Driving and parking

should not be used as a brake when
parking. In order to secure the vehi-
cle, always apply the electric parking
brake in addition to the parking lock.
: Status icon, drive program Park position j is automatically
engaged if:
; Transmission position
= Gear Ryou switch off the engine using the
key and remove the key
The arrows in the transmission position display Ryou switch off the engine using the
show how and into which transmission positions
key or using the Start/Stop button
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
and open the driver's door or front-
If the transmission position display on the mul- passenger door
tifunction display is not working, you should pull Ryou open the driver's door when
away carefully to check whether the desired
the vehicle is stationary or when
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
driving at a very low speed and the
should select transmission position h and
transmission is in position h or
drive program E or S.
k
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position j. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
C Reverse gear
You can only shift the transmission
into position k when the vehicle is
stationary (Y page 164).
Z
A Neutral style. The sound generated by the double-clutch

function depends on the drive program.
Do not shift the transmission to i
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam- Kickdown
aged. Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
point of resistance.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
Driving and parking
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to gear depending on the engine speed.
push it or tow it.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift desired speed is reached.
the transmission to position i if the The automatic transmission shifts back up.
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the Glide mode
transmission in position k or h,
the automatic transmission shifts to
i automatically.
! Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7 Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears Glide mode is available depending on the equip-
are available. ment.
Glide mode is characterised by the following:
Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from
Driving tips the drive train
Rthe engine is running at idling speed
Changing gear Rthe multifunction display hides the gear indi-
The automatic transmission shifts through the cator and displays the transmission position
individual gears automatically when it is in trans- h in green (Y page 165)
mission position h. This is determined by: RMercedes-AMG vehicles: the multifunction
Rthe selected drive program display shows the status icon : for the drive
Rthe
program's status icon
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe speed of travel
In drive program E or in drive program C
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC/
GLC 63 S 4MATIC), you can activate and deac-
Accelerator pedal position tivate glide mode using the ECO button
Your driving style influences how the automatic (Y page 158).
transmission shifts gear: Glide mode can be activated under the following
conditions:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifting
Rthe speed is within a suitable range
Rmore throttle: late upshifting
Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. no
steep uphill or downhill gradients
Double-clutch function
Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator
When shifting down, the double-clutch function pedal
is active regardless of the drive program. The
double-clutch function reduces load change
reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving
Glide mode is deactivated under the following Rthe steering

conditions: Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Rthe climate control
Ryou depress the brake pedal Information on configuring drive program I with
Ryou change the transmission position the multimedia system can be found under
(Y page 163) "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Own-
Ryou switch to drive program RACE er's Manual.
(Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC), S+ or S Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Driving and parking

(Y page 161)
Drive program S+ is characterised by the fol-
Ryou activate manual gearshifting
lowing:
(Y page 169)
Ryou leave the suitable speed range Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
i If you have selected the "Eco" or "Comfort" Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.
setting (Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC/ Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
GLC 63 S 4MATIC) for the drive (engine and
Fuel consumption may be higher as a result of
transmission management) in drive program
the later automatic transmission shift points.
I, you can also activate glide mode. Informa-
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm
tion on DYNAMIC SELECT and on configuring
drive program I via the multimedia system springing and damping settings (vehicles with
(see Digital Owner's Manual). AIR BODY CONTROL)
Rglide mode is not available
Towing a trailer Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched off

(Y page 157)
Not all models can tow a trailer. For further
information, see (Y page 236). Drive program S (Sport)
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range Drive program S is characterised by the follow-
on uphill gradients. ing:
X Manual gearshifting: depending on the Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
uphill or downhill gradient, shift to a gear istics
(Y page 169) in which the engine will run in Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear
the middle of the engine speed range. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later,
This also applies if cruise control, Distance fuel consumption may be higher as a result of
Pilot DISTRONIC or the speed limiter are acti- the later automatic transmission shift points
vated. Rthe suspension exhibits firm springing and
damping settings (vehicles with
AIR BODY CONTROL)
Drive programs Rglide mode is not available
Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched on
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG GLC (Y page 157)
63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program I (Individual) Drive program C is characterised by the follow-
In drive program I, the following properties of ing:
the drive program can be selected: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- driving characteristics
ment) Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and therefore indirectly the availability of and reverse gears unless the accelerator
glide mode and the properties of the driver pedal is depressed fully
assistance systems Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g.
Rthe suspension on slippery road surfaces
Z
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the drive train and engine operating mode at any
automatic transmission shifting up sooner, time.
the vehicle is driven in the low engine speed RIf you have selected a gear manually, this will
range and the wheels are less likely to spin be maintained until the vehicle speed signifi-
Rglide mode is not available cantly increases or decreases.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched on RThe vehicle pulls away in first gear.
(Y page 157) RThe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Drive program E (Economy) the later automatic transmission shift points.
Driving and parking
Drive program E is characterised by the follow- RThe suspension exhibits particularly firm
ing: springing and damping settings.
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly economical RGlide mode is not available.
driving characteristics RThe ECO start/stop function is switched off
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward (Y page 157).
and reverse gears unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. Drive program S+ is characterised by the fol-
on slippery road surfaces lowing:
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the RThe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
automatic transmission shifting up sooner, characteristics.
the vehicle is driven in the low engine speed RThe vehicle pulls away in first gear.
range and the wheels are less likely to spin
RThe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Rduring deceleration the engine is disconnec-
ted from the drive train, the vehicle uses the later automatic transmission shift points.
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel
RThe suspension exhibits particularly firm
Rthe cooling and heating output of the climate
springing and damping settings.
control system has been reduced
RGlide mode is not available.
Rglide mode is available
RThe ECO start/stop function is switched off
Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched on
(Y page 157).
(Y page 157)
Drive program S (Sport)
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC Drive program S is characterised by the follow-
63 S 4MATIC+ ing:
RThe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL) istics.
The RACE drive program is characterised by the RThe vehicle pulls away in first gear.
following: RThe automatic transmission shifts up later.
RThe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics Fuel consumption may be higher as a result of
suitable for the racetrack. the later automatic transmission shift points.
RAll vehicle systems are set for maximum RThe suspension exhibits firm springing and
sportiness. damping settings.
RThe gearshift recommendation gives you RGlide mode is not available.
information for slowly warming up the drive RThe ECO start/stop function is switched off
assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient (Y page 157).
driving style (Y page 169). You can follow the
gearshift recommendations at all times and
shift gear accordingly using the steering
wheel gearshift paddles. On the basis of the
gearshift recommendation, using the steering
wheel gearshift paddles, you can optimise the
Drive program C (Comfort) immediately shifts into the next gear up or

Drive program C is characterised by the follow- down, if permitted.
ing: To use manual gearshifting, you have two
options:
RThe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
driving characteristics. Rtemporary setting
RThe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward Rpermanent setting
and reverse gears unless the accelerator If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
pedal is depressed fully. function display will show the current gear and
Driving and parking

RThe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. p instead of transmission position h.
on slippery road surfaces. If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears
ROptimal fuel consumption resulting from the will be shifted automatically again.
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed Temporary setting
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
RGlide mode is available.
RThe ECO start/stop function is switched on
(Y page 157).
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I, the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
Rthe drive (engine management)
and therefore indirectly the availability of
glide mode and the ECO start/stop function
as well as the properties of the driver assis-
tance systems X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
Rthe transmission management position h.
RESP® (Y page 76) X Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;.
Rthe suspension The temporary setting will remain active for a
and therefore indirectly the steering certain amount of time. In certain conditions,
Ractivation of the exhaust flap the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
To permanently shift the gears manually in drive the case of lateral acceleration, overrun mode or
program I using the steering wheel gearshift driving on steep terrain.
paddles, select the M (Manual) setting for the X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
transmission management. paddle ; and hold it in place.
Information on configuring drive program I with or
the multimedia system can be found under X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the
"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Own- transmission position.
er's Manual. or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
the drive program.
Manual gearshifting
General notes Permanent setting
You can shift gears yourself using the steering ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must transmission does not shift up automatically
be in position h for this. even when the engine limiting speed for the
Depending on which steering wheel gearshift current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
Z
make sure that the engine speed does not Information on configuring drive program I with
reach the red area of the rev counter. There is the multimedia system can be found under
otherwise a risk of engine damage. "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Own-
er's Manual.
Shifting gears
Driving and parking
Manual mode button (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles)
X To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift pad-

dle ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the gear cur-
rently engaged is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-
matically shifts up in order to prevent engine
damage (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the temporary
setting has been activated and you continue
Manual mode button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
to accelerate when the maximum engine
X To activate/deactivate: shift the DIRECT speed has been reached, the automatic trans-
SELECT lever to position h. mission automatically shifts up. If the perma-
X Press button :. nent setting has been activated, the auto-
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when indicator matic transmission does not shift up auto-
lamp ; lights up, automatic transmission matically even when the limiting speed of the
manual mode is activated. engine is reached. It is essential to ensure
The manual mode activated with the : but- protection against reaching the overrevving
ton remains activated when the drive program range on the multifunction display. Make sure
is changed. that the engine speed does not reach the red
area of the rev counter.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/
X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: only if the D (Automatic)
setting has been preselected for the trans- paddle :.
mission is manual mode deactivated when The automatic transmission shifts down to
you change to drive program I. the next gear.
Automatic downshifting occurs when coast-
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S ing.
4MATIC+: you can also preset manual mode for
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
drive program I. To do so, select the M (Manual) engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
setting when configuring the transmission. matic transmission protects against engine
When driving in drive program I, you perma- damage by not shifting down.
nently shift the gears manually using the steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddles.
Gearshift recommendation
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
Driving and parking

an upshift indicator will be shown on the multi-
The gearshift recommendation assists you in function display.
adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The rec-
X When message : appears on the multifunc-
ommended gear is shown on the multifunction
display. tion display, pull the right-hand steering
wheel gearshift paddle.
X When gearshift recommendation : is shown
on the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster, shift to recommended gear ;. Kickdown
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
Protection against reaching the over- accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- X Shift back up once the desired speed is
sion does not shift up automatically even reached.
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to mission shifts up to the next gear when the
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
make sure that the engine speed does not vents the engine from overrevving.
reach the red area of the rev counter. There is Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is possible
otherwise a risk of engine damage. only in the temporary setting.
Z
172 Refuelling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

Driving and parking
is deteriorating. It is possible to shift to a gear and reverse gear only.

The transmission no lon- X Stop.
ger shifts gear.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
If h is selected, the transmission only shifts to one gear; if k is
selected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case Refuelling

This section only applies to vehicles with all- Important safety notes
wheel drive (4MATIC). The front and rear axles
are constantly driven. G WARNING
! Performance tests may only be carried out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
on a two-axle roller dynamometer. Otherwise, incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
the braking system or the transfer case could sion.
be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information on perform- You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating
ance tests. sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni- refuelling.
tion must be switched off (the key or Start/
Stop button must be in position g or 1) if
G WARNING
Rthe electric parking brake is being tested
using a dynamometer Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one There is a danger of injury.
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact
4MATIC). with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel
Otherwise, the brake system can be dam- vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-
aged. dren.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,
the transmission may be damaged.
Refuelling 173
If you or others come into contact with fuel, Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
observe the following: result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a
RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin qualified specialist workshop and have the
with water and soap immediately. fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
oughly with clean water immediately. Seek fuel system.
immediate medical attention. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
Driving and parking

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi- surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
cal attention. Do not induce vomiting. paintwork.
RChange any clothing that has come into ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
contact with fuel immediately. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
G WARNING the fuel can.
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray
thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle.
fire and explosion. Further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 394).
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic Refuelling
charge that may have built up.
General information
Do not get back into the vehicle during the refu-
elling process, otherwise electrostatic charge Observe the important safety notes
could build up again. (Y page 172).
The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is dis-
G WARNING played on the instrument cluster. The arrow next
Vehicles with a diesel engine: to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
cle.
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of
Opening the fuel filler flap
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,
components in the exhaust system may over-
heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
diesel fuel.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained : Opening the fuel filler flap
completely. ; Insert the fuel filler cap
= Tyre pressure table
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a ? Instruction label on the fuel type to be refu-
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if elled
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system.
Z
174 Refuelling
X Switch off the engine. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function out.
or KEYLESS‑GO: Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as the key having been Closing the fuel filler flap
removed.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
Driving and parking
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

clockwise until it engages audibly.
arrow :.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap swings open.
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
remove it. cle.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Fill the tank only until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Refuelling 175
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
There is a risk of fire or explosion.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO:
The vehicle electronics are now in setting u. This is the same as
"key removed".
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
start. dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 l of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 153).
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 153).
X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds
until it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 86).
The key battery is weak or discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 87).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
AdBlue® (BlueTEC vehicles only) When the supply of AdBlue® is down to approx-
imately 5.3 l, the Refill AdBlue See
General notes Owner’s Manual message is shown on the mul-
tifunction display.
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after- If you drive the vehicle at a speed greater than
treatment must be operated with the reducing 15 km/h after topping up, the Refill AdBlue
agent AdBlue®. See Owner’s Manual message disappears
after approximately one minute.
Z
176 Refuelling
When the AdBlue® supply drops to a minimum, If you or others come into contact with AdBlue®,
the Refill AdBlue No start in ... mi observe the following:
message is shown on the multifunction display. Rimmediately rinse AdBlue® off your skin with
When the Refill AdBlue No start in ... soap and water
mi message is shown on the multifunction dis- Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with your eyes,
play, you can still drive the vehicle over the dis-
immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean
tance shown. If AdBlue® is not topped up, you
water and seek medical attention immedi-
will subsequently be unable to start the
ately
engine. If the Refill AdBlue Start not
Driving and parking
Rif AdBlue® is swallowed: immediately rinse

possible message appears on the multifunc-
tion display and the engine no longer starts, you your mouth out thoroughly, drink plenty of
must top up AdBlue®. water, seek medical attention immediately
Rimmediately change out of clothing that has
X Add at least 5.0 l of AdBlue®.
come into contact with AdBlue®
X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
X Start the engine. ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
i You can also have the AdBlue® tank refilled AdBlue®, and do not dilute AdBlue® with
at a qualified specialist workshop. water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust
Before driving your vehicle outside Europe, have gas aftertreatment system.
the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified spe- ! In order to fill the AdBlue® tank, the vehicle
cialist workshop. must be parked on a level surface. The
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas AdBlue® tank can only be filled as intended
aftertreatment and about AdBlue® can with the vehicle parked on a level surface.
be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Fluctuations in capacity will thus be avoided.
Centre. Filling a vehicle standing on an uneven sur-
face is not permitted. There is a danger of
Important safety notes overfilling, which can cause damage to Blue-
TEC exhaust gas aftertreatment components.
AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust ! Surfaces which have come into contact with
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: AdBlue® while refilling should be rinsed
Rnon-toxic immediately with water, or remove AdBlue®
Rcolourless and odourless with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue®
Rnon-flammable has already crystallised, use a sponge and
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of cold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residue
ammonia vapour may be released. crystallises after a certain amount of time and
soils the affected surfaces.
Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are
particularly irritating to the skin, mucous mem- ! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must not
branes and eyes. You may experience a burning be added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue® is added
sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-
may also experience coughing and watery eyes. age.
Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be Have the AdBlue® tank refilled at a qualified
released. Fill the AdBlue® tank only in well-ven- specialist workshop. However, you can also top
tilated areas. up the AdBlue® tank:
Do not swallow AdBlue® or let it come into con-
Rat a filling station with an AdBlue® filling pump
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue®
away from children. Rwith AdBlue® refill bottles
Rwith an AdBlue® refill canister
When the pump nozzle switches off automati-
cally during filling at a filling pump, the AdBlue®
tank has been completely filled. Do not fill the
Refuelling 177
AdBlue® tank any further. AdBlue® may leak

out.
To avoid transporting already opened refill con-
tainers in the vehicle, completely empty refill
bottles or canisters when filling the AdBlue®
tank, if possible.
Further information on AdBlue® (Y page 397).
Driving and parking

Opening/closing the AdBlue® filler cap
X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of

AdBlue® refill canister ;.
X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
AdBlue® refill canister ; and screw it on
clockwise until hand-tight.
Disposable hose : remains closed until you
fasten disposable hose : to the AdBlue®
filler neck of the vehicle.
X To open: switch the ignition off.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings open.
X Turn blue AdBlue® filler cap ; anti-clockwise
and remove it.
AdBlue® filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: fit AdBlue® filler cap ; onto the
filler neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
direction of arrow :. the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-
X Drive at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
able hose : is sufficiently secured.
The Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual
X Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister ;.
message disappears after approximately one
minute. Filling stops when the AdBlue® tank is com-
If the Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual pletely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue® tank any
message continues to be shown on the multi- further. AdBlue® refill canister ; can be
function display, you must top up with more removed when it has been only partially emp-
AdBlue®. tied.
X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
i The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked the vehicle anti-clockwise and remove it.
automatically when you unlock or lock the X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
vehicle.
AdBlue® refill canister ; anti-clockwise and
remove it.
AdBlue® refill canisters X Reseal AdBlue® refill canister ; with the cap.
! Do not tighten the disposable hose too AdBlue® refill canisters are available at many
firmly. The disposable hose could otherwise filling stations or at a qualified specialist work-
be damaged and AdBlue® may leak out.
Z
178 Parking
shop. AdBlue® refill canisters are often sold with no overfill protection. AdBlue® may leak out as a
a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers spe-
the vehicle's AdBlue® tank offers no overfill pro- cial refill bottles with a threaded cap. These are
tection. AdBlue® may leak out as a result of available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers a special dis-
posable hose with overfill protection. You can
obtain this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Parking
Centre. AdBlue® is available in a variety of con-
tainers and receptacles. Use the disposable Important safety notes
Driving and parking
hose with only the Mercedes-Benz AdBlue® refill

canisters. G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
AdBlue® refill bottle twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
! Only screw on the AdBlue® refill bottle so gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
that it is hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread of
the AdBlue® refill bottle could be damaged Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
and AdBlue® could leak out. rial can come into contact with hot vehicle
components. In particular, do not park on dry
grassland or harvested grain fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
Rstart the engine
X Unscrew the protective cap from AdBlue®
refill bottle :. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
X Place AdBlue® refill bottle : on the filler ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
neck as shown and screw it on clockwise until an accident and injury.
hand-tight. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
X Press AdBlue® refill bottle : towards the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
filler neck. children unattended in the vehicle.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This could take up
to one minute. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
When AdBlue® refill bottle : is no longer rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be etrain could be damaged.
removed again after being only partially emp- To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded
tied. against rolling away unintentionally:
X Release AdBlue® refill bottle :.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied
X Turn AdBlue® refill bottle : anti-clockwise
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
and remove it. the key must be removed
X Screw the protective cap onto AdBlue® refill Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
bottle : again. kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
AdBlue® refill bottles are available at many fill-
ing stations or at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Refill bottles without a threaded seal offer
Parking 179
Ran empty vehicle must be secured at the front cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
axle with a wheel chock or similar object, for towing system:
example, on uphill or downhill gradients X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
Ron uphill or downhill gradients a laden vehicle GO start function: remove the Start/Stop
must also be secured at the rear axle with a button from the ignition lock.
wheel chock or similar object, for example X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
Switching off the engine
Driving and parking

depressed.
Important safety notes X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
G WARNING X Release the electric parking brake.
The automatic transmission switches to neu- X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
tral position N when you switch off the engine. ignition lock.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
accident. is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
After switching off the engine, always switch Stop button for about three seconds. This func-
tion operates independently of the ECO start/
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- stop automatic engine switch-off function.
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Electric parking brake
Vehicles with automatic transmission
General notes
X Shift the transmission to position j. G WARNING
X With the key: turn the key to position u in If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
the ignition lock and remove it. cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
The immobiliser is activated. motion if, for example, they:
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Rrelease the parking brake
Start/Stop button (Y page 154).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
on the instrument cluster go out. position P
When the driver's door is closed, this corre- Rstart the engine
sponds to key position 1. When the driver's
door is open, this corresponds to key position In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
u, "key removed". ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- an accident and injury.
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans- When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
mission shifts to i automatically. with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
With the key: if you then open the driver's door children unattended in the vehicle.
or the front-passenger door or remove the key
from the ignition, the automatic transmission The function of the electric parking brake is
shifts to j automatically. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open board voltage is low or the system is malfunc-
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, tioning, it may not be possible to apply the
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto- released parking brake.
matically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
Z
180 Parking
X If this is the case, park the vehicle on level The electric parking brake is also applied auto-
ground only and secure it to prevent it from matically if:
rolling away. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
X Shift the transmission to position j. to a standstill or
It may not be possible to release an applied Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if tionary or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
qualified specialist workshop. In addition, at least one of the following condi-
Driving and parking
The electric parking brake carries out a function tions must be fulfilled:
check at regular intervals when the engine is
Rthe engine is switched off
switched off. Noises that occur are normal.
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
Applying or releasing manually driver's door is opened

Rthere is a system malfunction
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake of your vehicle is
released automatically when all the following
conditions are fulfilled:
Rthe seat belt is fastened
X To apply: push handle :.
Rthe engine is running
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red ! indicator lamp lights up on the Rthe transmission is in position h or k and
instrument cluster. you accelerate
The electric parking brake can also be applied or
when the key is removed. you shift the transmission position from j to
X To release: pull handle :. position h or k, you will need to accelerate
more on steeper gradients
The red ! indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster goes out. If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate
must be closed.
The electric parking brake can be released only:
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
Rif the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition conditions must be fulfilled for the electric park-
lock (Y page 153) or ing brake to be released automatically:
Rif the ignition was switched on using the Rthe driver's door is closed
Start/Stop button Ryou are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds
Applying automatically greater than 3 km/h
The electric parking brake is automatically Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
applied when the transmission is in position j pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking
and: brake will be released and the vehicle will start
to move.
Rthe engine is switched off or
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
automatically applied, pull handle :.
Driving tips 181
Emergency braking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- of an accident.
gency by using the electric parking brake. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
X While driving, push handle : of the electrical
parking brake (Y page 180). Drive sensibly – save fuel
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
handle : of the electric parking brake Observe the following tips to save fuel:
depressed. The longer electric parking brake X The tyres should always be inflated to the rec-
Driving and parking

handle : is depressed, the greater the brak- ommended tyre pressure.
ing force.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
During braking: X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
Ra warning tone sounds X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Rthe Release parking brake display mes- X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
sage appears X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Rthe red ! indicator lamp on the instrument indicated by the service intervals in the Ser-
cluster flashes vice Booklet or by the service interval display.
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
still, the electric parking brake is applied. cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short jour-
neys and in hilly terrain.
Parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than ECO display
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by The ECO display shows you how economical
exhaustive discharging. your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than in achieving the most economical driving style
six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and tions. Consumption can be significantly influ-
seek advice. enced by your driving style.
i You can obtain information on trickle charg-

ers from a qualified specialist workshop.
in the supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognise dangers.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes : Acceleration
; Coasting
G WARNING = Constant
If you switch off the ignition while driving, ? Additional range achieved
safety-relevant functions are only available Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. start and
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, represents the additional range achieved since
for example, the power steering and the brake the beginning of the journey as a result of an
boosting effect. You will require considerably adapted driving style.
Z
182 Driving tips
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
range, the Reserve fuel display message is tions. The ECO display border lights up.
shown instead of range ? on the multifunction The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
display. In addition, warning lamp 8 on the consumption. The additionally achieved range
instrument cluster lights up (Y page 304). displayed under Bonus fr. start does not
The ECO display consists of three sections, with indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
an inner and outer area. The sections corre- In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
spond to the following three categories: tion is affected by other factors, such as:
Driving and parking
: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel- Rload

eration processes): Rtyre pressure
RThe outer area fills up and the inner Rcold start

area lights up green: moderate Rchoice of route
acceleration, especially at higher Rthe use of electrical consumers
speeds. These factors are not included on the ECO dis-
RThe outer area empties and the play.
inner area is grey: sporty acceler- An economical driving style involves driving at a
ation. moderate engine speed.
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera- To achieve a higher value in the categories
tion processes): "Acceleration" and "Constant":
RThe outer area fills up and the inner Robserve the gearshift recommendation.
area lights up green: anticipatory Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E
driving, keeping your distance and On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
early release of the accelerator. motorway, only the outer area for "Constant"
The vehicle can coast without use will change.
of the brakes.
The ECO display summarises the driving style
RThe outer area empties and the from the start of the journey to its completion.
inner area is grey: frequent heavy Therefore, there are more marked changes in
braking. the outer areas at the start of a journey. During
= Constant (continuous evaluation a prolonged driving time, these changes are
over the entire journey): smaller. For more marked changes, perform a
manual reset (Y page 251).
RThe outer area fills up and the inner
Further information on the ECO display
area lights up green: constant (Y page 250).
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and decelera-
tion.
RThe outer area empties and the
Brakes
inner area is grey: fluctuations in Important safety notes
speed.
G WARNING
The three inner areas display the current driving If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
style and light up green as a result of a particu- an attempt to increase the engine's braking
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
simultaneously. This increases the risk of skidding and having
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer an accident.
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco- Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more ing on a slippery road surface.
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
Driving tips 183
Downhill gradients the traffic conditions. This will warm up the

brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
Shift to a lower gear in good time on long and and protecting them against corrosion.
steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of
this when driving a laden vehicle and when tow-
ing a trailer. Limited braking performance on salt-
This also applies when cruise control, Distance
treated roads
Pilot DISTRONIC or the speed limiter are acti- If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt
vated. may form on the brake discs and pads. This can
Driving and parking

This will use the braking effect of the engine, so increase the braking distance considerably.
less braking will be required to maintain the RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brakes occasionally while paying attention to
brake system and prevents the brakes from the traffic conditions.
overheating and wearing too quickly. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
Heavy and light loads journey.
RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehi-
G WARNING cle in front.
The braking system can overheat if you leave
your foot on the brake pedal while driving. New brake discs and brake pads/
This increases the braking distance and could linings
even cause the braking system to fail. There is
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new
or have been replaced achieve optimum braking
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do effect only after several hundred kilometres of
not simultaneously depress both the brake driving. Compensate for the reduced braking
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. effect by applying greater force to the brake
pedal.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
results in excessive and premature wear to mends only fitting the following brake discs and
the brake pads. brake pads/linings:
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do Rbrake discs that have been approved by
not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a Mercedes-Benz
short while. This allows the airflow to cool the Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved
brakes more quickly. by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent
If the brakes have been used only moderately, standard of quality
you should occasionally test their effectiveness. Other brake discs or brake pads/linings can
To do this, brake more firmly from a higher compromise the safety of your vehicle.
speed while paying attention to the traffic con- Always replace all brake discs and brake pads/
ditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. linings on an axle at the same time. Always fit
new brake pads/linings when replacing brake
Wet road surfaces discs.
The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
discs to which the wheel assembly with rim and
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
threaded connection is matched.
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after a car wash or The use of brake discs other than those
after driving through deep water. approved by Mercedes-Benz may alter track
width and is subject to approval, if applicable.
You will have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle Shock-type loads when handling the brake
in front. discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead
to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
Z
184 Driving tips
the lightweight brake discs, particularly on the G DANGER

brake plate.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Driving on wet roads such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Aquaplaning becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
Driving and parking
the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplan- If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
ing occurring, even if: running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
Ryou are driving at low speeds around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
For this reason, drive in the following manner in window on the side of the vehicle that is not
the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which facing into the wind.
aquaplaning can occur:
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
Rlower your speed
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Ravoid tyre ruts
You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
Ravoid sudden steering movements pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration,
Rbrake carefully steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use
cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Driving on flooded roads If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front
X Shift the transmission to position i.
or in the opposite direction create waves. This
may cause the maximum permissible water X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using
depth to be exceeded. corrective steering.
These notes must be observed under all cir- The outside temperature indicator is not
cumstances. You could otherwise damage designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
the engine, the electronics or the transmis- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
sion. Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
If you must drive on stretches of road on which played after a short delay.
water has collected, please bear in mind that: Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
Rin the case of standing water, the water level
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
must be no higher than the lower edge of the wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
vehicle body skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always
Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to
suit the prevailing weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
Winter driving tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
G WARNING Further information on driving with snow chains,
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in see (Y page 379).
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Further information on driving with summer
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. tyres (Y page 378).
This increases the risk of skidding and having Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
an accident. tion (Y page 378).
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving tips 185
Off-road driving stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions. In such
Important safety notes cases, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G WARNING The vehicle is only designed for easily negotiable
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or off-road terrain and poor road surfaces.
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in
Driving and parking

an accident.
braking performance or total brake failure as a
When driving on an incline, drive into the line result of increased wear. The braking charac-
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight teristics will vary depending on the substances
line) and do not turn. that get into the brakes. Clean the brakes after
driving off-road. If you notice grinding noises or
G WARNING a reduction in braking performance, have the
brake system checked at a qualified specialist
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or workshop immediately. Adapt your driving style
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with to the altered braking characteristics.
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk Driving off-road increases the possibility of dam-
of fire. age to the vehicle, which may cause assemblies
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, or systems to fail. Adapt your driving style to the
conditions of the terrain. Drive carefully. Have
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
vehicle damage rectified immediately at a quali-
particular, remove parts of plants or other fied specialist workshop.
flammable materials which have become Do not shift into transmission position i when
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a driving off-road. You could lose control of the
qualified specialist workshop. vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: your vehicle, back up in reverse gear.
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
kerb or an unpaved road General notes
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g.
a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pothole in H Environmental note
the road Protection of the environment is of primary
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or importance. Treat nature with respect.
parts of the chassis Observe all prohibiting signs.
In situations like this, the body, underbody,
chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be dam- Read this section before driving your vehicle off-
aged without the damage being visible. Com- road.
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect- Off-road driving is possible only with the Off-
edly fail or, in the case of an accident, no lon- Road Engineering package (Y page 202).
ger withstand the strain they are designed to The following driving systems are specially
withstand. adapted for driving over easily negotiable off-
If the underbody panelling is damaged, com- road terrain:
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or ROff-road program (Y page 202)
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody panelling. If these materials ROff-road ABS (Y page 73)
come into contact with hot parts of the ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 76)
exhaust system, they can catch fire. ROff-road ESP® (Y page 79)
In such situations, have the vehicle checked RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- (Y page 201)
cialist workshop. If, on continuing your jour-
ney, you notice that driving safety is impaired,
Z
186 Driving tips
Observe the following notes: bead. Before driving off-road, check the
RStop the vehicle before driving off-road. If wheels and replace them if necessary.
necessary, activate the off-road program
(Y page 202). Checklist after off-road driving
RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, ensure suffi-
cient ground clearance at all times. ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
RMake sure that items of luggage and loads are
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
stowed safely and are well secured
shop.
Driving and parking
(Y page 329).
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear X Deactivate the off-road program
when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate (Y page 202).
DSR (Y page 201). X Deactivate DSR (Y page 201).
RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at walk- X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
ing pace. check for damage.
REnsure that the wheels are in contact with the X Clean the front and rear licence plates.
ground at all times. X Clean the wheels/tyres with a water jet and
RDrive with extreme care on unknown off-road remove any foreign objects.
routes where visibility is poor. For safety rea- X Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the vehi-
sons, get out of the vehicle first and survey cle underside with a water jet; check for any
the off-road route. foreign objects and damage.
RCheck the depth of water before fording rivers X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants
and streams. have become trapped. These increase the risk
RWatch out for obstacles. of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake
RTake care when turning on an uphill or down- hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints
hill slope or when driving across a slope. The and propeller shafts.
vehicle could otherwise tip over. X After the trip, examine without fail the entire
RAlways keep the side windows and the pano- undercarriage, wheels, tyres, brakes, body-
rama sliding sunroof closed during the jour- work structure, steering, chassis and exhaust
ney. system for damage.
RDo not deviate from marked routes. X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water or
similar dirty conditions, have the following
Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-
checked and cleaned:
road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on
slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function Rbrake discs
cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces. Rwheels
Rbrake pads
Checklist before off-road driving Raxle joints
X If you detect strong vibrations after driving
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and top
off-road, check for foreign objects in the
it up if necessary.
wheels and drive train and remove them if
When driving on steep gradients, the oil level necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
must be sufficiently high to ensure a correct balance and cause vibrations.
oil supply in the vehicle.
Driving over poor road surfaces places greater
X Wheels and tyres: check the tyre tread
demands on your vehicle than driving on normal
depth and tyre pressure. roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign This allows you to detect damage promptly and
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/ reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and
tyres. other road users.
X Replace any missing valve caps.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X Wheels: dented or bent wheels can lead to a
loss of tyre pressure and damage to the tyre
Driving tips 187
Driving on sand RObserve the warnings for off-road driving

(Y page 185).
Observe the following rules when driving on RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes
sand: and steep inclines.
RSelect the off-road program (Y page 202). RBefore driving on extreme uphill and extreme
RAvoid high engine speeds. downhill gradients, select the off-road pro-
RUse the left-hand steering wheel gearshift gram (Y page 202).
paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate to RDrive slowly.
the terrain.
Driving and parking

RAccelerate gently and make sure that the
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist- wheels are gripping.
ance. Otherwise, the vehicle could dig itself RAvoid high engine speeds, except when driv-
into the sand. ing on sandy and muddy routes with high driv-
RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi- ing resistance.
ble. Make sure that: RUse the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
- the tyre ruts are not too deep paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
- the sand is firm enough the gradient.
- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear- RUse the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to a
ance lower gear on long and steep downhill gradi-
ents.
Tyre ruts and unpaved roads Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on
a hill. Further information on hill start assist
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and (Y page 156).
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. Do not shift into transmission position i when
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or driving off-road. You could lose control of the
bottom out and get stuck. vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using
Observe the following rules when driving along the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for
ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose your vehicle, back up in reverse gear.
gravel: Always observe the approach/departure angle
RActivate the off-road program (Y page 202).
values (Y page 402).
RAvoid high engine speeds.
Maximum gradient-climbing ability
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddle. Always observe the maximum gradient climbing
RDrive slowly. ability values (Y page 402).
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the
wheels on one side on the middle section of Hilltops
turf if possible.
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
Travelling uphill the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the
brow.
Approach/departure angle
This style of driving prevents:
G WARNING Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or brow of a hill
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip Rthe vehicle from travelling too quickly down
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of the other side
an accident.
When driving on an incline, drive into the line
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight
line) and do not turn.
Z
188 Driving systems
Driving downhill vehicle and when towing a trailer. By doing so,

you will make use of the braking effect of the
RDrive slowly. engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines. tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the and wearing too quickly.
front wheels aligned straight forwards. Oth- Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip ditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady
and overturn. speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, use road speed above 30 km/h. If you have set a
Driving and parking
the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle permanent limit speed, you cannot set the
to shift to a lower gear. speed any higher than the fixed limit speed
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake (Y page 191).
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of Important safety notes
fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an
after a long downhill stretch. accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. Cruise control can-
Off-road ABS is activated when the off-road pro- not take into account road, weather or traffic
gram is selected. conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are
At speeds below 30 km/h the front wheels lock responsible for maintaining a safe distance from
cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
achieved in the process reduces the stopping ing in good time and for staying in lane.
distance during off-road driving. The steerability Do not use cruise control:
of the vehicle is considerably reduced if the
wheels lock. Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allow
you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads.
Driving systems Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accel-
erating can cause the drive wheels to lose
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- heavy rain or snow.
vative driver assistance and safety systems
which enhance comfort and support the driver in If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- driver of the speed stored.
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile- i The speed indicated in the speedometer
stone on the path towards autonomous driving. may differ slightly from the speed stored.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well Cruise control lever
thought-out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 72).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. Shift to a lower gear in
good time on long and steep downhill gradients. : Store the current speed or a higher speed
Take particular note of this when driving a laden ; LIM indicator lamp
Driving systems 189
= Stores the current speed or recalls the last Storing the current speed or calling up
stored speed the last stored speed
? Stores the current speed or a lower speed
A Switches between cruise control and the G WARNING
variable speed limiter If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
B Deactivates cruise control than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
You can operate cruise control and the variable ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
speed limiter with the cruise control lever. vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
Driving and parking

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control is a risk of an accident.
lever indicates which system you have selected: Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
selected do not know the stored speed, store the
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable limiter is desired speed again.
selected
When you activate cruise control, the stored X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
speed is shown on the multifunction display for you =.
five seconds. The é symbol appears on the X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
multifunction display. The first time cruise control is activated, it
Speedometer with segments: when cruise stores the current speed or regulates the
control is activated, the segments of the stored speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed to the end of the scale or to a permanently speed.
set speed limit light up.
Setting a speed
Selecting cruise control
Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
If it is off, cruise control is already selected. the set speed.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
direction of arrow A. higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Storing and maintaining the current The new speed is stored.
speed X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
You can store the current speed if you are driv- up : or down ? to the pressure point.
ing at a speed greater than 30 km/h. The last stored speed increases or decreases
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. in 1 km/h increments.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-
down ?. ments: briefly press the cruise control lever
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. up : or down ? beyond the pressure point.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- The last stored speed increases or decreases
matically maintains the speed. in 10 km/h increments.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the
stored speed is resumed when the gradient vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after
evens out. Cruise control maintains the you have finished overtaking.
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically braking the vehicle.
Z
190 Driving systems
Deactivating cruise control responsible for maintaining a safe distance from

the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- ing in good time and for staying in lane.
trol: If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards of the speed stored.
B. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed:
or
RVariable for the prescribed maximum per-
X Brake.
missible speeds, e.g. in built-up areas
or
Driving and parking
RPermanent for the permanent restriction of

X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the the maximum permissible speed, e.g. when
direction of arrow A. driving on winter tyres (Y page 191)
The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator The speed shown on the speedometer may dif-
lamp ; on the cruise control lever is on. fer slightly from the stored speed limit.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou apply the electric parking brake Variable speed limiter
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
General notes
Ryou shift the transmission to position i
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone
sounds. You will see the Cruise control off
message on the multifunction display for
approximately five seconds. The message on
the multifunction display disappears and the
segments on the speedometer go out.
i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
: To store the current speed or a higher speed

Speed limiter ; LIM indicator lamp
= Stores the current speed or recalls the last
General notes stored speed
The speed limiter is used to set a speed limit for ? Stores the current speed or a lower speed
your vehicle. If the vehicle speed exceeds the A Switches between cruise control or Dis-
set speed limit, the speed limiter brakes auto- tance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable
matically. Shift to a lower gear in good time on speed limiter
long and steep downhill gradients. Take partic- B Switches off the variable speed limiter
ular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and
when towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make With the cruise control lever, you can operate
use of the braking effect of the engine. This cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and
relieves the load on the brake system and pre- the variable speed limiter.
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
too quickly. lever indicates which system you have selected:
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or Dis-
Important safety notes tance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable limiter is
The speed limiter can neither reduce the risk of selected
an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style
nor override the laws of physics. The limiter can- You can use the cruise control lever to limit the
not take into account road, weather or traffic speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the
conditions. The limiter is only an aid. You are engine is running. If you have set a permanent
Driving systems 191
limit speed, you cannot set the speed any higher set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a
than the fixed limit speed (Y page 191). higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
Selecting the variable speed limiter X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
up : to the pressure point for a higher speed
driver of the limit speed stored.
or down ? for a lower speed.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
or
If it is on, the variable speed limiter is already X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
selected.
Driving and parking

pressure point until the desired speed is set.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the Press the cruise control lever up : for a
direction of arrow A. higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control
lever is on. The variable limiter is selected. Switching the speed limiter to passive
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Storing the current speed point of resistance (kickdown), the speed limiter
You can use the cruise control lever to limit the switches to passive mode. The multifunction
speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the display shows the Limiter passive message
engine is running. and you are able to exceed the stored speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or When the speed limiter is switched to passive
down ?. mode, the speed limiter does not brake auto-
The current speed is stored and shown on the matically until it is reactivated.
multifunction display. The speed limiter is reactivated again if you:
Speedometer with segments: the seg- Rdrive at less than the stored speed without
ments light up from the start of the scale up to kickdown
the stored speed limit. Rset a new speed or
Rcall up the last speed stored again
Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed The Limiter passive message then disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
Switching off the variable speed limiter
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- You cannot switch the variable speed limiter off
by braking.
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There There are several ways to deactivate the varia-
ble speed limiter:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
B.
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
or
do not know the stored speed, store the
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
desired speed again.
direction of arrow A.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
selected. LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise
you =.
control lever goes out.
Setting a speed The last speed stored is cleared when you
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre- switch off the engine.
up : beyond the pressure point for a higher Permanent limiter
speed, or down ? for a lower speed.
You can use the on-board computer to limit the
or speed permanently to a value between
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond 160 km/h (e.g. when driving on winter tyres)
the pressure point until the desired speed is and 240 km/h(Y page 261).
Z
192 Driving systems
Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
appears on the multifunction display. neither give warnings nor intervene in such
The permanent speed limiter remains active situations. There is a risk of an accident.
even if the variable speed limiter is deactivated.
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the uation and be ready to brake.
pressure point (kickdown).
G WARNING
Driving and parking
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC clearly identify other road users and complex
traffic situations.
General notes
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed
and automatically helps you maintain the dis- Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles brake the vehicle
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor Rneither give a warning nor intervene
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
Shift to a lower gear in good time on long and There is a risk of an accident.
steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
you will make use of the braking effect of the warns you.
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. G WARNING
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle
a risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, you with up to 50% of the maximum possible
will be warned visually and audibly. Without your deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-
intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you
prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone
will then sound and the distance warning lamp with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a
will light up on the instrument cluster. Brake risk of an accident.
immediately to increase the distance to the Apply the brakes yourself in these situations
vehicle in front, or take evasive action, provided and try to take evasive action.
it is safe to do so.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. HOLD function are activated, the vehicle
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv- brakes automatically in certain situations.
ing on roads with steep gradients. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
Important safety notes uations:
Rwhen towing away
G WARNING Rin a car wash
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not recognise
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce
Rpeople or animals the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your
Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
driving style nor override the laws of physics.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
or parked vehicles account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-
Roncoming vehicles or crossing traffic tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for maintaining a safe distance from
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
ing in good time and for staying in lane.
Driving systems 193
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: ? Activates the current speed/last stored
Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allow speed
you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in A Activates or reduces the speed
heavy traffic or on winding roads B Switches between Distance Pilot
Ron icy or slippery roads, braking or accelerat- DISTRONIC and the variable speed limiter
ing can cause the drive wheels to lose traction C Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
and the vehicle could then skid With the cruise control lever, you can operate
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or the variable speed limiter and Distance Pilot
Driving and parking

snow DISTRONIC.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar- LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or indicates which function you have selected:
vehicles driving on a different line.
RLIM indicator lamp = lights up: variable
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired in the following situations: limiter is selected.
RLIM indicator lamp = off: distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is selected.
Rsnow or heavy rain
When you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
Rinterference by other radar sources the stored speed will appear on the multi-
Rstrong radar reflections for example, in multifunction display for five seconds.
storey car parks Speedometer with segments: when Dis-
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a tance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, the seg-
vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may ments of the stored speed light up to the end
unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. of the scale or to a permanently set speed
This speed can: limit.
Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
Selecting Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
cles driving on the left (in countries where X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
traffic drives on the right) If it is off, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is already
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi- selected.
cles driving on the right (in countries where X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the
people drive on the left) direction of arrow B.
If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control
of the speed stored. lever goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
selected.
Cruise control lever
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be running, it may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is ready for use
Rthe electric parking brake must be released,
RESP® must be switched on, but must not cur-
rently engage
: Activates or increases the speed RParking Pilot must not be activated
; Sets the specified minimum distance Rthe transmission must be in position h

= LIM indicator lamp
Z
194 Driving systems
Rthe driver's door must be closed or your seat X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
belt must be fastened when you shift the you ?.
transmission from position j to h X Release the accelerator pedal.
Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
must be closed activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
Rin vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-
package, DSR and the off-road program Gra- ously stored speed.
dient must not be switched on
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Driving and parking
Rthe vehicle must not slip

Rthe Distance Pilot DISTRONIC function must
be selected (Y page 193) Pulling away and driving
X To pull away with Distance Pilot
Activating DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards pedal.
you ?, up : or down A . X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. you ?.
X Release the accelerator pedal.
or
The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
X Accelerate briefly.
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed as a maximum. The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to
that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
If you do not fully release the accelerator detected in front, the vehicle accelerates to
pedal, the Distance Pilot passive mes- the set speed.
sage appears on the multifunction display.
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
front will then not be maintained. The position an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
of the accelerator pedal will determine the ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
speed. brakes automatically.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not detect a
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be vehicle in front, the system operates like cruise
set is 30 km/h. control.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes the
you ?, up : or down A . vehicle. In this way, the specified minimum dis-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. tance you have selected is maintained.
Activating at the current speed/last If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
stored speed
speed to the set speed.
G WARNING
Selecting the drive program
If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty
ferent from the current speed, the vehicle driving style when you have selected the S or S+
accelerates or brakes. If you do not know drive program (Y page 167). Acceleration
what the stored speed is, the vehicle may behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is
accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a then noticeably more dynamic. If you have
risk of an accident. selected the C or E drive program, the vehicle
Take the traffic conditions into account accelerates more gently. This setting is recom-
mended in stop-start traffic.
before calling up the stored speed. If you do
not know what the stored speed is, store the
desired speed again.
Driving systems 195
Changing lanes not accelerate. This is based on the current map

If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance data in the navigation system.
Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if: Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the
speed you set.
Ryou are driving at a speed greater than
70 km/h The system takes into account the fact that
overtaking on the right is not permitted on
Ryou switch on the respective turn signal
motorways or high-speed major roads at speeds
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently of more than 80 km/h. The driving speed is
detect a danger of collision adjusted to the speed of the queue of vehicles in
Driving and parking

If these conditions are met, your vehicle accel- the adjacent lane to the left.
erates. Acceleration will be interrupted if chang- Prevention of overtaking on the right applies to
ing lanes takes too long or if the distance countries where traffic drives on the right. In
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front countries where traffic drives on the left, over-
becomes too small. taking on the left is prevented accordingly.
Vehicles with COMAND Online multimedia
system: when you change lanes, Distance Pilot Stopping
DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in left-side G WARNING
traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traffic).
Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia system: If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
when you change lanes, Distance Pilot braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could
DISTRONIC monitors the left lane on left-hand- roll away if:
drive vehicles or the right lane on right-hand- Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
drive vehicles.
the voltage supply.
Road and traffic conditions RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
pered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
The following function is available only in vehi- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the
cles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. vehicle against rolling away.
The function is not operational in all countries.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses additional infor- Further information on deactivating Distance
mation from your navigation system so that it Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 197).
can adapt to certain traffic situations. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
This is the case if, while following a vehicle, Dis- vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
tance Pilot DISTRONIC is active and you: to a stop.
Rapproach or drive around a roundabout
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
Rapproach a T-junction
brake.
Rturn off at a motorway exit
After a short period, the vehicle is secured by
Rapproach a tollgate the electric parking brake, thus relieving the
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection service brake.
range, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC temporarily Depending on the specified minimum distance,
maintains the current driving speed and does your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
Z
196 Driving systems
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The can see this distance on the multifunction dis-
specified minimum distance is set using the play (Y page 197).
control on the cruise control lever. Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis-
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.
the transmission shifts automatically to position Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec-
j if: essary.
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open
Driving and parking
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system fault occurs
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also be shifted to position j automatically. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
Setting a speed greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X Push the cruise control lever upwards : for a
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
higher speed or down A for a lower speed.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the
shorter distance between your vehicle and
desired speed is reached. the vehicle in front.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is activated and adjusts the vehi- Displays on the instrument cluster
cle's speed to the new speed stored.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
Displays on the speedometer
up : or down A to the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h incre-
up : or down A beyond the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 10 km/h increments.
i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over-
taking. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front, the segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front : and the stored speed ; light
Setting the specified minimum distance up.
You can set the specified minimum distance for Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time package: the segments likewise light up if a
span between one and two seconds. With this vehicle in front is detected in the overtaking
function, you can set the minimum distance that lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
cle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. You
Driving systems 197
For design reasons, the speed displayed on the Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
speedometer may differ slightly from the speed
set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Displays on the assistant display
Driving and parking

There are several ways to deactivate Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly push the cruise control lever forwards
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC =.
is deactivated or
: Vehicle in front, if detected X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
; Distance indicator: current distance to the or
vehicle in front
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in the
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
direction of arrow ;.
in front; adjustable
The speed limiter is selected. LIM indicator
? Own vehicle lamp : on the cruise control lever lights up.
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot off message will appear
on the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
The last speed stored remains stored until you
switch off the engine.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated if
you depress the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
Ryou apply the electric parking brake or the
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
is activated tric parking brake
: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
appears when the cruise control lever is Ryou shift the transmission to position j, k
actuated) or i
; Vehicle in front, if detected Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in order to pull away and the front-passenger
in front; adjustable door or one of the rear doors is open
? Own vehicle Rthe vehicle skids
X To call up the assistant display: select the Ryou activate Parking Pilot
Assistance graphic function via the on- If, in these cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
board computer (Y page 256). deactivated, a warning tone sounds. The Dis‐
The multifunction display shows the stored tance Pilot off message will then be shown
speed for approximately five seconds when on the multifunction display for approximately
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. five seconds.
Z
198 Driving systems
Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering
package: if you switch on DSR or the Gradient Pilot
off-road program, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
automatically switches off without advance General notes
warning. In this case, the DSR symbol Ã
(Y page 201) appears on the assistant display.
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC
Driving and parking
Pay particular attention in the following traffic

situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles driving in Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
a different lane. The distance to the vehicle in aids you in keeping the vehicle in the middle of
front will be too short. the lane by means of moderate steering inter-
ventions in a speed range from 0–200 km/h.
ROther vehicles changing lane: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut- It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be means of multifunction camera :, at the top of
too short. the windscreen.
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
In a speed range from 0–60 km/h, Steering Pilot
does not detect the vehicle in front on the focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into
edge of the carriageway because of its narrow account lane markings, e.g. when following vehi-
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will cles in a traffic jam.
be too short. At speeds of more than 60 km/h, Steering Pilot
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
focuses on detected lane markings (left and
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles right), focusing on the vehicle in front only if
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected lane markings are not present.
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta- If these conditions are not present, Steering
cle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Distance Pilot cannot provide assistance.
Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in
RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC order for the function to be available.
may mistakenly detect vehicles that are
crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot Important safety notes
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail
pull away at the wrong time. to adapt your driving style nor override the laws
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Pilot DISTRONIC is then switched off. Steering Pilot cannot take into account road,
weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an aid.
You are responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
does not detect road and traffic conditions and
does not detect all road users. If you are follow-
ing a vehicle that is driving towards the edge of
the carriageway, your vehicle could come into
Driving systems 199
contact with the kerb or other road boundaries. Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. Ron very sharp corners
cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.
Rwhen you are towing a trailer
Obstacles such as traffic markers on a con-
Rwhen a loss of tyre pressure or a defective
struction site that are on the lane or projecting
out into the lane are not detected. tyre has been detected and displayed
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after Also observe the important safety notes on Dis-
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be tance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 192).
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the The steering interventions are carried out with a
Driving and parking

opposite direction. limited steering moment. The system requires
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot the driver to keep his hands on the steering
cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In wheel and to steer himself.
some cases, the steering intervention is not suf- If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
ficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself period of time, the system will first alert you with
to ensure that it does not leave the lane. a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
The system may be impaired or may not function appears on the multifunction display. If you have
in the following situations: still not started to steer and have not taken hold
of the steering wheel, a warning tone also
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi- sounds to remind you to take control of the
nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or vehicle after five seconds at the latest. Steering
spray Pilot is then switched to passive. Distance Pilot
Rglare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or DISTRONIC remains active.
reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road
surface is wet) Activating Steering Pilot
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no lane markings, or several unclear
lane markings for one lane are present, e.g.
around construction sites
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge X Press button ;.
Rthe road is narrow and winding Indicator lamp : lights up. The Steering
Pilot On message appears on the multifunc-
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
tion display. Steering Pilot is activated.
the road surface
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if:
Ryou actively change lane
Ryou switch on the turn signal
Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or
do not steer for a prolonged period of time
After you have finished changing lanes, Steering
Pilot is automatically active once more.
Z
200 Driving systems
Information on the multifunction display Important safety notes

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply
Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the
Driving and parking
accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by

a vehicle occupant
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a
pered with
steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :
appears in grey. If the system provides you with Rthe battery is disconnected
support by means of steering interventions, There is a risk of an accident.
symbol : is shown in green.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
Deactivating Steering Pilot the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
X Press button ;. from rolling away.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Steering
Pilot Off message appears on the multi- ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
function display. Steering Pilot is deactivated. tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing away
HOLD function Rin a car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 201).

General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the Activation conditions
following situations:
You can activate the HOLD function if all the fol-
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
lowing conditions are fulfilled:
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Rthe engine is running or it has been automat-
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver ically switched off by the ECO start/stop
having to depress the brake pedal. function
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
function deactivated when you depress the fastened
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Rthe electric parking brake is released
Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Driving systems 201
Activating the HOLD function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated,
the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system fault occurs
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also be shifted to position j automatically.
Driving and parking

DSR
General notes
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is an aid to
X Make sure that the activation conditions are assist you when driving downhill that is available
met. only in vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering
X Depress the brake pedal. package.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further It keeps the speed of travel at the speed selec-
until : appears on the multifunction display. ted on the on-board computer. The steeper the
The HOLD function is activated. You can downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking
release the brake pedal. effect on the vehicle. On flat stretches of road
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does and uphill gradients, the DSR braking effect is
not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and minimal or non-existent.
then try again. DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
vated and the transmission is in position h, k
Deactivating the HOLD function or i. By accelerating or braking, you can
always drive at a higher or a lower speed than
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically that set on the on-board computer.
if:
Ryou depress the accelerator and the trans- Important safety notes
mission is in position h or k
Rthe transmission is in position j G WARNING
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
tain amount of pressure until display ë and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
disappears from the multifunction display face, the wheels may lose traction. This
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park- increases the risk of skidding and having an
ing brake accident.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS
Before switching DSR on, please take into
After a short period, the vehicle is secured by consideration the road surface and the differ-
the electric parking brake, thus relieving the
ence between driving speed and the set
service brake.
speed.
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is shifted automatically to position j
DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident if
if:
you fail to adapt your driving style nor override
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of
driver's door is open road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehi-
function cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in lane.
You are always responsible for keeping control
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
Z
202 Driving systems
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not Display on the assistant display
always be able to keep to the set speed, depend-
ing on road surface and tyre conditions. Select a
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 185).
Activating/deactivating DSR
Driving and parking
If you activate DSR and no speed has been set,

the vehicle decelerates to 6 km/h.
You can activate DSR only when driving at
speeds below 40 km/h.
X Select the Assistance graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 256).
When DSR is activated symbol : appears on
the assistant display.
Changing the set speed while the vehi-

cle is in motion
X To switch on: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The status indicator on the multifunction dis-
play shows e.g. DSR 6 km/h.
km/h
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR
symbol appears on the multifunction display
with the Max. speed 40 km/h message.
message
If you enter or exit a parking space using Parking When DSR is activated, you can change the set
Pilot and press button :, indicator lamp ; speed to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h
flashes. DSR can then not be switched on. while the vehicle is in motion.
X To switch off: press button :. X To increase or reduce the set speed in
Indicator lamp ; goes out. 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise
The DSR symbol appears on the multifunction control lever to the pressure point, up : for a
display with the off message. higher or down ; for a lower set speed.
The multifunction display shows the set value
DSR switches off automatically if you drive at in the status indicator.
speeds greater than 45 km/h. The DSR symbol
appears on the multifunction display with the
off message. A warning tone also sounds.
Off-road program
General notes
The additional off-road programs for driving off-
road are available only in vehicles with the Off-
Road Engineering package.
Driving systems 203
Use the off-road program button to open the off- The Slippery off-road program has the following
road menu on the multimedia system. characteristics:
Depending on the off-road program selected, Rthe steering, drive, transmission and suspen-
the following vehicle characteristics will change: sion are adapted for comfort
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- Rvehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: the
ment) vehicle is adjusted to normal level
RVehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: the sus- Rthe ECO start/stop function is available
pension (Y page 157).
Driving and parking

Rthe steering ESP® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function slippery surfaces are also activated for maxi-
You can choose between the pre-configured off- mum stability.
road programs on the off-road menu. Up to five Further information on driving with snow chains
off-road programs are available, depending on (Y page 379).
the equipment level.
Available off-road programs: Off-road program, Off-road
You can select the Off-road off-road program
Slippery Optimal driving characteris- for driving on easily negotiable terrain, e.g. dirt
tics on slippery or snow- roads, gravel and sand.
covered roads The Off-road off-road program has the following
Off-road Optimal driving characteris- characteristics:
tics for easily negotiable off- Rthe steering, drive and suspension are adap-
road terrain ted for comfort
Rocking free Rthe transmission is adapted for off-road driv-
Optimal driving characteris-
tics for off-road terrain with ing
raised vehicle level or if Rvehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: the
vehicle is stuck vehicle is raised by 15 mm compared with the
normal level
Gradient Optimal driving characteris- The Off-road off-road program assists you with
tics for steep off-road ter-
driving in easily negotiable off-road terrain. The
rain
engine’s performance characteristics and the
Trailer Optimal driving characteris- gearshifting characteristics of the automatic
tics for towing a trailer transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS,
ESP® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to
off-road driving are also activated.
The Rocking free off-road program is available
only in vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL. Off-road program, Rocking free
If the ignition is switched off for less than four The Rocking free off-road program is available
hours, the previously selected off-road program only in vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL.
is activated when the engine is next started. If
You can select the Rocking free off-road pro-
the ignition is switched off for more than four
hours, the C (Comfort) drive program is activa- gram to free the vehicle from especially difficult
off-road terrain at low speeds.
ted when the engine is next started.
The Rocking free off-road program has the fol-
Off-road programs lowing characteristics:
Rthe steering, drive and suspension are adap-
Off-road program, Slippery ted for comfort
You can select the Slippery off-road program Rthe transmission is adapted for off-road driv-
for snow or rain. ing
Rthe vehicle is raised by 50 mm compared with
the normal level
Z
204 Driving systems
ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programs especially adap- Activating/deactivating off-road pro-
ted to off-road driving are also activated. grams
The Rocking free off-road program can be
selected up to a speed of 20 km/h.
If you are driving in the Rocking free off-road
program at speeds above 20 km/h
Rthe vehicle switches to the Off-road off-road
program
Driving and parking
Rthe vehicle is lowered by 35 mm

Notes on driving off-road (Y page 185).
Off-road program, Gradient
You can use the Gradient off-road program to
overcome steep terrain.
The Gradient off-road program has the follow- Activating the off-road program
ing characteristics: X Press off-road program button :.
Rthe steering, drive and suspension are adap- The multimedia system display shows the off-
ted for comfort road menu Offroad settings.
settings
Rthe transmission is adapted for off-road driv- X Select the off-road program.
ing The selected off-road program is activated.
Rmanual gearshifting is activated
The symbol of the active off-road program
appears on the multifunction display.
(Y page 169)
RVehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: the Further information on configuring the off-road
vehicle is raised by 15 mm compared with the programs via the multimedia system can be
normal level found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
RDSR is activated (Y page 201) The off-road program is deactivated if you:
ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programs specially adap- Rselect the Off setting in the off-road menu
ted to gradients are also activated. Rselect a drive program using the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch (Y page 161)
Off-road program, Trailer Rswitch off the engine and the ignition is
Select the Trailer off-road program when tow- switched off for more than four hours. When
ing a trailer. the engine is restarted, drive program C is
The Trailer off-road program has the following activated.
characteristics:
Rthe steering, drive and suspension are adap-
ted for comfort AIR BODY CONTROL
Rthe transmission is adapted for off-road driv-
General notes
ing
Rvehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: the AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
vehicle is adjusted to normal level with variable damping for improved driving com-
Rthe ECO start/stop function is available fort. All-round level control ensures the best
(Y page 157). possible suspension and constant ground clear-
ance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive
ESP® specially adapted for trailer operation is at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
also activated. improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
sumption. You also have the option of manually
adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL
consists of level setting, level control and ADS
PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with continu-
ous damping adjustment).
Driving systems 205
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC All other models: it is possible to choose
SELECT switch (Y page 161) or the level button between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle lev-
(Y page 205). The setting always corresponds els below a speed of 80 km/h. Select the "Nor-
to the last function selected. mal" setting for normal road surfaces and
"Raised" for driving with snow chains or on par-
Important safety notes ticularly poor road surfaces. Your selection
remains stored even if you remove the key from
G WARNING the ignition lock.
People's limbs may become trapped if they X Start the engine.
Driving and parking

are located underneath the vehicle or If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
between the vehicle body and the tyres when X Press button :.
the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: indicator
injury. lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one 30 mm (some countries: 20 mm) compared
is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate with the normal level.
vicinity of the wheel arches. Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC
63 S 4MATIC+: indicator lamp ; lights up.
The vehicle is raised by 38 mm compared with
i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not the normal level.
lowered.
All other models: indicator lamp ; lights
up. The vehicle is raised by 15 mm compared
Vehicle level with the normal level.
Setting the raised vehicle level The Vehicle rising message appears on
i The message disappears after ten seconds,
irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,
the vehicle is raised further.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: the "Raised
level" setting is cancelled if you:
Rdrive at speeds greater than 70 km/h
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at
speeds greater than 60 km/h
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
4MATIC+: the "Raised level" setting is cancelled
if you:
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: it is possible Rdrive at speeds greater than 70 km/h
to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" Rdrive for approximately three minutes at
vehicle levels below a speed of 50 km/h. Select
speeds greater than 60 km/h
the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces
and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on All other models: the "Raised level" setting is
particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection cancelled if you:
remains stored even if you remove the key from Rdrive at speeds greater than 120 km/h
the ignition lock. Rdrive for approximately three minutes at
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S speeds greater than 80 km/h
4MATIC+: it is possible to choose between the The "Raised level" remains saved when you are
"Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a not driving within these speed ranges.
speed of 50 km/h. Select the "Normal" setting
for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving
with snow chains or on particularly poor road
surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
you remove the key from the ignition lock.
Z
206 Driving systems
Setting the normal vehicle level prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select
X Start the engine. Comfort mode also when driving at speed on
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
If indicator lamp ; is lit: motorway.
X Press button :. X Select the E or C drive program with the
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 161).
adjusted to the height of the drive program The vehicle is raised to normal level.
that is currently selected (Y page 161). Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: when driving
Driving and parking
at speeds greater than 160 km/h, the vehicle is

Suspension settings automatically lowered by 10 mm in the E and C
drive programs. At speeds less than 140 km/h,
General notes the vehicle is raised again.
The Adaptive Damping System with continuous Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63 S
damping adjustment (ADS PLUS) automatically 4MATIC+: when driving at speeds greater than
controls the calibration of the dampers. 180 km/h, the vehicle is automatically lowered
The damping is adjusted individually to each by 8 mm in the E and C drive programs. At
wheel and depends on: speeds less than 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised
again.
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
All other models: when driving at speeds
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
greater than 125 km/h, the vehicle is automat-
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sport or comfort ically lowered by 15 mm in the E and C drive
Your selection remains stored even if you programs. When driving at speeds below
remove the key from the ignition lock. 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again.
Sport mode
Lowering the rear of the vehicle (except
In the S (Sport) and S+ (Sport Plus) drive pro- Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
grams, the firmer suspension setting ensures
even better contact with the road. Select this
mode when employing a sporty driving style,
e.g. on winding country roads.
X Select the S or S+ drive program with the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 161).
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC: the vehicle
is lowered by 10 mm compared with the nor-
mal level.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC
63 S 4MATIC+: the vehicle is lowered by
8 mm compared with the normal level.
All other models: the vehicle is lowered by
15 mm compared with the normal level. To lower using the button in the left-hand-
side luggage compartment trim:
If the ignition is switched off for less than four
hours, the previously selected setting is activa- X Apply the electric parking brake.
ted when the engine is next started. If the igni- X Shift the transmission to position j.
tion is switched off for more than four hours, the X Pull switch : briefly.
vehicle is raised to normal level and drive pro- Indicator lamp ; flashes until the vehicle has
gram C is activated when the engine is next been lowered.
started. The vehicle is lowered by 40 mm compared
with the current level.
Comfort mode
When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator
In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs, the lamp ; remains lit.
driving characteristics of your vehicle are more
comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you
Driving systems 207
Lowering is interrupted if: This is possible only if the same mode is

Ra vehicle door is opened selected for the suspension by pressing the
AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY
Rbutton : is briefly pulled again
CONTROL button on the centre console and
Rthe vehicle is moving at speeds greater than the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. this is the case,
2 km/h for example, when both are set to Comfort
The vehicle is automatically set to the level of mode.
the most recently selected drive program If the ignition is switched off for less than four
(Y page 161) if you drive at speeds greater than hours, the previously selected drive program is
Driving and parking

2 km/h. activated when the engine is next started. If the
ignition is switched off for more than four hours,
Raising the rear of the vehicle (except Comfort mode is activated when the engine is
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) next started.
To raise using the button in the left-hand-
side luggage compartment trim: Sport mode
X Pull switch : briefly.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The vehicle is raised by 40 mm.
i The vehicle is automatically set to the level
of the most recently selected drive program
(Y page 161) if you drive at speeds greater
than 2 km/h.
X If the vehicle can no longer be raised
when stationary: start the engine.
The process will then be continued.
If you drive off when the rear of the vehicle has
been lowered, the Á Vehicle rising The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
Please wait message may appear on the mul- Sport mode ensures even better contact with
tifunction display. the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
AMG sports suspension based on AIR X Press button : once.
BODY CONTROL (Mercedes-AMG Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected
GLC 43 4MATIC Coupé) Sport mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
General notes appears on the multifunction display.
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving Sport + mode
safety and ride comfort.
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
The damping is adjusted individually to each Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
wheel and depends on: with the road. Select this mode only when driv-
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty ing on race circuits.
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps If indicator lamps ; and = are off:
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or X Press button : twice.
Comfort Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have
The suspension setting is adjusted using the selected Sport + mode.
corresponding button on the centre console. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
i The mode can also be set using the appears on the multifunction display.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 161).
Z
208 Driving systems
If indicator lamp = lights up: i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum

X Press button : once. effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
selected Sport + mode. chains if necessary.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
appears on the multifunction display.
Parking Pilot
Comfort mode General notes
Driving and parking
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with an
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this ultrasonic sensor system. It measures the road
mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
style, but also when driving at speed on straight indicates a suitable parking space. Active steer-
roads, e.g. motorways. ing intervention and brake application can assist
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator you during parking and when exiting a parking
lamps ; and = go out. space. You can also still use Parking Assist
You have selected Comfort mode. PARKTRONIC (Y page 212).
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message
appears on the multifunction display. Important safety notes
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute
for your attention to the immediate surround-
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring
and parking remains with you. Make sure that no
4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four
persons, animals or objects are in the manoeu-
wheels. Together with ESP®, it improves the vring range.
traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
spins due to insufficient grip. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch folded out,
of an accident nor override the laws of physics. the minimum length for parking spaces is
slightly longer.
4MATIC does not take into account
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you
Rthe road and weather conditions should not use Parking Pilot. Once the electrical
Rthe traffic situation connection is established between your vehicle
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for and the trailer, Parking Pilot is no longer availa-
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle ble. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in for the rear area.
lane. G WARNING
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
While parking or pulling out of a parking
RWhen pulling away, only depress the acceler-
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
ator pedal as far as is necessary.
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
Raccelerate less when driving.
cause you to collide with other road users.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. There is a risk of an accident.
This may damage the transfer case. Damage Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
Benz implied warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. parking procedure.
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
ground. cles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tyres.
Driving systems 209
Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita- This could cause a collision. There is a risk of
ble for parking, e.g.: an accident.
Rin a zone where parking or stopping is pro-
If objects are located above the detection
hibited
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron unsuitable surfaces Further information on the detection range
Parking tips: (Y page 213).
Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
Driving and parking

past the parking space spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown
if:
might be identified or measured incorrectly Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by to one another
trailer drawbars might not be identified as Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
such or be measured incorrectly obstacle such as a low kerb
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking Ryou forward-park
space being measured inaccurately Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
Rpay attention to the Parking Assist spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the
PARKTRONIC warning messages direction of travel if:
(Y page 214) during the parking procedure Rthe parking space is on a kerb
Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to Rthe system reads the parking space as being
correct it at any time – Park Pilot is then can- blocked, such as by foliage or grass paving
celled blocks
Rwhen transporting a load that protrudes from Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
your vehicle, you should not use Parking Pilot manoeuvre into
Rnever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
fitted e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Ralways observe the specified tyre pressure for
your vehicle as this has a direct influence on
the parking characteristics of the vehicle
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the detection range of : Detected parking space on the left
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- ; Parking symbol
ing space is measured. These are not taken into = Detected parking space on the right
account when the parking procedure is calcula-
ted, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or load- Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
ing ramps of goods vehicles. driving forwards. The system is operational at
speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While
G WARNING in operation, the system independently locates
and measures parking spaces on both sides of
If there are objects above the detection range:
the vehicle.
RParking Pilot may steer in too early
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
Z
210 Driving systems
Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
which are: against rolling away.
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
Rparallel to the direction of travel and are at obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
least 1.5 m wide whilst the vehicle is parking. You are respon-
Rparallel to the direction of travel and at least sible for braking in good time.
1.0 m longer than your vehicle X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol
Driving and parking
Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at shows the desired parking space on the
least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position k.
i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot
measure the depth of parking spaces if they The message Start Parking Pilot? Yes:
are at right angles to the direction of travel. OK No:
No:% appears on the multifunction dis-
You will need to judge whether your vehicle play.
will fit in the parking space. X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will pull away.
see parking symbol ; as a status indicator on
the instrument cluster. When a parking space or
has been detected, an arrow towards the right or X To park using Parking Pilot: press button
the left also appears. Parking Pilot displays only a on the multifunction steering wheel.
parking spaces on the front-passenger side as The message Parking Pilot active
standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side Accelerate and brake Observe sur‐
are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the roundings appears on the multifunction dis-
driver's side is activated. When parking on the play.
driver's side, this must remain activated until X Release the multifunction steering wheel.
you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing
the a button on the multifunction steering X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at
wheel. The system automatically determines all times. When reversing, drive at a speed
whether the parking space is parallel or at right below approximately 10 km/h. Otherwise,
angles to the direction of travel. Parking Pilot is cancelled.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- when the vehicle approaches the rear border
ing past it, and until you are approximately 15 m of the parking space.
away from it.
Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking
spaces.
Parking
The message Parking Pilot active
G WARNING Select D Observe surroundings appears on
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
X Shift the transmission to position h when
braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if:
the vehicle is stationary.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Parking Pilot steers immediately in the other
the voltage supply. direction.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- The message Parking Pilot active
Accelerate and brake Observe sur‐
pered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
Driving systems 211
roundings appears on the multifunction dis- Exiting a parking space

play.
In order that Parking Pilot can support you when
i You will achieve the best results by waiting exiting the parking space:
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away. Rthe border of the parking space must be high
enough at the front and the rear – a kerb, for
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
example, is too small.
times.
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
too wide – your vehicle can be manoeuvred
Driving and parking

when the vehicle approaches the front border
of the parking space. into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
starting position in the parking space.
Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking
Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must
spaces.
be available
The message Parking Pilot active Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park-
Select R Observe surroundings appears on ing space only if you have parked the vehicle
the multifunction display. parallel to the direction of travel using Parking
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, Pilot.
the Park Assist ended message appears and
a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects
parked. obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking You are responsible for braking in good time.
effect is cancelled when you depress the accel- X Start the engine.
erator pedal. X Release the electric parking brake.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer- X Switch on the turn signal in the direction in
ing interventions and brake applications. When which you intend to pull away.
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
brake again yourself. Parking Assist
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
PARKTRONIC is still available.
% appears on the multifunction display.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure: press the %
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- button on the multifunction steering wheel or
ing space after parking is dependent on vari- pull away.
ous factors. These include the position and or
shape of the vehicles parked in front of and
X To exit a parking space using Parking
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
is possible that Parking Pilot could guide you Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
too far or not far enough into a parking space. function steering wheel.
In some cases, it may also lead you across or The Parking Pilot active Accelerate
onto the kerb. Cancel the parking procedure and brake Observe surroundings appears
with Parking Pilot if necessary. on the multifunction display.
X Release the multifunction steering wheel.
RYou can also preselect transmission position
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
as far into the parking space. Should the not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
transmission change take place too early, the imately 10 km/h when exiting a parking
parking procedure is cancelled. A sensible space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is cancelled.
parking position can no longer be achieved X Depending on the message or as required,
from this position. shift the transmission to position h or k.
Parking Pilot steers immediately in the other
direction. The message Parking Pilot
active Accelerate and brake Observe
surroundings appears on the multifunction
display.
Z
212 Driving systems
i You will achieve the best results by waiting If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
for the steering procedure to complete before braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
pulling away. accelerator pedal again.
If you reverse after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion. PARKTRONIC Parking Assist
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
Driving and parking
plays, several times if necessary. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic

Once you have exited the parking space com- parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the around your vehicle using six sensors in the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the front bumper and six sensors in the rear
Park Assist ended message appears on the bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you
multifunction display. You will then have to steer the distance between your vehicle and an obsta-
and merge into traffic on your own. Parking cle visually and audibly.
Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
take over the steering before the vehicle has not a substitute for your attention to the imme-
exited the parking space completely. This is diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe
useful if you recognise that it is already possible manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
to pull out of the parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-
Cancelling active Parking Pilot vring and parking in/leaving parking spaces.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction ! When parking, pay particular attention to
steering wheel or steer yourself. objects above or below the sensors, such as
Parking Pilot is cancelled at once. The mes- flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
sage Parking Pilot cancelled appears on PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
the multifunction display. when they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the
or objects.
X Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button The sensors may not detect snow and other
(Y page 214). objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately cancelled. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
The message Parking Pilot cancelled wash, the compressed-air brakes of a lorry or
appears on the multifunction display. a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Pilot is cancelled automatically when: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
Rthe electric parking brake is applied correctly on uneven terrain.
Rtransmission position j is selected
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos- hitch is not required. Parking Assist
sible PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detec-
Ryou are driving at a speed greater than tion range to an obstacle from the bumper,
10 km/h not the ball coupling.
Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails – in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up matically when you:
on the instrument cluster Rswitch on the ignition
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- Rshift the transmission to position h, k or
appears and the multifunction display shows the
i
Parking Pilot cancelled message.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
If Parking Pilot is cancelled, you must steer and
speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower
brake again yourself.
speeds.
Driving systems 213
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for

the rear area when you establish the electrical
connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Range of the sensors

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, ani-
Driving and parking

mals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles
: Approx. 60 cm (corners)
: Sensors on the front bumper, left-hand side ; Approx. 80 cm (corners)
(example) = Approx. 120 cm (centre)
? Approx. 100 cm (centre)
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them (Y page 354).
Minimum distance
Centre Approx. 20 cm
Corners Approx. 15 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-

evant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Z
214 Driving systems
Warning displays cle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,

warning tones are emitted.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.
Driving and parking
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is on the
instrument cluster. The warning display for the
rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear
compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if
operational readiness indicator = lights up.
The selected transmission position and the d Switches on the dashboard
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the e Switches on the centre console
engine is running. : Activates/deactivates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
Transmission posi- Warning display ; Indicator lamp
tion
If indicator lamp ; lights up, Parking Assist
h Front area activated PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is
then also not available.
k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling backwards activated i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the key to posi-
j No areas activated tion 2 in the ignition lock.
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
Driving systems 215
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deacti-
on the Parking Assist vated.
PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking

approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or malfunctioning.
on the Parking Assist X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 354).
PARKTRONIC warning
X Switch the ignition back on.
displays are lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
then deactivated. sound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC functions in a different
location.
Reversing camera ing are examples of reversing camera displays

on the multimedia system.
General notes
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the immediate
surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-
vring and parking in parking spaces.
The reversing camera will not function or will
function only in a limited manner:
Rif the tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Reversing camera : is a visual parking and
Rat night or in very dark places
manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind the
vehicle with guide lines on the multimedia sys- Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
tem. Rif the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a lighting (the display may flicker)
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
i The text shown on the multimedia system ter
depends on the language setting. The follow-
Z
216 Driving systems
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed, function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a
observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 354) trailer".
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged – in this The symbol of the selected function is high-
case, have the camera position and setting lighted.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop X To deactivate: shift the transmission to posi-
The field of vision and other functions of the tion j.
reversing camera may be restricted due to addi- or
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
licence plate holder, rear-mounted bicycle X Drive forwards at a speed greater than
Driving and parking
rack). 12 km/h.
The reversing camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by a flap. When the reversing Multimedia system display
camera is activated, this flap opens.
The reversing camera may show a distorted view
The flap closes again when: of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Ryou have finished the manoeuvring process Obstacles are not shown by the reversing cam-
Ryou switch off the engine era in the following locations:
Ryou open the luggage compartment Rvery close to the rear bumper
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 354). Runder the rear bumper
For technical reasons, the flap may remain open Rin the area immediately above the recessed
briefly after the reversing camera has been tailgate handle
deactivated.
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Activating/deactivating the reversing
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
camera
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
X To activate: make sure that the Activa‐

tion by R gear function is selected on the
multimedia system (see Digital Owner's Man-
ual).
X Engage reverse gear.
The reversing camera flap opens. The area
behind the vehicle appears with guide lines on
the multimedia system. : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
The image from the reversing camera is avail- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
able throughout the manoeuvring process. ; White guide lines without steering input,
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
X To switch the function mode for vehicles (static)
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller,
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
Driving systems 217
= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including "Reverse parking" function
the exterior mirrors, for current steering
input (dynamic) Reversing straight into a parking space
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres without steering input
will take for current steering input (dynamic)
Driving and parking

: White guide line without steering input –
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle (static)
B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) ; Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
C Bumper the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately steering input
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
If the transmission is shifted to position k,
guide lines appear on the camera image. ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
The distance specifications apply only to
objects that are at ground level. X Make sure that the reversing camera is
switched on (Y page 216).
The lane and guide lines appear.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
reverse until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-

E Front warning displays ing input
F Rear warning displays
G Additional vehicle icon as Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC measurement operational
readiness indicator
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 214), vehicle icon G appears on
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays E and F are also
active or light up correspondingly on the multi-
media system display.
Z
218 Driving systems
X After driving past the parking space, stop the

vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic
conditions.
X Make sure that the reversing camera is
The lane and guide lines appear in the camera
image.
X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-
ing wheel in the direction of the parking space
Driving and parking
until yellow guide lines ; reach parking

space marking :.
Yellow guide lines ; dynamically adapt to the
current steering input. ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
X Maintain the steering input and reverse care- 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
fully. A White guide lines – no steering input
B End of parking space
X Reverse carefully until you have reached the
end position.
The red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space B. The vehicle is almost par-
allel in the parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in

front of the parking space.
: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line

at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
This function is available only on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
: Parking space markings
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
= White guide lines – for current steering input
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
White guide lines = should be as close to par- than the ball coupling.
allel with parking space markings : as possi- X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
ble. drawbar ;.
X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position
while the vehicle is stationary.
Driving systems 219
You can also use the reversing camera to select

a wide-angle view.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 214), a symbol for your own vehi-
cle appears on the multimedia system display. If
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays are active, warning displays = light up on
the multimedia system display in yellow or red
accordingly.
Driving and parking

Object detection
= Trailer drawbar locating aid The reversing camera helps detect moving and
? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func- stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle
tion or other obstacle) is detected, this object is
A Ball coupling marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-
tance away from the vehicle are marked with a
B Red guide line at a distance of approximately yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very
0.30 m from the ball coupling small, the bar is displayed in red.
X Select symbol ? using the multimedia sys- Object detection works only in wide-angle view.
tem controller. To use the function, it must be switched on via
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- the multimedia system (see Digital Owner's
ted. The distance specifications now apply Manual).
only to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid = points approximately
360° camera
in the direction of trailer drawbar ;. General notes
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ; rea-
ches red guide line B. The 360° camera is a camera system compris-
The distance between trailer drawbar ; and ing four cameras.
red guide line B is now approximately The system evaluates images from the following
0.30 m. cameras:
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 239). Rreversing camera
Rfront camera
"Wide-angle" function Rtwo side cameras on the exterior mirrors
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
of the vehicle. The system assists you, e.g. when
parking or at exits with reduced visibility.
You can show images from the 360° camera in
full-screen mode or in seven different split-
screen views on the multimedia system. A split-
screen view also includes a top view of the vehi-
cle. This view is calculated from the data sup-
plied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The seven split-screen views are:
Rtop view and image from the reversing cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function Rtop view and image from the front camera
; Own vehicle (130° viewing angle without displaying the
= Warning displays for Parking Assist maximum steering wheel angle)
PARKTRONIC Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Z
220 Driving systems
Rtop view and enlarged front view Rat night or in very dark places
Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light
tow hitch) Rif the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED
Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side lighting (the display may flicker)
cameras (rear wheel view) Rif the camera lenses mist up, e.g. when you
Rtop view and images from the forward-facing drive into a heated garage in winter, causing a
side cameras (front wheel view) rapid change in temperature
When the function is active and you shift the Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
Driving and parking
transmission from h or k to i, the guide Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-
lines on the multimedia system are hidden. eras are fitted are damaged: in this case, have
When you shift between transmission positions the camera position and setting checked at a
h and k, you see the previously selected front qualified specialist workshop
or rear view. Do not use the 360° camera under such cir-
Distances measured by Parking Assist cumstances. You could otherwise injure others
PARKTRONIC will also be displayed: or damage objects when parking the vehicle.
Ras red or yellow brackets around the vehicle The guide lines on the multimedia system dis-
symbol in top view in split-screen mode or play show the distances to your vehicle. The
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
distances apply only at road level.
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
The line thickness and colour of the brackets level of the trailer tow hitch.
show how far the vehicle is from an object. The camera in the rear area is protected by a
Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist
flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is
PARKTRONIC is active activated. Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 354). For technical reasons, the flap
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
may remain open briefly after the 360° camera
present in close range of the vehicle has been deactivated.
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate
The field of vision and other functions of the
close range of the vehicle camera system may be restricted due to addi-
tional attachments (e.g. licence plate holder,
Important safety notes rear bicycle carrier).
The 360° camera is only an aid and may show a On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension,
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor- due to the technical conditions, leaving the
rectly or not show them at all. The 360° camera standard height can result in the following:
is not a substitute for attentive driving. Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
parking remains with you. Make sure that there images (top view)
are no persons, animals or objects in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park- Activation conditions
ing in parking spaces.
You are responsible for safety at all times and The image from the 360° camera appears when
must always pay attention to your immediate Rthe multimedia system is switched on
surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. Rthe 360° camera function is switched on
This applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan- If you are driving at more than a moderate speed
ger yourself and others. and switch on the 360° camera, a warning mes-
sage appears.
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
tion only to a limited extent: The warning message disappears in the follow-
ing situations:
Rif the doors are open
Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed, the
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
360° camera is then activated
Rif the tailgate is open
Rthe message is confirmed with the % but-
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog ton
Driving systems 221
Switching the 360° camera on/off with The full-screen option is available only in the fol-
the button lowing views:
Rtop view with image from the reversing cam-
era
Rtop view with image from the front camera
Multimedia system display
Driving and parking

The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show
them at all. Obstacles in the following locations
are not shown by the system:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
X To switch on: press button :. Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Depending on whether transmission position
Rin the area immediately above the recessed
h or k is selected, the following appears:
tailgate handle
Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
from the front camera or
Rin the transitional areas between the various
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the reversing camera cameras in the virtual top view
X To switch off: press button : again. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Switching on the 360° camera using Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
reverse gear Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
You can show images from the 360° camera
Rthe rear section of an HGV
automatically by engaging reverse gear.
Ra slanted post
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected on the multimedia system Use the guidelines only for orientation.
(see the Digital Owner's Manual). Approach objects no further than the bottom-
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
most guideline.
reverse gear. Top view with image from the reversing
The multimedia system shows the area camera
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
from the reversing camera.
You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
reverse gear is engaged.
Selecting the split-screen view or full-

screen mode
Switching between split screen views:
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
Switching to full-screen mode:
; Symbol for the split-screen setting with top
X Turn and press 180° view with the controller. view and reversing camera image
Z
222 Driving systems
= Guide lines for the maximum steering input A Red guide line at a distance of approximately
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres 0.30 m from the front of the vehicle
will take for current steering input (dynamic) B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
A Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle
the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
steering input Top view and enlarged rear view
Driving and parking
B Vehicle centre axis (locating aids) : Symbol for the split-screen setting with top
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- view and reversing camera image enlarged
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately
D Bumper 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately This view assists you in estimating the distance
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle to the vehicle behind you.
When reverse gear is selected, guide lines i This setting can also be selected as an
appear on the camera image. enlarged front view.
The distance specifications apply only to
objects that are at ground level. Top view with image from the side cam-
eras
Top view with image from the front cam-
era
: Symbol for the top view setting with the

forward-facing side camera image
: Symbol for the split-screen setting with top ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
view and front camera image including the exterior mirror (right side of
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- vehicle)
imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including including the exterior mirror (left side of
the exterior mirrors, for current steering vehicle)
input (dynamic) i You can also select the side camera setting
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres for the rear-facing view.
will take for current steering input (dynamic)
Driving systems 223
"Coupling up a trailer" function X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar rea-
ches red guide line C.
The distance between the trailer drawbar and
red guide line C is now approximately
0.30 m.
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 239).
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer tow
hitch.
Driving and parking

180° view
: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line

at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
= Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it
is slightly higher than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;. : Symbol for the full-screen setting with the
reversing camera image
; Own vehicle
= Warning displays for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
i 180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
If you select the % symbol on the display and
confirm with the controller, the split-screen view
appears.
For technical reasons, the ball coupling B of
the trailer tow hitch on the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not visi- Stopping the 360° camera display
ble at all. X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Select symbol ? using the controller. or
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- X Drive forwards at a speed greater than
ted. The distance specifications now apply 10 km/h.
only to objects that are at the same level as The 360° camera display is stopped.
the ball coupling.
The view that was active before the 360°
X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
camera was displayed appears on the multi-
drawbar locating aid A points approximately media system display. You can stop the 360°
in the direction of the trailer drawbar. camera from the split-screen view by select-
ing the % symbol on the display and con-
firming with the controller.
You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
transmission position k is selected.
Z
224 Driving systems
ATTENTION ASSIST Displaying the attention level

General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys such as on motorways
and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to
200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
Driving and parking
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the

driver, it suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not
On the Assistant menu (Y page 257) of the on-
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
board computer, you can call up the current sta-
until too late, or may not detect them at all. The
tus information.
system is not a substitute for a well-rested and
attentive driver. X Select the assistant display for ATTENTION
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is ASSIST using the on-board computer
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not (Y page 256).
occur at all in the following situations: The following information appears:
Rthe length of the journey is less than approx- Rthe length of the journey since the last break
imately 30 minutes Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface ASSIST (Attention
Attention level),
level shown on a bar
is uneven or contains potholes display in five levels from high to low
Rin the event of strong crosswinds Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with the attention level and cannot issue a warn-
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- ing, the System suspended message
eration appears. The bar display then changes what is
Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed shown, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h 60 km/h or above 200 km/h
Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
Rif the time has been set incorrectly X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST via the on-board
Rin active driving situations, such as when you computer (Y page 258).
change lanes or change your speed The system determines the attention level of
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment the driver depending on the setting selected:
is deleted and restarted when you continue the If Standard is selected: the sensitivity with
journey in the following situations: which the system determines the attention level
Ryou switch off the engine is set to normal.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is set
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to higher. The attention level detected by ATTEN-
take a break TION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears on the multifunction dis-
play on the assistant display when the engine is
running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been switched off. The sensitivity selected
Driving systems 225
corresponds to the last selection activated warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs
(standard/sensitive). with multifunction camera : attached at the
top of the windscreen. The data and general
Warning on the multifunction display traffic regulations stored in the navigation sys-
tem are also used to determine the current
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration speed limit.
are detected, a warning appears on the multi- If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a passed, the display of the speed limits and over-
break!.
break! taking restrictions is updated.
Driving and parking

In addition to the message shown on the multi- The display can also be updated without a visible
function display, you will then hear a warning traffic sign in the following situations:
tone.
Rthe vehicle changes roads, e.g. motorway exit
X If necessary, take a break. or slip road
X Confirm the message by pressing the a Ra village or town boundary that is stored in the
button on the steering wheel. digital map is passed
On long journeys, take regular breaks that allow Rthe last traffic sign detected by the camera
for adequate refreshment. If you do not take a has not been repeated
break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the sign appears for five seconds. The currently
earliest. This will happen only if ATTEN- applicable traffic regulation continues to be
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of shown in the assistance graphic (Y page 256).
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
Vehicles with COMAND Online multimedia restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in
system: if a warning appears on the multifunc- wet conditions).
tion display, the multimedia system offers to The traffic signs are displayed on the instrument
search for a service station. You can select a cluster with the restrictions only in the following
service station and you will then be navigated to situations:
this service station. This function can be activa-
ted or deactivated in COMAND Online multime- Rthe regulation must be observed with the
dia system (see Digital Owner's Manual). restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
Traffic Sign Assist If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permissible speed from any of the
General notes available sources, no speed limit is displayed on
the instrument cluster either.
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed

permitted and overtaking restrictions to the Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
driver on the instrument cluster. Driving onto a tries. In this case, the display : appears in the
section of road in the wrong direction triggers a speedometer.
Z
226 Driving systems
Important safety notes Speed limit with unknown restriction

Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits and over-
taking restrictions. Traffic signs always have pri-
ority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired
or temporarily unavailable in the following sit-
uations:
Driving and parking
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or

spray
Rglare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky
Rdirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the
vicinity of the camera : Maximum permissible speed
Rtraffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, ; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles for
ice, snow which the restriction in the additional sign is
Rthe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night relevant
Rsigns are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on con- = Additional sign for unknown restriction
struction sites or in adjacent lanes A maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h
Rthe information in the digital street map of the (80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph)
navigation system is incorrect or out of date with an unknown restriction apply.
The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
Switching the message function on/off depends on the country in which you are driving.
It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign
If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist mes- nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken
sage function in the on-board computer, the into account on observance of the maximum
traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking permissible speed.
restrictions) are displayed on the instrument
cluster for five seconds respectively. The wrong- No entry (wrong-way warning)
way warning and the traffic sign display for
speed limits and overtaking restrictions remain
active even when the display has been deacti-
vated.
X Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist message
function via the on-board computer
(Y page 257).
Instrument cluster display

Showing the assistance graphic
X Call up the assistant display function via the
on-board computer (Y page 256). A warning message : is displayed on the
Detected traffic signs appear on the instru- instrument cluster if Traffic Sign Assist detects
ment cluster. that you are passing a “no entry” sign and you
are driving in the wrong direction. You will then
also hear a warning tone. You should immedi-
ately check your direction of travel in order to
avoid danger to yourself and other road users.
Driving systems 227
Lane Tracking package qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist

may no longer work properly in such cases.
General notes
Monitoring range
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Spot Assist (Y page 227) and Lane Keeping impaired in the following situations:
Assist (Y page 228).
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
Blind Spot Assist
snow or spray
Driving and parking

General notes Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles
Rvery wide lanes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the Rnarrow lanes
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen- Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane
sors. A warning lamp lights up on the exterior Rbarriers or other road boundaries
mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
detected in the monitored area. If you then indicated.
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and
audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 30 km/h.
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:
Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing
them in the blind spot area
Rwhen the difference in the speed of
approach and overtaking is too great
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- At a distance of around 0.5 m ; from the vehi-
uation and maintain a safe distance at the side cle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
of the vehicle. 3.0 m next to = and behind : your vehicle, as
shown in the picture.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
detect some vehicles and is not a substitute for lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
sufficient distance to the side for other road ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
users and obstacles. case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
of their lane.
Radar sensors Due to the nature of the system:
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The close to crash barriers or similar solid boun-
sensors must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks daries
or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have alongside long vehicles, e.g. lorries, for a pro-
the function of the radar sensors checked at a longed time
Z
228 Driving systems
Warning lamp Assistant display

Driving and parking
: Warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey radar

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below waves propagating backwards appear next to
approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the moni- the vehicle on the assistant display on the mul-
toring range are then not indicated. tifunction display (Y page 256). Above a speed
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot of 30 km/h, the colour of the radar waves on the
monitoring range at speeds of more than assistant display changes to green :. Blind
approximately 30 km/h, warning lamp : on Spot Assist is then ready for use.
the corresponding side lights up red. This warn- Towing a trailer
ing lamp always lights up when a vehicle enters
the blind spot monitoring range from behind or If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the have correctly established the electrical con-
warning occurs only if the difference in speed is nection. This can be accomplished by checking
less than 12 km/h. the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then
If you select reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The Blind Spot Assist not
not operational. available when towing a trailer See
Owner's Manual message appears on the mul-
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- tifunction display.
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Lane Keeping Assist
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the blind spot moni- General notes
toring range and you switch on the correspond-
ing turn signal, a double warning tone sounds.
The red warning lamp flashes on the relevant
exterior mirror. If the turn signal remains
switched on, detected vehicles are indicated by
the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte-
rior mirror. There are no further warning tones.
Activating Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
on the on-board computer (Y page 258).
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
light up until the engine is started. era : attached at the top of the windscreen.
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the road and can warn you before you leave your
lane unintentionally.
Driving systems 229
This function is available in a speed range Rno or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is so small
up to 1.5 seconds. that the lane markings cannot be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
G WARNING
Driving and parking

Rthe road is very narrow and winding
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
detect lane markings. the road surface
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Rissue an unnecessary warning Assist
Rnot issue a warning
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate X To activate: press button ;.
the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep- Indicator lamp : lights up. The message
ing Assist alerts you. Lane Keeping Assist on appears on the
multifunction display. If all conditions have
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk been satisfied, there may be a warning.
of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane
style nor override the laws of physics. Lane markings are detected, the lines in the assis-
Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, tance graphic (Y page 256) are shown in
weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the X To deactivate: press button ;.
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in Assist is deactivated. The message Lane
lane. Keeping Assist off appears on the multi-
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle function display.
in its lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
in the following situations: X One the Assistance menu on the on-board
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi- computer, select the function Lane Keep‐
nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or ing Assist(
Assist Y page 258).
spray X Select setting Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
Rglare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or
Standard
reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road
surface is wet) When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Z
230 Driving systems
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this rior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles
case, the warnings are suppressed for a cer- detected in the monitored area. If you then
tain period of time. switch on the corresponding turn signal to
Ra driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or change lanes, you will also receive a visual and
ESP® intervenes. audible warning. If a risk of side impact is detec-
Adaptive ted, a course-corrective brake application may
help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- Assist evaluates the free space in the direction
tion occurs if: of travel and to the side before making a course-
Driving and parking
Ryou have switched on the turn signal – in this correcting brake application. For this, Active
case, the warnings are suppressed for a cer- Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar
tain period of time. sensors.
Ra driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
ESP® intervenes speed of approximately 30 km/h.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
Ryou brake hard
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
a substitute for attentive driving.
obstacle or change lane quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend G WARNING
To ensure that you are warned only when nec- Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to
essary and in good time if you cross the lane vehicles:
marking, the system detects certain conditions
and warns you accordingly. Rovertaking too closely on the side, placing
The warning vibration occurs earlier in the fol- them in the blind spot area
lowing situations if: Rif the difference in the speed of approach
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a and overtaking is too great
bend As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
Rthe system detects solid lane markings uations. There is a risk of an accident.
The warning vibration occurs later in the follow- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
ing situations if: uation and maintain a safe distance at the side
Rthe road has narrow lanes of the vehicle.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
Driving Assistance Plus package integrated in the front and rear bumpers and
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
General notes that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
trim are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sen-
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of sors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 192), Active or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 230) and Active Lane or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
Keeping Assist (Y page 233). the function of the radar sensors checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Active Blind Spot Assist Assist might otherwise no longer function prop-
erly.
General notes
Using two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors,
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on
either side of the vehicle that are not visible to
the driver. A warning lamp lights up on the exte-
Driving systems 231
Monitoring range Due to the nature of the system:

G WARNING Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid boun-
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all daries
traffic situations and road users. There is a Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are
risk of an accident. driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- such as lorries, for a prolonged time
tance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Warning lamp
Driving and parking

: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds of below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
At a distance of approximately 0.5 m ; from monitoring range at speeds of more than
the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist monitors approximately 30 km/h, warning lamp : on
the area up to 3.0 m next to = and behind : the corresponding side lights up red. This warn-
your vehicle, as shown in the picture. ing lamp always lights up when a vehicle enters
The detection of vehicles may be impaired in the the blind spot monitoring range from behind or
following situations: from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors warning occurs only if the difference in speed is
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray less than 12 km/h.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
indicated. Assist is not operational.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
may detect them too late. roundings.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if vehicles are driving on the inner side of
their lane.
Z
232 Driving systems
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey Either a course-correcting brake application
radar waves propagating rearwards appear next appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
to the vehicle on the assistant display on the all, may occur in the following situations:
multifunction display. Above a speed of Rvehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
30 km/h, the colour of the radar waves on the located on both sides of your vehicle
assistant display changes to green ;. Active
Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side
Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
Visual and audible collision warning high cornering speeds
Driving and parking
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes Ryou brake or accelerate significantly
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring Ra driving safety system engages, such as
range, you receive a visual and audible collision ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake
warning. You will then hear a double warning RESP® is deactivated
tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. detected
There are no further warning tones.
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
Course-correcting brake application X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side activated on the on-board computer
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor- (Y page 258).
recting brake application is carried out. This is X Switch on the ignition.
designed to help you avoid a collision. Warning lamps : on the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.
G WARNING Grey radar waves propagating backwards ;
A course-correcting brake application cannot appear next to the vehicle on the assistant
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an display on the multifunction display.
accident. Above a speed of 30 km/h, the colour of the
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, radar waves on the assistant display changes
to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
ready for use.
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the Towing a trailer
sides. If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
have correctly established the electrical con-
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, nection. This can be accomplished by checking
red warning lamp : flashes on the exterior mir- the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi- then deactivated. The radar waves ; next to
tion, a display underlining the danger of a side the vehicle are hidden on the assistant display.
collision appears on the multifunction display. The Active Blind Spot Assist not avail‐
In very rare cases, the system may make an able when towing a trailer See Owner's
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor- Manual message appears on the multifunction
recting brake application may be interrupted at display.
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler-
ating.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able in the speed range between 30 km/h and
200 km/h.
Driving systems 233
Active Lane Keeping Assist In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
General notes
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Driving and parking

Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in The system may be impaired or may not function
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction in the following situations:
camera : at the top of the windscreen. Various Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumi-
different areas to the front, rear and side of your nation of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the spray
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Rglare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or
Assist detects lane markings on the road and reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road
can warn you before you leave your lane unin- surface is wet)
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
lane-correcting brake application can bring the
vehicle back into the original lane. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
This function is available in a speed range
Rthe radar sensors on the front or rear bump-
between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured
Important safety notes by snow
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce Rno or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
driving style nor override the laws of physics. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
of road and weather conditions. It may not rec- Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is so small
ognise certain road and traffic conditions. that the lane markings cannot be detected
Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in branch off, cross one another or merge
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
Rthe road is very narrow and winding
and for staying in lane.
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
keep your vehicle in its lane. the road surface
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
G WARNING broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always recting brake application is made.
clearly detect lane markings. Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Z
234 Driving systems
Lane-correcting brake application Ryou have switched on the turn signal

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- Ra driving safety system engages, such as
ces, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot
This is intended to help you return the vehicle to Assist
the original lane. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
G WARNING eration
A lane-correcting brake application cannot RESP® is deactivated
always bring the vehicle back into the original
Driving and parking
Rthe transmission is not in position h

lane. There is a risk of an accident. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns rectly established
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has
cation. been detected and displayed
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other
road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate
brake application may be interrupted at any time
in the following situations:
Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction
Ryou switch on the turn signal
Ryou brake or accelerate significantly
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
ted automatically in the following situations:
Ra driving safety system engages, such as
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot
display : appears on the multifunction display. Assist
The brake application also slightly reduces driv- Rlane markings are no longer detected
ing speed.
A lane-correcting brake application can be made Activating/deactivating Active Lane
after the car has passed over a lane marking Keeping Assist
detected as being solid or broken. Before this, a
warning must have been issued by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In
addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides
must be detected.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can be made only if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-
taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes
can be detected.
A further lane-correcting brake application can
occur only after your vehicle has returned to the
original lane. X To activate: press button ;.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in Indicator lamp : lights up. The message
the following situations: Lane Keeping Assist on appears on the
multifunction display. If all conditions have
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- been satisfied, a warning may be issued or a
erate steering intervention made.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
Towing a trailer 235
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane Towing a trailer

markings are detected, the lines on the assis- If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you
tant display (Y page 256) appear in green. have correctly established the electrical con-
Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. nection. This can be accomplished by checking
X To deactivate: press button ;. the trailer lighting.
Indicator lamp : goes out. Active Lane Keep-
ing Assist is deactivated. The message Lane
Keeping Assist off appears on the multi- Towing a trailer
function display.
Driving and parking

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
X On the Assistance menu on the on-board G WARNING
computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer
ing Assist function (Y page 258). combination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-
X Select setting Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive. cle/trailer combination could even overturn.
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if: There is a risk of an accident.
Ryou have switched on the turn signal – in On no account should you attempt to
this event, the warnings are suppressed for straighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-
a certain period of time. tion by increasing speed. Decrease your
Ra driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-
ESP® intervenes. essary.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if: G WARNING
Ryou have switched on the turn signal – in If the maximum permissible load for a carrier
this event, the warnings are suppressed for system is exceeded, the carrier could come
a certain period of time.
loose from the vehicle and endanger other
Ra driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or
road users. There is a risk of an accident and
ESP® intervenes
injury.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
Ryou brake hard Never exceed the maximum permissible load
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
when using a carrier.
obstacle or change lane quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the engine cooling system may be
To ensure that you are warned only when nec- necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
essary and in good time if you cross the lane If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
marking, the system detects certain conditions observe the anchorage points on the chassis.
and warns you accordingly.
Retrofitting a trailer tow hitch is only permissible
The warning vibration occurs earlier in the fol- if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle docu-
lowing situations if: ments. If this is not the case, then the vehicle is
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a not approved for towing a trailer.
bend For more information, please contact a qualified
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway specialist workshop.
Rthe system detects solid lane markings Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-
The warning vibration occurs later in the follow- weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling
ing situations if: may cause damage.
Rthe road has narrow lanes Damage may be caused to the following:
Ryou cut the corner on a bend Rtowing vehicle
Rtrailer
Z
236 Towing a trailer
Rball coupling Rdemands more sensitive steering

Rtrailer tow hitch Rhas a larger turning circle
The vehicle/trailer combination could become This can impair the vehicle's handling charac-
unstable. teristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The vehicle/trailer combination could also Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully.
become unstable if the noseweight used is lower When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed
than the minimum permissible noseweight. to the current road and weather conditions. Do
To avoid hazardous situations: not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle/trailer combination.
Driving and parking
Rmake sure to check the noseweight before

each journey
Rthe noseweight should be as close as possible
to the maximum noseweight
Notes on towing a trailer
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible General notes
noseweight
Rthe noseweight must not be lower than the When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure on
minimum permissible noseweight the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maxi-
mum load. Further information on the tyre pres-
Make sure that the following values are not
sure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 379).
exceeded:
You will find permissible trailer loads under
Rthe permissible noseweight "Technical data" (Y page 403).
Rthe permissible trailer load
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing Driving tips
vehicle
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle Observe the information on ESP® trailer stabili-
weight of both the towing vehicle and the sation (Y page 79).
trailer The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
The applicable permissible values, which must trailer combinations depends on the type of
not be exceeded, can be found: trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
trailer's documents to see what the maximum
Rin your vehicle documents
permitted speed is. Observe the maximum per-
Ron the type plates for the trailer missible speed in the relevant country.
Ron the vehicle identification plate For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the per-
If the values differ, the lowest value applies. missible rear axle load is increased when towing
You will find permissible trailer loads under a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find
"Technical data" (Y page 403). out whether this applies to your vehicle
(Y page 403). In the event of increased rear axle
When reversing the towing vehicle, make sure
load, the car/trailer combination may not
there is nobody between the trailer and the vehi-
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for rea-
cle.
sons concerning the operating permit. This also
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you applies in countries in which the maximum per-
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle missible speed for car/trailer combinations is
correctly, the trailer could become detached. greater than 100 km/h.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different from when driv- characteristics will be different to when driving
ing without a trailer. without a trailer and the vehicle will consume
The vehicle/trailer combination: more fuel.
Ris heavier Shift to a lower gear in good time on long and
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- steep downhill gradients.
climbing capability This also applies in the case of:
Rhas an increased braking distance Ractivated Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Ractivated cruise control
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so Swivelling out using the switch on the
less braking will be required to maintain the driver's door
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the
brake system and prevents the brakes from
overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need
additional braking, depress the brake pedal
repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving tips
Driving and parking

Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle in
front than when driving without a trailer
Ravoid braking abruptly and, if possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on –
then, increase the braking force rapidly
Rthe values given for gradient-climbing capa- X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level, X Shift the transmission to position j.
when driving in mountainous areas, note that X Switch the ignition on.
the power output of the engine, and conse-
quently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa- X Pull switch : briefly.
bility from a standstill, decrease with increas- After a short time, the ball coupling swivels
ing altitude out from under the rear bumper. It can take up
to seven seconds before the ball coupling
If the trailer swings from side to side: visibly swivels out.
X Do not accelerate under any circumstances. X Remove the protective cap from the ball cou-
X Do not countersteer. pling and store it in a safe place.
X Brake, if necessary. Until the ball coupling vertically engages in a
securely locked position:
Rindicator lamp ; flashes
Swivelling the ball coupling in/out Rthe Trailer coupling extending… mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display
Important safety notes If the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in the
swivel range, the ball coupling swivels back into
G WARNING the starting position.
If the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailer
may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Swivelling out using the switch on the
Make sure that the ball coupling is securely tailgate
engaged and locked in position.
! Do not attempt to speed the up the swing-

out procedure by applying additional pressure
with your foot. The system could otherwise be
mechanically damaged.
In order to tow a trailer with the vehicle, you
must swivel the ball coupling out.
You can swivel the ball coupling out by means of
the switch on the driver's door or the tailgate.
The trailer socket is integrated into the ball cou-
pling and swivels out with it.
Swivel the ball coupling in or out only when the X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
swivel range is unobstructed. X Open the tailgate.
Z
X Pull switch : briefly. The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels position if:
out from under the rear bumper. It can take up Ryou drive off before the Trailer coupling
to seven seconds before the ball coupling extending… display message has disap-
visibly swivels out. peared from the multifunction display
X Remove the protective cap from the ball cou-
Rthe ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
pling and store it in a safe place. the swivel range
Until the ball coupling vertically engages in a
securely locked position:
Driving and parking
Swivelling in using the switch on the

Rindicator lamp ; flashes tailgate
Rthe Trailer coupling extending… mes-
If the ball coupling encounters an obstacle in the
swivel range, the ball coupling swivels back into
the starting position.
Swivelling in using the switch on the

driver's door
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

the trailer cables are disconnected.
X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling.
X Pull switch : briefly.
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels in
under the rear bumper. It can take up to seven
seconds before the ball coupling visibly swiv-
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and els in.
the trailer cables are disconnected. Until the ball coupling engages in a securely
X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. locked position under the bumper:
X Shift the transmission to position j. Rindicator lamp ; flashes
X Switch the ignition on. Rthe Trailer coupling extending… mes-
X Pull switch : briefly. sage appears on the multifunction display
After a short time, the ball coupling swivels in The ball coupling swivels back into the starting
under the rear bumper. It can take up to seven position if:
seconds before the ball coupling visibly swiv-
Ryou drive off before the Trailer coupling
els in.
extending… display message has disap-
Until the ball coupling engages in a securely peared from the multifunction display
locked position under the bumper:
Rthe ball coupling encounters an obstacle in
Rindicator lamp ; flashes the swivel range
Rthe Trailer coupling extending… mes- Further information on:
Rdisplay messages when a trailer is being
towed (Y page 293)
Rproblems when swivelling the ball coupling
(Y page 241)
Coupling up a trailer ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged

overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
X Apply the electric parking brake manually. be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
X Shift the transmission to position j. brake.
X Position the trailer on a level surface behind
! Remove the adapter cable before folding in
the vehicle. the ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-
X Couple up the trailer. age the rear bumper and the adapter cable.
X Establish the electrical connection between
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
the vehicle and the trailer.
Driving and parking

X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
ing.
X Push the combination switch upwards and X Secure the vehicle and trailer against rolling
downwards and check whether the corre- away.
sponding turn signal on the trailer is flashing. X Remove the trailer cable and uncouple the
A connected trailer is detected only when the trailer.
electrical connection is established correctly
and when the lighting system is working prop-
erly. The function of other systems also depends Trailer power supply
on this, for example:
RESP®
! Accessories with a maximum power con-
sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
RPARKTRONIC Parking Assist permanent power supply.
RParking Pilot The trailer battery may not be charged from
RActive Blind Spot Assist the power supply.
RActive Lane Keeping Assist When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer
socket is equipped with a permanent power
supply and a power supply that is switched on
Uncoupling a trailer via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
G WARNING trailer socket pin 9.
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over- The power supply that is switched on via the
run brake, you could trap your hand between ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10.
the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses The trailer's permanent power supply is
a risk of injury. switched off in the event of low on-board voltage
and after six hours at the latest.
Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
You can find more information about installing
overrun brake. the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G WARNING To activate the switched power supply:
Vehicles with level control: X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle (Y page 153).
is lowered. This can cause you or others to or
become trapped between the vehicle body X Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles
and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
poses a risk of injury. function (Y page 154).
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate
vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the
vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.
Z
To deactivate the switched power supply: Fitting the adapter

X Turn the key to position g in the ignition lock
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play
(Y page 153). so that the cable cannot become detached
or when cornering.
X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start ! Remove the adapter cable before folding in
function (Y page 154). the ball coupling. You could otherwise dam-
age the rear bumper and the adapter cable.
Driving and parking
Failure check for LEDs

If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunc-
tion message may appear in the multifunction
display even if there is no fault. The reason for
the error message may be that the current has
fallen below the minimum of 50 mA.
To ensure reliable operation of the failure indi-
cator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must
be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA.
X Open the socket cover.

Trailer with 7-pin connector X Insert the connector with lug : into groove
= on the socket.
General notes X Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the
Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect stop.
to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using X Let the cover engage.
an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the
Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist cable to the trailer with cable ties.
workshop.
Problems towing a trailer

The ball coupling has RThe indicator lamp on the button flashes.
been swivelled in but RThe Trailer coupling Check lock message appears on the
does not reach the multifunction display.
securely locked position.
X Initiate a new swivelling procedure.
Driving and parking

If the ball coupling does not reach the securely locked position as a
result:
X Start the engine.
or
X Pull and hold the switch during the whole swivelling procedure.
If the unlocked ball coupling does not reach the securely locked posi-
tion even after several attempts:
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance before continu-
ing the journey.
As long as the message Trailer coupling Check lock is shown on
the multifunction display, no trailer should be attached.
Unlocking using the The on-board voltage is too low.
button on the tailgate: X Start the engine.
The ball coupling does
not swivel out even If the ball coupling still does not unlock:
though: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthe vehicle is station-
ary
Rno trailer cable is con-
nected
Rthe switch was briefly
pulled
Z
242 Bicycle rack

Unlocking using the The on-board voltage is too low.
button on the driver's X Engage parking position j.
door:
X Switch on the power supply.
The ball coupling does
not swivel out even or
though: X Start the engine.
If the ball coupling still does not unlock:

Driving and parking
Rthe vehicle is station-

ary X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rno trailer cable is con-
nected
The ball coupling does There is a malfunction in the release electronics.
not swivel out or in. The X When the ball coupling is swivelled in: pull and hold the switch
indicator lamp in the on the tailgate until the ball coupling vertically engages in a securely
switch is flashing perma- locked position and then engages again under the bumper.
nently. The Trailer
coupling Check lock X When the ball coupling is swivelled out: pull and hold the switch
message appears on the on the tailgate until the ball coupling engages under the bumper.
multifunction display. If the ball coupling still does not unlock:
Bicycle rack To transport bicycles with a total weight

between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle
General notes racks with additional support on the guide
pin ;.

G WARNING
The bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle if
you
Rexceed the permissible payload of the
trailer tow hitch
Ruse the bicycle rack incorrectly
Trailer tow hitch (example with additional Rattach the bicycle rack to the ball coupling
guide pin) beneath the ball head
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, you can There is a risk of an accident.
transport up to four bicycles on it:
For your safety and that of other road users,
RWhen attached by clamping onto the ball cou-
pling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. You
can transport up to three bicycles. RAlways observe the permissible payload of
RWhen attached to the ball coupling : and the trailer tow hitch.
also the guide pin ;, the maximum payload is RUse the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles. cles.
The payload is calculated from the weight of the
bicycle rack and the load of the bicycle rack.
Bicycle rack 243
RAlways attach the bicycle rack correctly by Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving char-
clamping onto the ball head and, if possible, acteristics to change. The vehicle
to the guide pin on the ball coupling as well. Ris heavier
RTo transport four bicycles, always use bicy- Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
cle racks with additional support on the ball
Rhas an increased braking distance
coupling's guide pin.
This can impair the vehicle's handling charac-
RUse only bicycle racks approved by
teristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Driving and parking

Mercedes-Benz. Maintain a safe distance and drive carefully.
RAlways comply with the bicycle rack's oper- When using bicycle racks, set the tyre pressure
ating manual. on the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximum
load. Further information on tyre pressure can
! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using be found on the tyre pressure table
them incorrectly can cause damage to and (Y page 379).
fractures in the trailer tow hitch.
Use only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Loading instructions
The greater the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the higher the load
exerted on the trailer tow hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RAttach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
RAlways distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longi-
tudinal axis.
Before loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from the
bicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerody-
namic resistance and the bicycle rack's centre of gravity.
Always secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear visibility.
The aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitch
as a result.
Z
244
Driving and parking Bicycle rack
Load distribution on the bicycle rack

: Height between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling
; Distance to the rear between the centre of gravity and the ball coupling
= Centre of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicle
When loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:
Number of bicycles Total weight of bicy- Max. distance : Max. distance ;
cle rack and load
3 up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
45 up to 100 kg5 420 mm 400 mm
5 When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks with
additional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.
Displays and operation 245
Important safety notes Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting
G WARNING
On-board computer and displays

If you operate information and communica-
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
driving, you could be distracted from the traf-
fic situation. This could also cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this,
stop the vehicle paying attention to road and
traffic conditions and operate the equipment
with the vehicle stationary. The lighting on the instrument cluster, on the
displays and the controls in the vehicle interior
You must observe the legal requirements for the can be adjusted using brightness control
country in which you are currently driving when knob :.
operating the on-board computer.
X Turn brightness control knob : up or down.
G WARNING If you turn the light switch (Y page 121) to the
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- T, Ã or L position, the brightness
will depend upon the brightness of the ambi-
functioned, you may not recognise function
ent light.
restrictions relevant to safety. The operating
safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There i The light sensor on the instrument cluster
is a risk of an accident. automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- In daylight, the displays on the instrument
cluster are lit. A dimming function is not pos-
ately. sible in daylight.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos-
sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Speedometer with segments
The on-board computer shows only display mes- The speedometer is divided into segments
sages or warnings from certain systems on the depending on the vehicle's equipment.
multifunction display. You should therefore The segments in the speedometer indicate
make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all which speed range is available.
times.
RCruise control enabled (Y page 189):
For an overview, see the instrument cluster illus-
tration (Y page 38). The segments light up from the stored speed
HYBRID vehicles: be sure to observe the sep- to the end of the scale or to a permanently set
speed limitation.
arate operating instructions. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognise dangers. RSpeed limiter activated (Y page 191):
The segments light up from the start of the
scale to the selected speed limitation.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
(Y page 193):
Z
246 Displays and operation
One or two segments in the stored speed Under normal operating conditions and with the
range light up. correct coolant level, the display may rise to
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in 120 †.
front moving more slowly than the stored
speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehi- Operating the on-board computer
cle in front and the stored speed light up.
Rev counter
! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing
so will damage the engine.
The red band in the rev counter indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis- : Multifunction display
play indicates the measured air temperature ; Right control panel
and not the road surface temperature. = Left control panel
The outside temperature display is in the multi- X To activate the on-board computer: switch
function display (Y page 247).
on the power supply.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay. You can control the multifunction display and
the settings on the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Coolant temperature display Left control panel
G WARNING ò ROpens the menu list

If you open the bonnet while the engine is 9 Press briefly:
overheating or while there is a fire in the : RScrolls through lists
engine compartment, you could come into RSelects a menu or function
contact with hot gases or other leaking ser- ROn the Radio or Media menu:
vice products. There is a danger of injury. opens the track or station list and
Allow an overheating engine to cool down selects a station, audio track or
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in video
ROn the Telephone menu: switches
the engine compartment, leave the bonnet
to the telephone book and selects
closed and notify the fire brigade. a name or a telephone number
The coolant temperature display is shown in the
lower section of the rev counter (Y page 38).
At high outside temperatures and when driving
in mountainous terrain, the coolant temperature
may rise to the end of the scale.
Displays and operation 247
9 Press and hold: W RAdjusts the volume

: RScrolls quickly through all lists X
ROn the Radio or Media menu: 8 RMute

selects a station, audio track or
video using rapid scrolling ó RVehicles with Audio 20 multimedia
ROn the Telephone menu: starts

system:
rapid scrolling if the telephone Switches on voice control for nav-
book is open igation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
a ROn all menus: confirms the selec- RVehicles with COMAND Online
ted entry in the list multimedia system:
ROn the Radio or Media menu: Switches on LINGUATRONIC (see
opens the list of available radio the separate operating instruc-
sources or media tions)
ROn the Telephone menu: switches
to the telephone book and starts
dialling the selected number
Multifunction display
ñ RVehicles with Audio 20 multimedia
system:
switches off voice control for nav-
igation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND Online
multimedia system:
Switches off LINGUATRONIC (see
the separate operating instruc-
tions)
% Press briefly:
RBack
ROn the Radio or Media menu: exits
the track or station list or list of
available radio sources or media
RHides display messages
RExits the telephone book/redial
: Drive program (Y page 165)
memory
; Transmission position (Y page 165)
% Press and hold: = Additional speedometer
RCalls up the standard display on ? Display
the Trip menu A Time
B Outside temperature (Y page 246)
Right control panel Display panel ? shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
~ RRejects or ends a call
X To open the menu list: press ò on the
RExitsthe telephone book/redial steering wheel.
memory The menu list appears on display panel ?.
6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
Z
248 Displays and operation
Possible readings on the multifunction dis- The visibility of the Head-up Display is influ-
play: enced by the following conditions:
RZ Gearshift recommendation for manual gear- Rthe driver's seat position
shifting (Y page 171) Rthe positioning of the display image
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 208) Rthe general light conditions

RÈ Limiter (Y page 247) Rsunglasses with polarisation filters
R¯ Cruise control (Y page 188) Rwet road surfaces
Ra Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot Rblocking of the beam by objects on the display
(Y page 198) cover
RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may
(Y page 201) be faded. This can be corrected by switching the
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Head-up Display off and on again.
(Y page 125)
i Vehicles with the Head-up Display are
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
equipped with a special windscreen. Should
(Y page 126) repairs be necessary, have the windscreen
Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 157) replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rë HOLD function (Y page 200)
Rð Maximum permissible speed exceeded Displays and operation
(for certain countries only)
Switching the head-up display on/off
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance
system above the dashboard into the driver's
field of vision. This allows the head-up display to
collect information without your having to take
your eyes off the road.
For the content to be displayed, the following
functions must be available in the vehicle and
switched on: X Press the : button.
Rcruise control When the head-up display is switched on, the
display appears in the driver's field of vision.
Rspeed limiter
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
RTraffic Sign Assist
Rnavigation

The Head-up Display is only an aid and is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not
always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always
have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Menus and submenus 249
Standard displays on the head-up display Using the Display content function, you
can, depending on your vehicle's equipment,
choose between four standard displays. The
selected content then appears on the head-
up display.

In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can choose
between further AMG displays in addition to
the standard displays, depending on your
vehicle's equipment.
If you select a display with traffic signs, traffic
signs detected by Traffic Sign Assist appear
on the head-up display.
: Navigation instructions
; Current speed Menus and submenus
= Detected instructions and traffic signs Menu overview
? Cruise control, speed limiter or Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC set speed Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
AMG displays on the head-up display Operating the on-board computer (Y page 246).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 249)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 251)
RRadio menu (Y page 253)
RMedia menu (Y page 253)
RTelephone menu (Y page 255)
RAssistance graphic menu (Y page 256)
RService menu (Y page 257)
RSettings menu (Y page 257)
: Protection against reaching the overrevving
range RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles
; RACE TIMER lap (Y page 262)
= RACE TIMER lap time
? Current speed
A Currently selected gear, gearshift options Trip menu
with manual gearshifting Standard display
B Current engine speed
Setting options
You can make the following settings on the
head-up display submenu:
Radjust the position of the head-up display on
the windscreen (Y page 259)
Radjust the brightness of the displays on the
head-up display (Y page 259)
Rselect which information you want to appear
on the head-up display (Y page 259)
Z
250 Menus and submenus
X Press and hold the % button on the steer- If the ignition remains switched off for longer
ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
meter : and total distance recorder ; matically reset.
appears. Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 181).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption Trip computer "From start" or "From
reset"
: Range of fuel in tank

; Current fuel consumption : Distance
= Recuperation display ; Driving time
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the = Average speed
menu list. ? Average fuel consumption
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
select the Trip menu. menu list.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
wheel. select the Trip menu.
X Using 9 or :, select the display. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
Approximate range : that can be covered is wheel.
calculated according to your current driving X Press : or 9 to select From start or
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If only From reset.
reset
a small amount of fuel is left in the fuel tank, a The values on the From start submenu are
vehicle being refuelled C appears instead calculated from the start of a journey, while
of approximate range :. the values on the From reset submenu are
Recuperation display = shows you whether calculated from the last time this submenu
energy has been recuperated from the kinetic was reset (Y page 251).
energy in overrun mode and saved in the bat- The trip computer is automatically reset in the
tery. Recuperation display = depends on the following cases From start:
start
engine installed and is therefore not available Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
in all vehicles. than four hours
R999 hours have been exceeded
ECO display R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the When 9999 hours or 99,999 kilometres have
menu list. been exceeded, the trip computer is auto-
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
matically resetFrom
From reset.
reset
select the Trip menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select ECO display.
Digital speedometer X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the Navi menu.
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
menu list. wheel.

Route guidance not active
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the digital
speedometer.
Resetting values
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
wheel.
: Direction of travel
X Press : or 9 to select the function that
you wish to reset. ; Current road
X Press a briefly.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to
Route guidance active
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func- No change of direction announced
tions:
Rtrip meter
R"From start" trip computer
R"From reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values on the "ECO display",
the values in the "From start" trip computer
are also reset. If you reset the values on the
"From start" trip computer, the values on the
"ECO display" are also reset.
: Distance to the next destination

Navigation menu ; Estimated time of arrival
= Distance to the next change of direction
Displaying navigation instructions ? Current road
On the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-
ther information on navigation instructions in
the Digital Owner's Manual in the multimedia
system.
X Switch on the multimedia system.
menu list.
Z
Change of direction announced with a Change of direction without lane recom-

lane recommendation mendation
: Target of the change of direction : Road to which the change of direction leads
; Distance to the change of direction ; Distance to change of direction and visual
= Change-of-direction symbol distance display
? Recommended lane and new lane during a = Change-of-direction symbol
change of direction (white) When a change of direction is to be made, you
A Possible lane will see symbol = for the change of direction
B Lane not recommended (dark grey) and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards
the top of the display as you approach the point
On multi-lane roads, new lane recommenda-
of the announced change of direction. The
tions can be displayed for the next change of
change of direction starts once the distance dis-
direction if the digital map supports this data.
play reaches zero.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added. Change of direction with lane recommen-
Lane not recommended B: you will not be able dation
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Possible lane A: you will be able to complete
the next change of direction only in this lane.
Recommended lane ?: in this lane, you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
: Road to which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
? Lane recommendation
Other status indicators of the naviga- = Artist name

tion system ? Track name
The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset

position is displayed along with station ; only if
this has been stored. You can store radio sta-
tions in the multimedia system.
menu list.
select the Radio menu.
wheel.
: Additional information
Currently set station ; appears on the mul-
Other possible additional information: tifunction display.
RNew route... or Calculating route... X To open the channel list: press the : or
A new route is calculated. 9 button briefly.
RRoad not mapped X To select a station in the station list: press
the : or 9 button briefly.
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognised, e.g. X To select a station in the station list using
new roads, car parks or private land. rapid scrolling: press and hold the : or
RNo route
9 button.
X To select the waveband or station mem-
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination. ory: press a briefly.
X Press : or 9 to select the waveband or
ROff map
station memory.
The map for the current vehicle position is not
X Press a to confirm the selection.
available.
RO i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-
You have reached the destination or an inter- ing) is an optimised digital transmission
mediate destination. standard designed for the mobile reception of
radio transmissions.
Radio menu
Media menu
Changing the media source
You can change the media source and playback
mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the
Media menu.
menu list.
select the Media menu.
: Waveband
; Station with preset position
Z
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X To select an audio player or audio media:

wheel. press a briefly. The list containing the
X To open the media sources list: press a media sources appears.
briefly. X Press : or 9 to select the correspond-
The list shows the following media sources, ing audio player or media.
for example: X Press a to confirm.
RCD or DVD (DVD only in COMAND Online X To open the track list: press the : or
multimedia system) 9 button briefly.
RSD card X To select the next or previous track in the
Rmedia register (only in COMAND Online track list: press the : or 9 button
multimedia system) briefly.
RUSB storage device X To select a track from the track list using
RBluetooth®-capable audio equipment rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9
until the desired track is shown.
Please observe further information on media
support and media operation in the multimedia If you press and hold the button, the speed of
system (see Digital Owner's Manual). rapid scroll increases. Not all audio players or
media support this function.
Operating the audio player or audio If the corresponding track information is stored
media on the audio drive or audio media, the following
is shown on the multifunction display:
Rtrack number
Rtrack name
Rartist name
Ralbum
The track information does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Operating the DVD-Video
: Media source, e.g. name of USB memory

stick
; Current track
= Artist name
? Album name
A Folder name
Audio files from various audio players or media
can be played, depending on the equipment fit-
ted in the vehicle.
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the X Switch on the multimedia system.
menu list. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to menu list.
select the Media menu. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering select the Media menu.
wheel. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X To select a DVD drive or DVD media: press X To select a channel in the channel list:
a briefly. The list containing the media press the : or 9 button briefly.
sources appears. X To select a channel in the channel list
X Press : or 9 to select the correspond- using rapid scrolling: press and hold

ing DVD single drive or disc. the : or 9 button.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm the selection.
X To open the scene list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X To select the next or previous scene in the Telephone menu
scene list: press the : or 9 button
briefly. Introduction
X To select a scene from the scene list using
rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 G WARNING
until desired scene : is shown. If you operate information and communica-
X Press a to confirm the selection. tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
Operating the TV fic situation. This could also cause you to lose
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this,
with the vehicle stationary.
When using the phone, you must observe the

legal requirements for the country in which you
are currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
: TV channel with preset facturer's operating instructions).
; Programme information, e.g. the name of X Switch on the multimedia system.
the film
X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket.
= Name of channel list
or
The preset position is displayed only along with X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul-
TV channel : if this has been stored. You can
store TV channels in the multimedia system. timedia system (see Digital Owner's Manual).
menu list.
menu list.
select the Telephone menu.
select the Media menu.
wheel.
wheel. You will see one of the following display mes-
sages on the multifunction display:
X To select TV: press a briefly. The list con-
taining the media sources appears. RTelephone ready or the name of the net-
X Press : or 9 to select TV. work provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
X Press a to confirm.
RTelephone No service
service: there is no network
X To open the channel list: press the : or
available or the mobile phone is searching for
9 button briefly. a network.
Z
i You can obtain further information about X If more than one number is stored for a
suitable mobile phones and connecting name: press the 6 or a button to dis-
mobile phones via Bluetooth®: play the numbers.
Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedes- X Press : or 9 to select the number you
benz.com/connect want to dial.

Rat any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ling.
Accepting a call or
X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or
If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐ % button briefly.
phone menu, a display message appears on the
multifunction display.
Redialling
You can accept a call at any time irrespective of
the selected menu. The on-board computer saves the last names or
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel numbers dialled in the redial memory.
to accept an incoming call. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
Rejecting or ending a call X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Telephone menu.
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
to reject or end the call. wheel.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
Selecting an entry in the phone book memory.
X Press : or 9 to select the desired
menu list. name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
select the Telephone menu. ling.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering or
wheel. X To exit the redial memory: press the ~
X Press :, 9 or a to switch to the or % button briefly.
phone book.
X Press : or 9 to select the names one
after the other. Assistant display menu
or
X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
or 9 for longer than one second.
The names are displayed quickly one after the
other in the phone book.
If you press and hold the : or 9 button
for longer than five seconds, the name
appears with the next or previous letter initial
letter in the alphabet.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
start dialling. menu list.
or X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Assistance graphic menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 to select the AdBlue

wheel. submenu.
The assistant display shows you the status of X Press a to confirm the selection.
and/or information from the following driving The range and AdBlue® level appear in a bar
systems or driving safety systems:

graph on the multifunction display.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC distance display
Observe the information and notes on "Refuel-
(Y page 197)
ling" (Y page 175).
RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 226)
RDistance warning function and autono-
mous brake function of Active Brake Assist Settings menu
(Y page 73)
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func- Introduction
tion (Y page 80)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 227) or Active Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehi-
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 230) cle, you have the following options in the Set‐
tings menu:
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 224)
RChange assistance settings (Y page 257)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 228) or Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 233) RChange head-up display settings
RÃ Downhill Speed Regulation
(Y page 259)
(Y page 201) RChange light settings (Y page 260)
RRear window wiper (Y page 132) RChange instrument cluster settings
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 260)
assessment. RChange vehicle settings (Y page 261)
RRestore factory settings (Y page 261)
Service menu Assistance submenu
Introduction Traffic Sign Assist

You can activate or deactivate the warning func-
Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehi-
tion of Traffic Sign Assist on the Traffic Sign
cle, you have the following options on the Ser‐
Assist menu. When the message function is
vice menu:
activated, detected traffic signs and information
Rcall up display messages in the message appear on the multifunction display for five sec-
memory (Y page 266) onds.
Rrestart the tyre pressure loss warning system X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
(Y page 381) or checking the tyre pressure menu list.
electronically (Y page 382) X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
Rcall up the service due date (Y page 349) select the Settings menu.
Rdisplay the AdBlue® level and range X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
(Y page 257) wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance
Displaying the AdBlue® level and range submenu.
menu list. X Select Traffic Sign Assist by press-

ing : or 9.
select the Service menu. X Press a to confirm.

The current selection appears.
wheel. X Activate or deactivate the warning func-
tion: press a again.
Z
For further information about Traffic Sign Assist, Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
see (Y page 225). X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
Activating/deactivating Active Brake menu list.
Assist
select the Settings menu.

menu list.
wheel.
submenu.
wheel.
X Select Blind Spot Assist by pressing :
submenu. or 9.
The current selection appears.
X Select Brake Assist by pressing 9
X To activate/deactivate: press a again.
or :.
X Press a to confirm. Further information about Blind Spot Assist
The current selection appears. (Y page 227).
X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Further information about Active Blind Spot
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the Assist (Y page 230).
æ symbol appears on the Assistance
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
graphic menu of the multifunction display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist menu list.
(Y page 73).
Activating/deactivating Active Brake select the Settings menu.
Assist with cross-traffic function X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is avail- wheel.
able only in vehicles with the Driving Assistance X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance
package. submenu.
menu list. X Select Attention Assist by pressing :
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to or 9.
select the Settings menu. X Press a to confirm.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 to select Deactivated
wheel. Standard or Sensitive
Sensitive.
X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance X Press button a to confirm the selection.
submenu. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
X Press a to confirm. é symbol appears in the Assistance
graphic menu on the multifunction display.
X Select Brake Assist by pressing : or
9. Further information about ATTENTION ASSIST
X Press a to confirm. (Y page 224).
The current selection appears. Setting Lane Keeping Assist
When Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic menu list.
function is deactivated, the æ symbol
appears on the Assistance graphic menu
of the multifunction display. select the Settings menu.
Further information on Active Brake Assist with wheel.
cross-traffic function (Y page 80).
X Press : or 9 to select the Assistance X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up

submenu. display submenu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
X Select Lane Keeping Assist by press- X Select Display content by pressing : or

ing : or 9. 9.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
The current selection Standard or Adaptive A graphical selection list appears.
appears. X Press : or 9 to select the desired dis-
X To change the setting: press a again. play.
Further information about Lane Keeping Assist X Press a to confirm the selection.
(Y page 228). You can find more information on the navigation
Further information about Active Lane Keeping displays in the multimedia system (see Digital
Assist (Y page 233). Owner's Manual).
Information on Traffic Sign Assist displays
Head-up display submenu (Y page 225).
Selecting other displays Setting the position

You can adjust the position of the head-up dis-
play on the windscreen. You can compensate for
height differences if the seat positions are
changed, for example.
X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 248).
menu list.
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up
: Vehicle speed display display submenu.
; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction X Press a to confirm.
display X Press : or 9 to select the Position
= Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist function.
You have up to four different display options X Press a to save the setting.
with the Display content function, depending X Press : or 9 to adjust the position to a
on the vehicle's equipment. The selected con- level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).
tent appears on the head-up display.
X Press a or % to save the setting.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose
between two AMG displays. If you select an Using the Memory function, you can save and
AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG- call up the set position of the head-up display as
specific content. a single memory preset (Y page 119).
If you select a display with traffic signs, traffic Adjusting the brightness
signs detected by Traffic Sign Assist appear on
the head-up display. The brightness of the head-up display is auto-
matically adjusted to the surrounding light con-
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the ditions. You can also individually adjust the
menu list. brightness of the Head-up Display.
X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 248).
menu list.
wheel.
Z
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to only if the setting for driving on the left/right is
select the Settings menu. set opposite to your vehicle's country version.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Further information on the Intelligent Light Sys-
wheel. tem (Y page 124).
X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up

display submenu. Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for
driving on the left/right
X Press : or 9 to select the Brightness This function is available only in vehicles with
function. the Intelligent Light System.
X Press a to save the setting. You can use this function to switch between
symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam
X Press : or 9 to adjust the brightness
(Y page 121).
to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5
(dark). X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
X Press a or % to save the setting.

menu list.
Light submenu X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Switching the Intelligent Light System X Press : or 9 to select the Lights
on/off submenu.
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the X Press a to confirm.
menu list. X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to beams Setting for function.
select the Settings menu. You will see the selected setting, right-
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering side traffic or left-side traffic.
traffic
wheel. X Press a to save the setting.
X Press : or 9 to select the Lights If you change the setting, conversion does not
submenu. take place until the next time the vehicle is
X Press a to confirm. stationary.
X Press : or 9 to select the Intelli‐ If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driv-
gent Light System function. ing on the right/left, then motorway mode and
If the Intelligent Light System function the extended range foglamps are unavailable.
has been switched on, the cone of light is These are deactivated only if the setting for driv-
shown in white and the L symbol in yellow ing on the left/right is set opposite to your vehi-
on the multifunction display. cle's country version.
X Press a to save the setting. A qualified specialist workshop can set the
If you switch on the Intelligent Light Sys‐ dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/
tem function, the following functions are activa- right.
ted:
Rmotorway mode Instrument cluster submenu
Ractive light function
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
Rcornering light function
tance
Rextended range foglamps
The Display unit Speed-/odometer function
Roff-road lights
allows you to choose whether certain displays
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driv- appear in kilometres or miles on the multifunc-
ing on the right/left, the multifunction display tion display.
shows the Inactive for left-side traffic
or Inactive for right-side traffic dis-
menu list.
play message in the Lights submenu instead of
the Intelligent Light System function X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
(Y page 260). This display message will appear select the Settings menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Vehicle submenu

wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐ Setting the speed limiter
ment cluster submenu. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

X Press a to confirm. menu list.
X Press : or 9 to select the Display X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
unit Speed-/odometer function. select the Settings menu.
The current setting km or Miles appears. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press a to save the setting. wheel.
The selected unit of measurement for distance X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
applies to the following: submenu.
Rdigitalspeedometer on the Trip menu
X Press : or 9 to select the Limit
Rtotal distance recorder and the trip meter
speed (winter tyres) function.
Rtrip computer
The current setting appears.
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rnavigation instructions on the Navi menu
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
Rcruise control speed limiter in increments of ten (160
160 km/h
Rspeed limiter to 240 km/h).
km/h The Off setting switches the
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot speed limiter off.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press a to store the entry.
Further information about the speed limiter
Switching the additional speedometer (Y page 247).
on/off
United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. Restoring the factory settings
The additional speedometer is always switched
on. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
If the additional speedometer is switched on, menu list.
the speed is shown in the status bar of the mul- X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
tifunction display instead of the outside tem- select the Settings menu.
perature. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
The speed display is inverse to your speedome- wheel.
ter. X Press : or 9 to select the Factory
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the settings submenu.
menu list. X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to The Reset all settings? function
select the Settings menu. appears.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes Yes.
wheel. X Press a to confirm the selection.
X Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐ If you have selected Yes
Yes, the multifunction
ment cluster submenu. display shows a confirmation message.
X Press a to confirm. For safety reasons, not all functions will be
X Press : or 9 to select the Digital reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres)
speedo [km/h] function. speed limiter function can only be set on the
The current selection appears. Vehicle submenu.
Z
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X Switch on the display function for notes and
traffic signs (Y page 257).
Warm-up X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.
wheel.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until Traffic
Sign Assist appears.
G-Meter
: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator
= Charge-air pressure
? Engine oil temperature
A Transmission oil temperature
menu list.
select the AMG menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering While the vehicle is in motion, the G-Meter
wheel. shows the forces that are exerted on the driver
Engine and transmission fluid tempera- both laterally and in the direction of travel.
tures: when the engine and transmission are The maximum values are indicated in red in the
at normal operating temperature, oil temper- guideline system.
atures ? and A are displayed in white on the X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
multifunction display. menu list.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper- X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid using the full output of the X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
engine during this time. wheel.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the G-
Meter appears.
Traffic Sign Assist display
The maximum values of the G-Meter are
saved.
X To reset the G-Meter: press a again.
X Using : or 9 select Yes on the steer-
ing wheel.
The maximum values of the G-Meter are
deleted.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-
cally reset.
SETUP Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+/GLC 63

S 4MATIC+

(Example)
: Drive Eco
Eco/Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport/Sport
Sport +
; Suspension Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport/Sport
Sport +
(Example) = Steering Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport
: Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 4MATIC+: Drive ? ECO Start/Stop Active
Active/Inactive
Inactive/Off
Off
Comfort Sport/Sport
Comfort/Sport Sport + A ESP® On On/Off
Off or SPORT handling mode
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC+: Drive Sport
Comfort/Sport
Comfort Sport/Sport
Sport +/Race
+ Race
; Suspension Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport/Sport
Sport + SETUP displays the following functions and set-
tings:
= Transmission D/M M
? Exhaust system Comfort
Comfort/Sport
Sport + Rgear indicator
A ESP® On Rdigital speedometer

On/Off
Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport Rdrive system setting
Rsuspension mode
SETUP displays the following functions and set-
tings: Rsteering setting
Rgear indicator Rsetting of the ECO start/stop function
Rdigital speedometer RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status
Rdrive system setting

Select SETUP
Rsuspension mode
X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
Rtransmission position menu list.
Rexhaust flap position X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status select the AMG menu.
wheel.
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
Z
RACE TIMER X Press the : or 9 button to select New

Lap.
Lap
Displaying and starting the RACE TIMER X Press a to confirm.
A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.
Stopping the RACE TIMER
: Lap
; RACE TIMER
The RACE TIMER is intended only for use on a
designated race track. Do not use the function X Press : or 9 to select Stop
Stop.
on public roads. X Press a to confirm.
If the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on, you can start the RACE TIMER. Continuing the RACE TIMER
menu list.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly
until the RACE TIMER appears.
X To start: press a to start the RACE TIMER.
Starting a new lap

X Press : or 9 to select Continue
Continue.
Resetting the RACE TIMER
: Lap
; RACE TIMER
= Quickest lap time
Display messages 265
X Press : or 9 to select StopStop. = Average lap speed

The RACE TIMER is stopped. ? Lap length
X Press : or 9 to select Reset
Reset.
This function is only available if you have stored
X Press a to confirm. at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-

All laps are deleted. TIMER.
Lap evaluation list of menus.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select Lap
List.
List
The lap evaluation appears.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
: Lap
; Lap time
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from
the symbols in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Owner's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 200)
RParking (Y page 178)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Z
266 Display messages
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, the No messages display appears on the multifunction display.
When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.
X Press : or 9 to scroll through the display messages.
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily unavailable.
currently unavaila‐ Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
ble See Owner's Man‐
ual In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up on the instru-
ment cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.
X Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering
movements at speeds of above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Own‐
er's Manual In addition, the J, ÷ and ! warning lamps may light up on
the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
Z
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
inoperative See Own‐

er's Manual The ÷ warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking sit-
uation.
÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

currently unavaila‐
ble See Owner's Man‐ The ÷ warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
ual The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking sit-
uation.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering
movements at speeds of above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are faulty.
÷

In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up on the instru-
inoperative See Own‐ ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
er's Manual
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
! Red indicator lamp ! lights up.

You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
Turn on the igni‐ was switched off.
tion to release the
X Switch the ignition on.
parking brake
! Red indicator lamp ! flashes and a warning tone sounds. A con-

dition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled
Release parking (Y page 180).
brake You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Red indicator lamp ! flashes and a warning tone sounds.

You are initiating emergency braking using the electric parking brake
(Y page 181).
! Yellow warning lamp ! lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
Parking brake See
To apply:
Owner's Manual
X Switch the ignition off.
X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Z

Yellow warning lamp ! and red indicator lamp ! are lit.
To release:
X Switch the ignition off and then on again.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
Red indicator lamp ! flashes and the yellow warning lamp ! is

lit.
To release:
To apply:
If red indicator lamp ! continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 386).
X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.
Yellow warning lamp ! lights up. Red indicator lamp ! flashes

for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been
applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.
If you cannot apply the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:



Yellow warning lamp ! lights up. If you manually apply or release
the electric parking brake, red indicator lamp ! flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking
brake cannot be applied manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j as the electric parking brake is
not applied automatically.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

! Yellow warning lamp ! lights up. Red indicator lamp ! flashes

for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been
Parking brake inop‐ applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.
erative The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
voltage or undervoltage.
X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charg-
ing the battery or restarting the engine.
X Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released:

X Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
Red indicator lamp ! flashes and yellow warning lamp ! is lit.

The electric parking brake cannot be applied manually.
J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, red warning lamp J lights up on the instrument cluster
Check brake fluid and a warning tone sounds.
level
G WARNING
Braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not drive on.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault.
Z
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check brake pad wear
G Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia system:

One or more main features of the Mercedes-Benz Contact system is/
Inoperative are malfunctioning.
One or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is/
are malfunctioning.
G Vehicles with COMAND Online multimedia system:

One or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is/
Inoperative are malfunctioning.
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Functions currently Possible causes:
limited See Owner's
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
Manual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive
Functions limited Brake Assist may also have failed.
See Owner's Manual X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE inopera‐ Important PRE-SAFE® functions have failed. All other occupant safety
tive See Owner's systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Manual X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-
Functions currently tive.

limited See Owner's Possible causes:
Manual
Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is operational again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 77).
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is unavailable due to a
Functions limited malfunction.
See Owner's Manual X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z

Radar sensors dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Owner's Manual Possible causes:
Rdirt on sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rdriving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in
desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
If the front radar system sensor is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
driving safety systems will be available again. The display message
disappears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 354).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up on the instrument cluster.
Restraint sys. mal‐
function Consult G WARNING
workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally
or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
Further information on the restraint system (Y page 45).
6 The front left or right restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6

warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
Front left malfunc‐
tion Consult work‐ G WARNING
shop or Front right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally
malfunction Consult or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear left or right restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6

warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.

Rear left malfunc‐
shop or Rear right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally
malfunction Consult or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear centre restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning

lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
Rear centre malfunc‐
shop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally
or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 The left-hand or right-hand windowbag is malfunctioning.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
Left windowbag mal‐
function Consult G WARNING
workshop or Right The left-hand or right-hand windowbag may either be triggered unin-
windowbag malfunc‐ tentionally or, in the event of an accident, not triggered at all.
tion Consult work‐
shop This poses an increased risk of injury.
Z

Front-passenger The front-passenger front airbag is disabled during the journey
airbag disabled See although:
Owner's Manual Ran adult

or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system
detects may be too low.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident.
and traffic conditions.
X Have the vehicle occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of
the vehicle.
X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps on the centre
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system
has disabled the front-passenger front airbag. (Y page 53)
Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual
or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual
display messages must not appear on the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear on the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied
again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains
lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front
airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly.
Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag
deactivation system (Y page 53).

Front-passenger The front-passenger front airbag is enabled during the journey
airbag enabled See although:

Owner's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are placing additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front airbag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and child seat from the front-passenger seat.
X Make sure that no objects are present that are applying additional
weight to the seat.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the vehicle seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps on the centre
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system
has disabled the front-passenger front airbag. (Y page 53)
Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual
or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual
display messages must not appear on the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear on the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied
again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains
lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front
airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly.
Z

Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag
deactivation system (Y page 53).
Lights
b The bulb in question is faulty.

Left dipped beam
(Example) or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 128).
i LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp
appears only when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b The Active Light System is malfunctioning.

Active Light System
inoperative
b The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system

continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent
Intell. Light Sys‐ Light System.
tem inoperative X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b The exterior lighting is faulty.

Malfunction See Own‐
er's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 373).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as
you do so.
If the display message still appears:
b The light sensor is malfunctioning.

AUTO lights inoper‐
ative
b You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.

Switch on headlamps
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Assist currently Possible causes:
unavailable See Own‐ Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
er's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X Clean the windscreen.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again display message
is shown.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

Assist inoperative X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inop-
Assist Plus cur‐ erative. Possible causes:
rently unavailable Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
See Owner's Manual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display mes-
sage is shown.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

Assist Plus inoper‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ative
Z
Engine
+
The coolant level is too low.
Top up coolant See ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Owner’s Manual cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X Top up the coolant, making sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 348).
If you have to top up the coolant frequently:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, drive on to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Stop vehi‐
cle Switch engine G WARNING
off Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has
overheated can cause any fluids that may have leaked into the engine
compartment to catch fire.
In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious
burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet.
There is a risk of injury.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic
conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message disappears
and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the correct coolant level,
the display may rise to 120 †.
# The battery is no longer being charged.


Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the charge status is too
low.
Stop vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Owner's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display
message.
# The battery charge status is too low.

Stop vehicle Leave and traffic conditions. Do not drive on.
engine running
X Start the engine.
X Wait until the display message disappears before driving on.
# The engine is off and the charge status is too low.

X Switch off any electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
Start engine See the rear window heating and interior lighting.
Owner's Manual
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for an extended
period.
The battery charges.
Z
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check eng. oil lev.

when next refuelling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling
system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.
X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling at the latest
(Y page 347).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 347).
If you have to top up the engine oil frequently:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 vehicles:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
Add 1 litre engine
oil when next refu‐ ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling
elling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.
X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling at the latest
(Y page 347).
If you have to top up the engine oil frequently:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 vehicles:

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
Engine oil level
Stop vehicle Switch
engine off conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 347).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops
Reserve fuel level into the reserve range.
C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated.
X You must refuel at the nearest filling station.
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine:

The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

Replace air cleaner
! Vehicles with a diesel engine:

There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐
ter
Refill AdBlue See The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone
Owner’s Manual also sounds.
X Refill AdBlue® as soon as possible (Y page 175).
Refill AdBlue No The AdBlue® level is sufficient only for the indicated distance. A warn-
start in ... mi ing tone also sounds.
X Refill AdBlue® immediately (Y page 175).
i If you drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 15 km/h, the
Refill AdBlue No start in ... mi message disappears after
approximately one minute.
Refill AdBlue Eng. The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no
start not possible longer start the engine.
X Add at least 5.0 l of AdBlue® (Y page 175).
X Turn the ignition on for approximately one minute.
The system requires approximately one minute after refilling to
detect the change in the AdBlue® level.
X Start the engine.
Check AdBlue See The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
Owner’s Manual X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Eng. start not pos‐ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
sible in ... mi X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Eng. start not pos‐ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
sible You can no longer start the engine.
Z
Driving systems
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver. A warning
ATTENTION ASSIST: tone also sounds.
Take a break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

ATTENTION ASSIST
inoperative
Á The vehicle rises to the level you have selected.
Vehicle rising
Á The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.
Vehicle rising X Do not pull away.
Please wait The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
Á You have pulled away while the vehicle level was too low.
AIR BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
Stop vehicle Vehi‐ period.
cle too low Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or
the tyres could be damaged if the steering input is too great.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the fault, it may be possible to raise the vehicle.
Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes:

Ryou are driving too quickly for the selected vehicle level

Please reduce speed
Ryou are driving too quickly with a trailer or the trailer tow hitch
socket is being used, e.g. for a rear-mounted cycle rack
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again
(Y page 205).
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 236).
Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes within a short space
Compressor is cool‐ of time.
ing X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
X Ensure sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-
appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected vehicle
level.
à AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling char-

acteristics may be impaired.
Malfunction Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling character-
istics may be impaired.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
80 km/h.
X Ensure sufficient ground clearance.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
currently unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative.
ble See Owner's Man‐ Possible causes:
ual or Active Lane
Keeping Assist cur‐ Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
rently unavailable Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
See Owner's Manual Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Z

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
inoperative or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping

Assist inoperative
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
currently unavaila‐ Possible causes:
ual or Active Blind Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range
Spot Assist cur‐ Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
rently unavailable tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
See Owner's Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated during
not available when trailer-towing.
towing a trailer You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and
See Owner's Manual your vehicle.
or Active Blind X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Spot Assist not
available when tow‐
ing a trailer See
Owner's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
inoperative or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Assist inoperative
Parking Pilot can‐ The driver's door is open.
celled X Repeat the parking space measurement and parking manoeuvre
with the driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-

vention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the
multifunction steering wheel.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 208).

Parking Pilot inop‐ Parking Pilot is malfunctioning or faulty.
erative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 215).
Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.

X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does

not appear on the multifunction display):
Park Assist ended The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a fault.

X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
inoperative
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
currently unavaila‐ Possible causes:
Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
ual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle has started to skid.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 201).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is no longer fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 200).
Distance Pilot off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 197).

If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
available again porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 193).
Z

Distance Pilot cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently unavailable Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.

disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
Distance Pilot inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is faulty.

erative The following may have also failed:
RSteering Pilot
Distance Pilot pas‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
sive is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 193).
Distance Pilot and Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the speed limiter are faulty. A warning
Limiter inoperative tone also sounds.
This means that Steering Pilot is also unavailable.

Steering Pilot cur‐ Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.
rently unavailable Possible causes:

See Owner's Manual
Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
Rthere have been no lane markings for a long time
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
disappears.
Steering Pilot is operational again.
Steering Pilot inop‐ Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.

erative However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.
Cruise control and Cruise control and speed limiter are faulty.
Limiter inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Speed limit (winter You have reached the stored speed limit for winter tyres. It is not
tyres) XXX mph possible to exceed this speed. You can suppress the display message
by pressing the a button. The display message will not reappear
until the ignition has been switched on again.
Limiter passive As you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance
(kickdown), the speed limiter is switched to passive mode.
The speed limitation is not active.
X Drive more slowly than the stored speed without kickdown.
or
X Set a new speed.
or
X Call up the last speed stored again.
When the display message disappears, the speed limitation is active.
Limiter - - - mph The speed limiter cannot be activated, since not all the activation
conditions have been met.
X Check the activation conditions for the speed limiter (Y page 190).
Z

Cruise control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example
RESP® is deactivated The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.

X If conditions permit, drive at a speed greater than 30 km/h and
store the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 188).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 77).
or
X Reactivate ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 77).
Cruise control off Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 188).
ð For certain countries only: the maximum speed has been exceeded.
X Drive more slowly.
Maximum speed excee‐
ded
Tyres

Tyre pressure Check The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
tyres in pressure.
Possible cause:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new
wheels and tyres
Rthe tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped
G WARNING
Underinflated tyres pose the following risks:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tyre traction
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tyre (Y page 360).
X Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressures.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pres-
sure is correct (Y page 381).
Check tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message
sures then restart and has not been restarted since.
Run Flat Indicator X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 381).
Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Rectify tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
sure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 382).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 383).
Z

Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is shown on the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tyre traction
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired
tyre (Y page 360).
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 382).
Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is shown on the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tyre impairs the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
tyre (Y page 360).
Tyre press. monitor No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to
currently unavaila‐ strong RF interference. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily mal-
ble functioning.
X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor starts automatically as soon as the cause
has been rectified.

Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several tyres.
missing The pressure of the affected tyre is not shown on the multifunction

display.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre
inoperative No pressure monitor is deactivated.
wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor is activated after driving for a few
minutes.
Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

Tyre(s) overheated The tyre temperature monitoring function is not available in all vehi-
cles.
At least one tyre is overheated. Affected tyres are shown in red. At
temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are shown in yellow.
X Drive more slowly.
Tyre(s) overheated The tyre temperature monitoring function is not available in all vehi-
Reduce speed cles.
At least one tyre is overheated.
G WARNING
Overheated tyres can burst, particularly at high speed.
X Lower the speed so that the tyres can cool down.
Vehicle
To start engine, You attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position k
shift to either P or h.
or N X Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Apply brake to dese‐ You attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i

lect Park (P) posi‐ without depressing the brake pedal.
tion X Depress the brake pedal.
To shift out of P You attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into
or N, depress brake another transmission position with the engine switched off.
and start engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Z

Apply brake to You attempted to shift from position h to position k.
select R X Depress the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position k.
Risk of vehicle The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
rolling Driver door position k, i or h.
open and transmis‐ A warning tone also sounds.
sion not in P
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door fully.
Only select Park The vehicle is moving.

(P) when vehicle is X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
stationary
Without changing You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
gear, consult work‐ A warning tone also sounds.
shop
If transmission position h is selected:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If transmission position k, i or j is selected:
Reversing not poss. You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a malfunc-
Consult workshop tion.
Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to
position i.

Stop vehicle Leave The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily
engine running Wait impaired or not possible.

Transmission cool‐ X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
ing and traffic conditions. Do not drive on.
X Leave the engine running.
X Wait until the display message disappears before driving on.
A The tailgate is open

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
X Close the tailgate.
? The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in
motion.
X Close the bonnet.
Active bonnet mal‐ The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is inoperative due to a mal-
function See Own‐ function or because it has already been triggered.
er's Manual X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.
_ Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:

The backrest in the rear compartment is not engaged on the left-hand
Rear left seat back‐ or right-hand side.
rest not locked or
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Rear right seat
backrest not locked
_ Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear compartment:

The centre rear seat backrest is not engaged.
Rear centre back‐
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
rest not locked
Z
j The trailer tow hitch is not operational.

Check trailer hitch

lock G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not in the locked position, the trailer may come
loose. There is a risk of an accident.
X Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
X Initiate a new swivelling procedure (Y page 237).
X When the display message disappears, re-couple the trailer.

X Do not re-couple the trailer.
X Check the ground clearance and drive on without the trailer.
j The ball coupling is swivelling out or in.

Swivel the ball coupling in or out only when the vehicle is stationary.
Trailer coupling No trailer may be coupled during the swivelling procedure. Do not
extending… attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivelling process using
your hand, foot or other aids.
X Move the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch to an operational
position (Y page 237).
& The on-board voltage is too low

The auxiliary heating (Y page 146) has switched itself off. The auxiliary
inoperative Battery heating or remote activation of heating and ventilation systems can-
low not be switched on.
X Drive for a considerable distance.
The battery charges. The auxiliary heating or remote activation of
heating and ventilation systems is operational again as soon as the
on-board voltage is sufficient.
& There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be
inoperative Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle
& The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty.

X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
inoperative See Own‐ down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating,
er's Man. waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 146).
If the auxiliary heating does not switch on:
Ð The power steering assistance is faulty.


Power steering mal‐
function See Own‐ G WARNING
er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra steering force
required.
If you are able to steer safely:
If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Telephone No service Your vehicle is outside the mobile phone network provider's trans-
mitter/receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
on the multifunction display.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 348).
Key
Â You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not belong
to vehicle
Â The key needs to be replaced.

Replace key
Â The key battery is discharged.

X Replace the batteries (Y page 88).
Change key batteries
Â The key is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Key not detected
(white display message) If the key still cannot be detected:
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired posi-
tion.
Z
298 Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster
Â The key is not in the vehicle.

Key not detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the key.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

key is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.
Â The key is continually undetected.

The key detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A
Remove starting but‐ warning tone also sounds.
ton, then insert key
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired posi-
tion.
Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. In the process, several
warning and indicator lamps may temporarily light up or flash. This is not an indication of any
problem. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after
the engine is started or during a journey.
Warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster 299
Safety
Seat belts

Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N For certain countries only: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-
onds after the engine starts.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).
ü N For certain countries only: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the
engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are
driving at a speed greater than 25 km/h or have briefly driven at a speed greater
than 25 km/h.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving at
a speed greater than 25 km/h or have briefly driven at a speed greater than
25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Z
Safety systems
lamp
J N The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the
ECO start/stop function is switched on.
G WARNING
The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affec-
ted.
X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.
J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. Do not drive on.
X Observe the additional display messages on the multifunction display.
J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
Braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. Do not drive on.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not correct the fault.

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is malfunctioning.
An additional warning tone indicates that EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable.
J÷ N The red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ESP® and ABS warning lamps
! are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened due to a risk of skidding or because at least
one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X Depress the accelerator pedal only as far as necessary when pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen snow chains are used
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Rduring off-road driving (vehicles without off-road program)
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation.

lamp

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO
start/stop function is switched on.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen snow chains are used
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Rduring off-road driving (vehicles without off-road program)
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the ESP® system
checked.
M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
X Activate SPORT handling mode only in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 77).
Z

lamp
! N The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the
yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the
event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the restraint sys-
tem checked.
Further information on the restraint system (Y page 45).
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is run-
ning.
There may be a fault with the following, for example:
Rengine management
Rfuel injection system
Rexhaust system
Rignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rfuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in
emergency mode.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank is completely empty (Y page 175).
X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency mode is
cancelled. The vehicle does not have to be checked.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the
reserve range.

lamp

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature display is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature display is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. The engine could be dam-
aged if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions,
and switch off the engine. Do not drive on.
Z

lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently.
and switch off the engine.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, making sure to observe the
warning notes (Y page 348).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen
slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The
engine may otherwise be damaged.
X Consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-start traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator
may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has overheated
can cause any fluids that may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can
occur just by opening the bonnet.
and switch off the engine.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, making sure to observe the
warning notes (Y page 348).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.

lamp
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen

slush.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, drive on to the nearest qualified
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-start traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
X Increase the distance.
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 80).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 73).
Z
Tyres
lamp
h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is
lit.
The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
tyres.
G WARNING
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
traction
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres.
Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre
(Y page 360).
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 382).
h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure.
Vehicle

lamp
Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering assistance is faulty.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Z
310 Operating system
General notes G WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their
The section on the multimedia system in this software as well as wiring could affect their
manual describes the basic principles for oper- function and/or the operation of other net-
ation. More information can be found in the Dig-
ital Owner's Manual. worked components. This could in particular
also be the case for systems relevant to
safety. They might not function properly any-
Important safety notes more and/or jeopardise the operational
safety of the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of an accident and injury.
G WARNING
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
If you operate information and communica-
electronic components or their software.
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
Always have work on electrical and electronic
Multimedia system

components carried out at a qualified special-
fic situation. This could also cause you to lose
ist workshop.
accident. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
Only operate this equipment when the traffic tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, dered invalid.
with the vehicle stationary. Function restrictions
You must observe the legal requirements for the For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
country in which you are currently driving when ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
operating the multimedia system. You will notice this, for example, because either
The multimedia system calculates the route to you will not be able to select certain menu items
the destination without taking the following into or a message will appear to this effect.
account, for example:
Rtraffic lights
Rstop and give way signs
Operating system
Rparking or stopping restrictions Overview
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations General notes
The multimedia system may give incorrect driv- Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your
ing recommendations if the actual road/traffic ability to read the display.
situation does not correspond with the digital The display has an automatic temperature-con-
map data. trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
For example: automatically reduced if the temperature is too
Ra diverted route high. If necessary, the display may temporarily
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
switch off completely.
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road Cleaning instructions
and traffic rules and regulations during your ! Do not touch the display. The display has a
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
always have priority over multimedia system risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
driving recommendations. screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Operating system 311
The display must be switched off and have Controller

cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller in the centre console lets you:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rselect menu items on the display
age to the display. Renter characters
Rselect a destination on the map
Switching the multimedia system Rsave entries
on/off
The controller can be:
X Press the Ü button on the centre console Rturned 3
to the right of the controller. Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Adjusting the volume Rslid diagonally 2
X Turn the thumbwheel on the right of the con- Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
Multimedia system
troller.
The volume changes: Back button
Rfor the currently set media source
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
Rduring a traffic announcement or navigation call up the display of the current operating
message mode.
Rin hands-free mode during an active call X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
Switching the sound on/off The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
X Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con- mode.
troller.
X To call up the highest level menu: press the
or % button for longer than two seconds.
XPress the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch Touchpad
the media source or change the volume, the
sound is automatically switched on. Switching the touchpad on/off
i You will hear navigation messages even Multimedia system:
when the sound is muted. X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System set‐
tings TouchpadQActivate
tingsQTouchpad Activate touch‐
Functions pad.
pad
Touchpad is activated O or deactivated ª.
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
RRadio mode
RMedia mode with media search
RSound system
RNavigation system
COMAND Online: navigation using hard drive
Audio 20: navigation using SD memory card
RCommunication functions
RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavourites functions
Z
Operating the touchpad Handwriting recognition
: Touch-sensitive surface Example: COMAND Online

; Favourites button : Active input line
Multimedia system
= Calls up quick access for audio ; To enter a space

? Back button = Character input on the touchpad
You can navigate in menus and lists via touch- ? To delete characters
sensitive surface : by using a single finger X To display the menu: press the touchpad.
swiping gesture.
X To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to
the left or right.
X Press the touchpad.
X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-
tions.
Use a two-finger swiping gesture, e.g. to use
these functions:
X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up
or down with two fingers.
X To increase or reduce the vehicle settings Example: COMAND Online
and sound settings: turn two fingers clock- : To exit the menu
wise or anti-clockwise. ; To return to handwriting recognition
X To zoom in and out of the map: move two
= To use the phone book or text templates
fingers together or apart.
? To select the input line or to change the
position of the cursor
Character input with handwriting rec- A To switch the language
ognition B To finish character entry
X To select the input line: select p.
Entering characters
X Swipe up or down.
X Use one finger to write characters on the sur-
face. X To move the cursor within the input line:
The character is entered in the input line. If select p.
the character that you have entered can be X Swipe to the left or right.
interpreted in different ways, the suggested
characters are displayed. X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an
X If character suggestions are shown, turn and
input line is selected.
press the controller. X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
X Resume character input on the touchpad.
Switching the handwriting recognition Favourites

read-aloud function on and off
Multimedia system: Calling up and exiting favourites
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System set‐ X To call up: press the g button on the con-
tingsQTouchpad
tings TouchpadQRead Read out hand‐ troller or on the touchpad.
writing recognition.
recognition X Select a favourite, e.g. Vehicle
Vehicle.
The read-aloud function is switched on O or The favourites are displayed.
off ª. X To exit: press the g button again.
Quick access for audio Adding favourites

Changing the station/music track Adding predefined favourites
Multimedia system
Depending on the audio source that is currently
activated, you can use this function to select the Example: favourites arranged in one row
next station or music track. : To add a new favourite
X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch- ; To rename a selected favourite
pad. = To move a selected favourite
The current audio source is displayed. ? To delete a selected favourite
X To select the previous or next station/ X Press the g button.
music track: swipe to the left or right. The favourites are displayed.
The selected station/music track is played. These are arranged in either one or two rows,
each with five tiles.
Switching the character entry between X Favourites are arranged in one row: slide
touchpad and controller 6 the controller.
The menu bar is shown.
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or
X Select Reassign
Reassign.
characters has been selected.
The categories are displayed.
X To switch to the controller: press the con-
X Select a category.
troller. The favourites are displayed.
Character entry using the controller is active.
X Select a favourite.
X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-
X Add a favourite at the desired position.
pad with your finger.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is If a favourite has already been added at this
active. position, it will be overwritten.
X Favourites are arranged in two rows: slide
6 or 5 the controller.
X To select WAdd Add: turn and press the con-
troller.
The categories and predefined favourites are
displayed.
Z
X Select a category. Overview

The favourites are displayed.
X Select a favourite.
If a favourite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favourites

X Select Vehicle
VehicleQClimate
Climate control.
control
X Press and hold the g button until the
favourites are displayed.
If a favourite has already been added at this Climate control bar (COMAND Online)
position, it will be overwritten. : Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the
Multimedia system
left and airflow, displays the current settings

; Calls up the climate control menu, displays
Climate control settings the current cooling and climate mode set-
tings
General notes = Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
the right, displays the current settings
You can adjust the climate control settings
using the climate control bar or the climate con- There may be fewer settings or none, depending
trol menu. on your vehicle's equipment.
Important climate control functions can be set
in the climate control bar: Calling up the climate control bar
RTemperature Multimedia system:
RAirflow X Select Vehicle
Vehicle.
RAir distribution The vehicle menu appears.
The climate control bar is visible in most dis- X Slide the controller 6 repeatedly until the
plays. climate control bar is activated.
You can find all available climate control func-
tions in the climate control menu. You can use Calling up the climate control menu
the climate control bar to switch to the climate
control menu. Multimedia system:
X Select Vehicle
Vehicle.
The vehicle menu appears.
X Slide the controller 6 repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
X To select ; from the climate control bar: turn
and press the controller.
The menu for selecting climate control func-
tions is activated.
X To select the climate control function: turn
and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
appears.
Settings in the climate menu Before getting in, the driver's seat area or the
whole vehicle interior is briefly warmed or ven-
Setting the climate mode tilated. The air from the vents is pre-cooled.
The climate mode determines the type of air- X Call up the climate control menu
flow. The setting is active when the air-condi- (Y page 314).
tioning system is set to Ã (Y page 140). X To select Pre-entry climate control
X Call up the climate control menu via key:
key turn and press the controller.
(Y page 314). X To activate or deactivate: turn the control-
X To select Climate mode:
mode turn and press the ler.
controller. X To exit the menu: press the % button.
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
X To exit the menu: press the % button. Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-
mate control at departure time
The climate mode bar displays the current air-
flow setting: DIFFUSE
DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS
FOCUS. This function is available for plug-in hybrid vehi-
Multimedia system
cles.
Starting/stopping the perfume atomiser The driver's seat and the vehicle interior are
The perfume atomiser enables the air in the heated or cooled prior to the set departure time.
vehicle interior to be scented to individual X Call up the climate control menu
requirements. For further information, see (Y page 314).
(Y page 144). X To select Pre-entry climate control
X Call up the climate control menu at depart. time:
time turn and press the con-
(Y page 314). troller.
X To select Air freshener
freshener: turn and press the A rotary menu appears.
controller. X To select the setting: turn the controller.
The setting element is active. X To exit the menu: press the % button.
X To start/stop the perfume atomiser: press
the controller.
X To set the intensity: turn the controller when Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-
the atomiser is switched on. mate control menu
X To exit the menu: press the % button.
Activating/deactivating cooling with air
Switching the ionisation on/off dehumidification
The ionisation has a cleansing effect on the air in X Call up the climate control menu
the vehicle interior. For further information, see (Y page 314).
(Y page 146). X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
X Call up the climate control menu bottom bar is activated.
(Y page 314). X To select O A/CA/C: turn and press the control-
X To select Ionisation
Ionisation: turn and press the ler.
controller. X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on
The setting element is active. O or off ª.
X To switch the ionisation on or off: turn the
controller.
i The current status of the cooling function is
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON
X To exit the menu: press the % button. – activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.
Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli- i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-
mate control via the key fication function reduces fuel consumption.
This function is available for plug-in hybrid vehi-
cles.
Z
Synchronising the climate control set- are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
tings card box contains a quick guide.
Use O Sync. (synchronisation) to select the The following information applies to navigation
climate control setting for all zones together O with COMAND Online. Further information can
or separately ª. be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
X Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 314). Selecting a route type and route options
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the Multimedia system:
bottom bar is activated.
X Select Navi
NaviQNavigation
Navigation.
X To select O Sync.
Sync.: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Options
OptionsQRoute
Route settings
settings.
X Switch the synchronisation function on O or i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the
off ª. controller and show the menu.
For further information on synchronising cli- X Select a route type.
Multimedia system
mate control settings, see (Y page 141). Notes for route types:
REco route
Calculates an economical route.
Navigation mode RDynamic route (not available in all countries)
Important safety notes Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account.
G WARNING RCalculate alternative routes
If you operate information and communica- Different routes are being calculated. Instead
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when of Start
Start, select the Continue menu item.
driving, you could be distracted from the traf- X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
fic situation. This could also cause you to lose options.

options
X Select a route option.
accident. Notes for route options:
Only operate this equipment when the traffic RUse toll roads
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, The route calculation includes roads which
stop the vehicle paying attention to road and require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
traffic conditions and operate the equipment RUse vignette roads (not available in all
with the vehicle stationary. countries)

The route calculation includes roads which
You must observe the legal requirements for the require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).
country in which you are currently driving when A vignette allows temporary use of the route
operating the navigation system. network, e.g. 10 days or 1 year.
General notes Entering an address

Correct functioning of the navigation system Multimedia system:
depends, amongst other things, on GPS recep- X Select Navi
NaviQNavigation
Navigation.
tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may be X Select Destination
DestinationQAddress
Address entryentry.
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the
multi-storey car parks. controller and show the menu.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Rtown or postcode, street, house number
The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions Rcountry, town or postcode
Rtown or postcode, centre If route guidance has already been activated,

Rstreet, town or postcode, junction a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
X Select Town
Town. to end the current route guidance.
The town in which the vehicle is currently X Select Yes or Set as intermediate des‐
located (current vehicle position) is at the top. tination.
tination
Below this, you will see locations for which Yes cancels the current route guidance and
route guidance has already been carried out. starts route calculation to the new destina-
X Enter the town. tion.
The G symbol: the location is contained on Set as intermediate destination adds
the digital map multiple times. the new destination in addition to the existing
X To switch to the list: slide 5 the control- destination and opens the intermediate des-
ler. tinations list.
X Select the location.
If available, the postcode is shown. If there
Connecting the mobile phone
Multimedia system
are different postcodes available for the loca-
tion, the corresponding digits are displayed
with an X. Requirements
X Enter the street and house number. Note: This segment describes connecting a
The address is in the menu. mobile phone with COMAND Online. To connect
Further options for destination entry: a mobile phone with Audio 20 (see the Digital
Owner's Manual).
RKeyword search
The keyword search finds destinations using For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, a
fragments of words. Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone is required.
The mobile phone must support Hands-Free
Rselect the last destination
Profile 1.0 or above.
Rselect a contact
Multimedia system:
Rselect a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System set‐
telephone number. tings Activate Bluetooth.
tingsQActivate Bluetooth
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Rselect destination on the map
Renter intermediate destination Mobile phone:
You can map the route to the destination X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-
yourself with up to four intermediate destina- tooth® visibility for other devices (see the
tions. manufacturer's operating instructions).
Rselect travel guide destination (only available
for selected European countries) The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
Apps phone, change the device name (see the man-
Rselect geo-coordinates ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Calculating the route Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Requirement: the address has been entered and Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-
is in the menu. ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
X Select Start or Continue
Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route RPhone book
type and the selected route options. RCall lists
RMessages
i Further information on suitable mobile

phones can be obtained on the Internet at:
Z
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ firm the connection to the multimedia system

connect and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® pro-
files. The prompt to confirm may take up to
Searching for and authorising a mobile two minutes to be displayed (see the manu-
phone facturer's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- multimedia system.
media system for the first time, you will need to The process is cancelled.
search for the phone and then authorise (con- Repeat authorisation.
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
isation takes place by means of Secure Simple Authorisation by entering a passkey (passcode):
Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile
system automatically makes the procedure that phone.
is relevant for your mobile phone available. The The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
mobile phone is always connected automati-
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
Multimedia system
cally after authorisation. Further information on

using a mobile phone with the multimedia sys- nation as a passkey.
tem (see the Digital Owner's Manual). X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
If the multimedia system does not detect your X Press ¬ to confirm.
mobile phone, this may be due to particular X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
security settings on your mobile phone (see the phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
manufacturer's operating instructions). confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
multimedia system at any one time. profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
Searching for a mobile phone to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Multimedia system:
X Select Telephone
TelephoneQConnect
Connect i Mobile phones that are connected to the
device Search for phonesQStart
deviceQSearch phones Start optionally available telephone module with
search.
search Bluetooth® (SAP profile) are displayed sepa-
The available mobile phones are displayed. rately in the device list. These are found below
Symbols in the device list the entry MB SAP module phones.phones
Sym- Explanation Switching between mobile phones

bol
If you have authorised more than one mobile
Ï New mobile phone found, not yet phone, you can switch between the individual
authorised. phones.
Ñ Mobile phone is authorised, but is Multimedia system:
not connected. X Select Telephone
TelephoneQConnect
Connect device.
device
# Mobile phone is authorised and
X Select a mobile phone from the device list.
connected.
Connecting the mobile phone Telephone module with Bluetooth®

Authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing: (SAP profile)
X Select the mobile phone. Introduction
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone. Note: this segment describes using the tele-
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia phone module with COMAND Online. To con-
system. nect a mobile phone with Audio 20 (see the Dig-
ital Owner's Manual).
X Confirm the code on the mobile phone.
Depending on the mobile phone used, con-
The module can be used as a permanently instal- Connecting the module using a USB
led telephone with its own SIM card cable
(Y page 320) or in conjunction with a mobile
phone (Y page 320).
If you wish to use the module in conjunction with
your mobile telephone, the mobile phone must
support the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access
Profile).
The following functions are available using the
module:
Rdata modem mode (Y page 320)
Rsending and receiving text messages
(Y page 321)
Raccessing the phone book of the mobile
Multimedia system
phone (Y page 321) Mounting the module in the stowage compart-
Rcharging a mobile phone via the USB port ment of the centre console
(Y page 321) X Insert USB cable : into the module.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be found X Slide the module into the bracket until it audi-
at: bly engages.
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect X Connect the USB cable to the USB port.
i The module is not available in all vehicles,
depending on the equipment. Activating and connecting the module
Installing the module
Multimedia system:
X Select Telephone
Telephone.
Mounting the module in the stowage compart- X Module: install (Y page 319).
ment of the centre console
X Press and hold button ;.
X Slide module ; into bracket : until it audi-
X As soon as indicator lamp : starts flashing
bly engages.
yellow, release the button.
The indicator lamp continues to flash yellow.
Multimedia system:
X Select Connect deviceQConnect
device Connect MB
SAP moduleQStart
module Start search.
search
The module is searched for and connected.
X To authorise a mobile phone: select Start
search and follow the instructions of the mul-
timedia system. Further information on
Z
authorising and connecting mobile phones RBluetooth® must be activated on the mobile
(Y page 318). phone and must be made visible to other devi-
ces
SIM card mode RThe Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile of the
mobile phone must be activated
Inserting a SIM card
Authorising and connecting a mobile
phone
Multimedia system:
X Select Connect deviceQSearch
device Search for
phones SAP phoneQStart
phonesQSAP phone Start
searchQMB
search MB SAP module phones.
phones
X Select the mobile phone.
X Enter and confirm any 16-digit PIN.
Multimedia system
X Enter and confirm the same PIN on the mobile

phone.
X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into
the multimedia system and confirm.
X With the contact surface facing down, insert
SIM card : into the SIM card slot until it i Please observe the messages in the mobile
engages. phone. If necessary, you will be asked to con-
After a SIM card is inserted in the module, a firm further profile requests.
Bluetooth® connection with another mobile Switching between mobile phones
phone is no longer possible. Any existing
If you have authorised more than one mobile
Bluetooth® connection is ended upon SIM phone on the module, you can switch between
card insertion. the individual phones.
X Select the mobile phone under MB SAP mod‐
Connecting the mobile phone to the ule phones.
phones
telephone module X Confirm the connection request; see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions.
General notes X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into
Before using your mobile phone with the module the multimedia system and confirm.
and the multimedia system for the first time, you
will need to search for the phone and then
authorise it. Data modem mode
Requirements X Connect the mobile phone to the module

(Y page 320).
The mobile phone can be authorised and con- or
nected to the module if the following conditions
are met: X Insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot on
the module (Y page 320).
RThe module is installed (Y page 319) and acti-
X Before connecting for the first time, enable
vated in the multimedia system (Y page 319). the module for Internet access and select the
RNo SIM card is inserted in the module. mobile phone network provider in the multi-
RThe mobile phone has no active Bluetooth® media system (see the Digital Owner's Man-
connection to another device. ual).
Depending on the type of mobile phone, differ- Use as a data modem is automatically activa-
ent settings must be changed on the mobile ted.
phone (see the manufacturer's operating X Activate/deactivate data roaming (see the
instructions). Digital Owner's Manual).
For further information on data modem mode Charging a mobile phone

without telephony with COMAND Online (see
the Digital Owner's Manual).
Settings
Storing/deleting the SIM card PIN
Multimedia system:
X Select Connect device
deviceQMB MB SAP module
phones.
phones
X Highlight the mobile phone.
X To select G: navigate to the right.
X Activate O or deactivate ª Store PIN.
PIN
X Slide cover ; on the module in the direction
Multimedia system
For more information on further settings; see of the arrow and remove it.
the Digital Owner's Manual. X Connect the mobile phone via a USB data
cable with USB port :.
Transferring the phone book
In order to use the phone book of the mobile
phone via the multimedia system, the phone Media mode
book must be transferred using the module.
The transfer of data may take up to ten minutes. General notes
Transmission occurs automatically after a Blue- If you wish to play external media sources, the
tooth® connection is automatically established. appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode; see the
Text messages Digital Owner's Manual.
The following external media sources can be
Requirements used:
The module is connected with the mobile phone RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
(Y page 320) or is being used in the SIM card RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
mode (Y page 320). RCD
Activating/deactivating text message RDVD (COMAND Online)
downloading from the mobile phone RSD cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
Dial number Function
i Information on the single DVD drive (see the
00080 Text message down- Digital Owner's Manual).
loading is deactiva-
ted.
Activating media mode
00081 Text message down-
loading is activated. Multimedia system:
X Select Media
MediaQDevices
Devices.
For further information on receiving text mes- The available media sources will be shown.
sages when using the telephone module (see X Select the media source.
the Digital Owner's Manual). Playable files are played back.
Z
Inserting and removing an SD card

G WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you

should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
Multimedia system
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face downwards.
X Select the media source (Y page 321).
Removing an SD card
X Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X Remove the memory card.
Connecting USB devices
USB ports e.g. when equipped with a navigation

system.
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
X Select the media source (Y page 321).
Stowage areas 323
Stowage areas Rtheload must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.
Loading guidelines Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
G WARNING Rhook in the safety net when loading.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate wear-resistant lashing material. pad sharp
is open when the engine is running, particu- edges for protection.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes i Lashing material is available at any qualified
could enter the passenger compartment. specialist workshop.
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. Stowage compartments
G WARNING
Stowing and features

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or G WARNING
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle and these are not adequately secured, they
occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially could slip or be flung around and thereby
when braking or abruptly changing directions. strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Always store objects so that they cannot be holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or phone brackets may not always be able to
loads against slipping or tipping before the hold the objects placed in them in the event of
journey. an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
G WARNING changes of direction.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
become very hot. If you come into contact cannot be tossed about in these or similar
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn situations.
yourself. There is a risk of injury. RAlways make sure that objects do not proj-
Always be particularly careful around the ect from stowage spaces, luggage nets or
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow stowage nets.
these components to cool down before touch- REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
ing them. shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load ted, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should in the load compartment.
note the following when transporting a load:
Rnever exceed the maximum gross vehicle
Read the loading guidelines (Y page 323).
weight or the permissible axle loads for the
vehicle (including occupants).
Rthe luggage compartment is the preferred
place to store objects.
Rposition heavy loads as far forward as possi-
ble and as low down in the load compartment
as possible.
Z
324 Stowage areas
Front stowage compartments Spectacles compartment
Glove compartment
X To open: press marking :.

The spectacles compartment opens down-
X To open: pull handle : and open glove com- wards.
partment flap ;. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is

X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
upwards until it engages.
Stowage compartment in the front centre
Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example,
console
can be stored in the glove compartment. In vehi-
cles with a perfume atomiser (Y page 144), the
storage space available in the glove compart-
ment is restricted.
Stowage compartment (example)

X Briefly press trim element ; in the direction
of the arrow.
The glove compartment can be locked and Cover : swings upwards.
unlocked only using the emergency key element
(Y page 87).
X To lock: insert the emergency key element
into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to
position 2.
X To unlock: insert the emergency key element
into the lock and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to
position 1.
Stowage areas 325
Stowage compartment/telephone com- Rear stowage compartments

partment under the armrest
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
Stowage compartment (example)

To open: press button : at the front.

X
The stowage space opens. X To open: fold down the seat armrest.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- X Press on the front of release catch : and fold
lowing may be in the stowage space: the cover of the armrest upwards.
RSD card slot
Rmultimedia connector unit with two USB
ports, e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player Additional stowage areas
(see Digital Owner's Manual) Depending on the equipment, the following
Rmobile phone bracket additional stowage areas are available in the
Rsmall stowage space in the upper front sec- vehicle:
tion Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above
the light switch (not suitable for holding thin
Stowage space in the doors objects such as shopping tokens)
Ropen stowage compartment on the centre
console
Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwell
Rmap pockets on the back of the driver's and
front-passenger seat
Rluggage net on the left in the luggage com-
partment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 323)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 323).
In stowage compartment : in the doors, you

can store items such as a rolled-up fluorescent Ski/snowboard bag
jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle document
wallet (front-passenger door). Important safety notes
In the doors ;, you can store bottles with a G WARNING
capacity of up to 1.0 l.
The skibag in conjunction with the lashing
straps cannot restrain any objects other than
skis.
Z
326 Stowage areas
Vehicle occupants could be struck in the

event of sudden braking or an accident, for
instance, if you:
Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged
objects in the skibag
Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing
straps
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure
the skibag with the lashing straps so that it
cannot move around. X Attach tensioning strap = in a diagonal pat-
tern to hooks ? in lashing eyelets A as
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow- shown.
boards can be transported in the ski/snow-
board bag.
EASY-PACK quickfold rear bench seat
Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the
luggage compartment Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and
could result in additional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage com-
X Fold the centre rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 326). partment cannot be restrained by the seat
X Slide the ski/snowboard bag between the backrest.
two outer rear seat backrests. Ensure that the This poses an increased risk of injury.
wheels of the ski/snowboard bag are in the Before every trip, make sure that the seat
luggage compartment.
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and
are engaged before every trip.
place the skis or snowboards inside it.
X Close the ski/snowboard bag.
! When folding the rear seat backrest for-
X Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end wards, ensure that there are no items lying on
until the skis or snowboards are held firmly the seat cushions. These items could other-
inside the ski/snowboard bag. wise be damaged or could themselves dam-
age the rear seats.
Follow the loading guidelines (Y page 323).
The outer and the centre rear seat backrests can
be folded down separately to increase the lug-
gage compartment capacity. The division ratio is
40/20/40.
Stowage areas 327
Both outer seat backrests in the rear compart- X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release han-
ment are electrically unlocked with the release dle :.
handles either in the luggage compartment or The corresponding backrest folds forwards.
beside the seat backrests in the rear compart- X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
ment (vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate only). back if necessary.
The corresponding rear seat backrests then fold
forwards automatically. Release the handle next to the seat back-
rest
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards The release handle beside the backrest is pres-
ent only in vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate.
Preparation
X Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front-passenger
seat forwards.
X Vehicles with memory function: when one or
more parts of the rear seat backrest are fol-

ded forwards, the respective front seat moves
forwards slightly when necessary in order to
avoid contact.
When the engine is running, the driver's seat
does not move forwards.
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
restraints. X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release han-
dle : beside the backrests.
The corresponding backrest folds forwards.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Centre rear seat backrest
X Hook seat belt buckle tongue : through seat

belt retainer ; .
Release handle in the luggage compart-

ment
X Pull release lever ; forwards.

Rear seat backrest : is released.
X Fold rear seat backrest : forwards.
back if necessary.
Folding back the rear seat backrest

! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
Z
328 Stowage areas
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- Locking the centre rear seat backrest
aged.
In order to prevent the luggage compartment

Left- and right-hand seat backrest: from being accessed by unauthorised persons,
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat the separate release mechanism for the centre
forward if necessary. seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The

X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it centre seat backrest can then only be folded
engages. forwards together with the left seat backrest.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and X To lock: fold the left and centre seat backr-
locked, this will be shown on the multifunc- ests forwards. Make sure that the centre and
tion display on the instrument cluster. A warn- left seat backrests are engaged and joined
ing tone also sounds. together.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary X Slide catch : upwards.
(Y page 111). The release mechanism of the centre seat
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is locked.
back if necessary. X To unlock: fold the left and centre seat backr-
ests forwards.
X Slide catch : downwards.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat

backrests (cargo position)
Centre rear seat backrest:

forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
ble.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 111).
back if necessary.
Stowage areas 329
Vehicles with stowage space package: to

enlarge the luggage compartment, you can
adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are
10 degrees steeper (cargo position).
X Fold the seat backrest forwards (Y page 326).
X Move the handle : in the direction of the
arrow.
X Push the seat backrest ; back to the bar :
until the backrest engages.
The cargo position has been reached.
: Lashing eyelets in the luggage compartment

Securing a load
Bag hooks
Lashing eyelets
G WARNING

Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 323). The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
evenly. vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
load. These are intended only as anti-slip pro- Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
tection for light loads. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
RDo not route lashing materials across sharp objects on the bag hooks.
edges or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
: Lashing eyelets in the rear-compartment

footwell (vehicles with safety net) : Bag hook
Luggage compartment cover

G WARNING
On its own, the luggage compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
Z
330 Stowage areas
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden Fitting/removing the luggage compart-

changes in direction, braking or in the event of ment cover
an accident. There is an increased risk of
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even if you are using
the luggage compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the luggage com-
partment higher than the lower edge of the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the luggage compartment cover. X To remove: make sure that luggage compart-
ment cover : is rolled up.
The load compartment cover is lashed down X Push in the end cap of luggage compartment
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right-hand side using the grip =.
Extending and retracting the luggage X Push luggage compartment cover : into
compartment cover opposite anchorage ;.
X Remove luggage compartment cover :
upwards.
X To install: place luggage compartment
cover : into anchorage ; on the left-hand
side.
X Push in the opposite end cap of luggage com-
partment cover : in the direction of the
arrow and insert the luggage compartment
cover : into the right-hand anchorage from
above ;.
X To extend: pull luggage compartment cover Safety net

back by grab handle : and clip it into the
retainers ; on the left and right. Important safety notes
X To retract: unhook the luggage compartment
cover from retainers ; on the left and right G WARNING
and guide it forwards by grab handle : until On its own, the safety net cannot secure or
it is fully retracted. restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There is
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even if you are using
the safety net.
Stowage areas 331
It is important to use a safety net if you load the Attaching and tightening the safety net
vehicle with small objects above the seat backr-
ests. For safety reasons, always use a safety net
when transporting a load.
Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfil their
protective function and must be replaced. Visit a
Using the safety net

Preparing the safety net
Safety net installed behind the C-pillar

X To attach and tighten: insert guide rod :
into bracket ; and slide forwards.

X Attach belt hook ? to the lashing eyelet and
pull down on the loose end of the lashing strap
until the safety net is taut.
X After driving a short distance, check the ten-
sion of the safety net and retighten it if nec-
essary.
X To release and detach: pull the belt clamp
The safety net can be used in two different posi- = upwards.
tions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar):
X Unhook belt hook ? from the lashing eyelet.
RThe brackets behind B-pillar : are required X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;.
for the luggage compartment enlargement
(Y page 326). Storing the safety net
The corresponding lashing eyelets to tighten X Press the red button on the upper and lower
the net are located in the footwell of the rear guide rods.
bench seat (Y page 329).
X Fold the safety net and roll it up.
RThe brackets behind C‑pillar ; are required
X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the safety
for the luggage compartment behind the rear
bench seat. net holder.
X Put the safety net in the stowage space under
The corresponding lashing eyelets to tension
the net are located in the luggage compart- the luggage compartment floor.
ment (Y page 329).
The safety net is located in the stowage space
under the luggage compartment floor. Luggage net
X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the
safety net.
X Unroll and unfold the safety net. G WARNING
The upper and lower guide rods must engage
audibly. If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
Z
332 Stowage areas
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden

changes of direction.
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not proj-
ect from stowage spaces, luggage nets or
stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- X Slide the luggage compartment floor ; hor-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects izontally into the luggage compartment until
in the load compartment. the fittings ? are positioned in the guides E
on both sides.
Observe the following notes: X Raise the luggage compartment floor ; by

approximately 45° so that the fittings ?
Rfollow the loading guidelines (Y page 323). engage audibly.
Rwhen removing and inserting the luggage
Make sure that:
compartment floor, make sure that it is kept a
sufficient distance from the side trim panels Rthe rubber band C is below the clasp B. The
in the luggage compartment so as not to dam- rubber band must not block the clasp
age them Rthe rubber band = is below the base D
X Fold the luggage compartment floor ; down
Fitting the luggage net and press down until it engages.
Coat hooks on the tailgate
X Open the luggage compartment floor ;

(Y page 333), raise by approximately 45° and
remove from the rear.
X Place the luggage compartment floor ; on a : Coat hook
clean surface.
X Stretch the luggage net : over the luggage
compartment floor ; as shown. Snap-in module for luggage compart-
Make sure that: ment (telescopic)
Rthe luggage net : is aligned with the centre
of the luggage compartment floor ;
General notes
Rthe rubber band = is below the fittings ? The luggage compartment plug-in module
Rthe tab A is facing forwards allows you to use your luggage compartment for
a variety of purposes.
Stowage areas 333
The following accessories are located under the X Extend the telescopic rod ? .
luggage compartment floor: X Insert telescopic rod ? into mounting ele-
Ra telescopic rod ments =.
Rtwo mounting elements X Turn both mounting elements = to & until
Rtwo holders you feel them engage.

Stowage space under the luggage
G WARNING compartment floor
If you drive when the luggage compartment
floor is open, objects could be flung around,
thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk G WARNING
of injury, especially when braking or abruptly If you drive when the luggage compartment
changing directions. floor is open, objects could be flung around,
Always close the luggage compartment floor

thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk
before a journey. of injury, especially when braking or abruptly
changing directions.
Fitting Always close the luggage compartment floor
before a journey.
The following items are located beneath the lug-

gage compartment floor:
Rfolding box
Rtyre-change tool kit
RTIREFIT kit
REASY-PACK load-securing kit
Opening and closing the luggage com-

partment floor
X Open luggage compartment floor ;
(Y page 333).
X Attach holder : in the desired position to the
side of luggage compartment floor ;.
X Close luggage compartment floor ;.
X To open: open the tailgate.

X Press handle : on ribbing ; downwards.
Handle : folds upwards.
X Turn mounting elements = to =.

X Insert mounting elements = into holders :.
Z
334 Stowage areas
Locking and unlocking the luggage

compartment floor
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the lug-

gage compartment floor in the direction of the
arrow.
1 Luggage compartment floor, unlocked
2 Luggage compartment floor, locked
The luggage compartment floor can be locked

and unlocked using the emergency key element.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When a load is transported on the roof, the
X Attach hook = to the luggage compart- vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han-
ment's upper seal ?. dling changes. If you exceed the maximum
X To close: detach hook = from the luggage roof load, the handling as well as steering and
compartment's upper seal ?. braking characteristics are severely affected.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the under- There is a risk of an accident.
side of the luggage compartment floor. Always observe the maximum roof load and
X Fold the luggage compartment floor down. adapt your driving style.
X Press the luggage compartment floor down
until it engages. You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical Data" section
(Y page 400).
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is fitted you can:
Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
sunroof fully
Ropen the tailgate fully
Features 335
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
may become detached from the vehicle. You shut before beginning your journey.
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: if a ted, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects
roof carrier is fitted, the panorama sliding sun- in the load compartment.
roof cannot be opened. In order to allow venti-
lation of the vehicle interior, you can still raise ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the panorama sliding sunroof. If a roof carrier the right size and which have lids. The drinks
approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact could otherwise spill.
with the panorama sliding sunroof, the sunroof
will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the centre console to continuous,
Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: if a strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
roof carrier is fitted, the panorama sliding sun- compartment in the area of the centre con-
roof cannot be opened. In order to allow venti- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
lation of the vehicle interior, you can still raise centrated and reflected sunlight.
the panorama sliding sunroof. If a roof carrier

approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 323).
with the panorama sliding sunroof, the sunroof
will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Cup holder on the front centre console
Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holders
X To open: open the stowage space
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull
and these are not adequately secured, they out cup holder ;.
X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup catch =.
X To close: push cover : of the stowage space
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
closed.
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu- the resultant compartment for stowage.
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden You can remove the rubber mat of the cup
holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm
changes of direction.
water only.
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not proj- ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
ect from stowage spaces, luggage nets or as you could otherwise damage it.
stowage nets.
Z
336 Features
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear Vanity mirror in the sun visor
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged. Mirror light : functions only if the sun visor is
clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of cup holder :

or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To fold out: place a container in the cup X Fold down sun visor :.
holder. X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
Cup holder : or ; folds down automati- X Swing sun visor : to the side.
cally.
X To fold in: remove the container.
Cup holder : or ; folds in automatically. Roller sunblinds in the rear side win-
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
dows
it engages.
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back suddenly as this would
Sun visors damage the automatic roller mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
Overview blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the motorway. This could damage the iner-
tia reel. Therefore, either close the side win-
dow or retract the roller sunblind before driv-
ing at high speeds.
: Mirror light
; Retainer
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Features 337
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by Rear-compartment ashtray

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top
of the window.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top handle
edge.
X To remove the insert: push ribbing = from

the left side and pull insert : up and out.
X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the holder
from above and press down into the holder
until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
X To open: open the stowage compartment You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
(Y page 324).
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards on its
lighter.
right side =.
X To remove the insert: hold the sides of In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
insert ?, push it forwards slightly and lift it Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
up ; and out.
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
X To refit the insert: press insert ? into the
objects, for example
holder until it engages.
X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Push cover : of the stowage compartment Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
closed. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
i You can remove the ashtray insert and use unattended in the vehicle.
the resultant compartment for stowage.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Use the cigarette lighter only
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Z
338 Features
Socket on the front centre console
Cigarette lighter (example)

12 V socket (example)
(Y page 153).
X To open: open the stowage compartment
X To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 324).
(Y page 324).
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
when the heating element is red-hot. partment closed.
X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
partment closed. Socket on the rear-compartment centre
console
12 V sockets
General notes
(Y page 153).
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as mobile phone chargers.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
X Pull cover ; out by its top handle edge.
An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-board
voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board X Lift up the cover of socket :.
voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is
automatically cut. This ensures that there is suf- Socket in the luggage compartment
ficient power to start the engine.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V
power socket, leave the cover of the stowage
compartment open. This prevents the cover
from being blocked.
Features 339
X Lift up the cover of socket :. can be connected. These devices, such as

games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
230 V socket
Do not connect any multiple-socket outlets to
Important safety notes the 230 V power socket.
Requirements for operating these devices:
G DANGER Rthe electronic device that you connect has a
When a suitable device is connected, the suitable connector and conforms to stand-
230 V power socket will be carrying a high ards specific to the country you are in
voltage. You could receive an electric shock if Rthe electronic device connector is plugged
the connector cable or the 230 V power into the 230 V power socket
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. connected must not exceed 150 watts
Rthe on-board voltage is within a permissible
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
voltage range

free of damage. Rthe 12 V socket in the front centre console is
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the working properly (Y page 338)
230 V power socket is dry.
RImmediately have the 230 V power socket Using the 230 V power socket
checked or replaced at a qualified special-
ised workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 230 V
power socket that is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
G DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
you could receive an electric shock. There is a
risk of fatal injury. X To switch on: switch the ignition on.
Only attach appropriate objects to the power X Open flap =.
socket. X Insert the electronic device connector into
230 V power socket :.
! Note that work and repairs on the 230 V Indicator lamp ; lights up.
power socket should only be carried out by X To switch off: remove the connector from
qualified specialist personnel. 230 V power socket :.
Make sure that you do not pull on the cable.
General notes
The 230 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 230 V so that small electronic devices
Z
340 Features
Problems with the 230 V power socket

The warning lamp on the The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
230 V power socket is X Start the engine.
not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 366).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X Remove the electronic device connector from the 230 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after the converter cools
down:
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal

power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 230 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable electronic device.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys- You will see a message if:

tem Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre cannot be established
Information on these requirements can be found
Ra call has not been automatically forwarded
in the Digital Owner's Manual.
to the public emergency call centre
In this case, dial the 112 emergency number
on your mobile phone.
You can find more information on the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system in the Digital Own-
er's Manual.
Mercedes-Benz Contact/Mercedes
me connect
General notes
X To open: press cover :. Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys-
X To make an emergency call: press SOS but- tem: Mercedes-Benz Contact/Mercedes me
ton ; briefly. connect offers fast assistance at the touch of a
The indicator lamp on SOS button ; flashes button – around the clock. For any queries about
until the emergency call is concluded. the vehicle, Mercedes-Benz Contact/Mercedes
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- me connect offers a quick and convenient way
Benz emergency call centre. of connecting a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
X After the emergency call, close cover :. tomer Centre. You can, for example, request an
Features 341
appointment or call for help in the event of a This may take a moment. You are then con-
breakdown. nected to a person.
Vehicles with the COMAND Online multime- X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
dia system: Mercedes me connect offers fast multifunction steering wheel.
assistance at the touch of a button – around the or
clock. For any queries about the vehicle, X Press the corresponding multimedia system
Mercedes me connect offers a quick and con- button for ending a telephone call.
venient way of connecting a call to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You can, for
example, request an appointment or call for help Info call button
in the event of a breakdown.
This function is not available in all countries.
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the Ø but-
ton on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.

The Digital Owner's Manual contains further
information on:
Rvehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia
system: Mercedes-Benz Contact/Mercedes
me connect
Rvehicles with the COMAND Online multi-
media system: Mercedes me connect
X To call: press Info call button :.
Breakdown assistance call button The call is initiated.
The Connecting call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio system is
muted.
For certain countries only: a voice message
prompts you to confirm the data transfer.
After confirmation, the required vehicle data
are transferred. During data transfer, you will
see a corresponding symbol on the display.
This may take a moment. You are then con-
nected to a person.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
X To call: press button : for breakdown assis- or
tance. X Press the corresponding multimedia system
The call is initiated. button for ending a telephone call.
The Connecting call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio system is
muted. Mobile phone
For certain countries only: a voice message
prompts you to confirm the data transfer. Important safety notes
After confirmation, the required vehicle data
are transferred. During data transfer, you will G WARNING
see a corresponding symbol on the display. If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you can be distracted from
the traffic situation. This could also cause you
Z
342 Features
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of The functions and services available when you
an accident. use the phone depend on your mobile phone
model and service provider.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary. Using a mobile phone
You must observe the legal requirements for the To connect a mobile phone to the exterior aerial
country in which you are currently driving when and charge it, insert it into the mobile phone
operating mobile communications equipment in bracket.
the vehicle. X Open the telephone compartment
If it is permitted by law to operate communica- (Y page 325).
tions equipment while the vehicle is in motion, X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-
you may do so only if the traffic situation per- installed fitting; see the separate installation
mits. You may otherwise be distracted from the instructions for the mobile phone fitting.
traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone
yourself and others.
bracket; see the separate installation instruc-
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
tions for the mobile phone fitting.

may cause damage to your health and to the
health of others. The use of an exterior aerial i The mobile phone can also be operated
takes into consideration the scientific discus- without being in the bracket. However, the
sion surrounding the possible health risk posed charging function and aerial function are not
by electromagnetic fields. available.
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an
In order to use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on your
approved exterior aerial. This ensures:
telephone module, you must first insert the tele-
Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the phone module into the pre-installed fitting. This
vehicle connects it to the exterior aerial. If you wish to
Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle charge the mobile phone, you must connect it to
electronics and mobile phones is minimised a USB port.
An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Further information on the telephone module
Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gener-
with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in the
ated by a wireless device to the exterior Digital Owner's Manual.
Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is
lower than in a vehicle that does not have an Operating the mobile phone
exterior aerial You can operate the phone using the 6 and
Information on retrofitting two-way radios and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering
mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 392). wheel. You can operate other mobile phone
functions via the on-board computer
General notes (Y page 255).
When you remove the key from the ignition lock,
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are the mobile phone is disconnected from the vehi-
various mobile phone brackets that may be fit- cle. You can then no longer make calls using the
ted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are hands-free system.
country-specific.
If a call is active and you remove the key from
More information on suitable mobile phones, the ignition lock, the conversation is transferred
mobile phone brackets and on connecting Blue- over to the mobile phone. It is then possible to
tooth®-capable mobile phones with the multi- continue the conversation on the mobile phone.
media system can be obtained:
Rat a qualified specialist workshop
Ron the internet at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect
Features 343
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-
scribed in order to ensure that there is always
sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place several floor-
mats on top of one another.

X Slide the relevant seat back.
X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat away from
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Retrofitted anti-glare film

Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the
windows can interfere with radio/mobile tele-
phone reception. This is particularly the case for
conductive or metallic-coated films. You can
obtain information about anti-glare film from a
Z
344 Engine compartment
Engine compartment Rremove jewellery and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Bonnet
ple, away from moving parts.
G WARNING in the supplementary instructions. Otherwise,
you may fail to recognise dangers.
An unlocked bonnet may open up when the
vehicle is in motion and block your view. There
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Before Operating principle
every trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked. ! A triggered active bonnet must be repaired
at a qualified specialist workshop. The active
G WARNING bonnet function will then be available again.
When being opened and closed, the bonnet The additional pedestrian protection provided
may suddenly fall into the closed position. by the active bonnet will then be restored.
There is a risk of injury to persons in the range The active bonnet is available only for certain
countries.
Maintenance and care
of movement of the bonnet.

Open and close the bonnet only when nobody The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to
pedestrians in certain accident situations. Rais-
is in the range of movement. ing the active bonnet increases the clearance to
hard components, such as the engine.
G WARNING If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is
If you open the bonnet while the engine is raised at the rear in the area around the hinges
overheating or while there is a fire in the by approximately 80 mm. The active bonnet is
engine compartment, you could come into triggered by pyrotechnics.
contact with hot gases or other leaking ser- For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig-
gered active bonnet yourself. If the active bon-
vice products. There is a danger of injury.
net has been triggered, pedestrian protection
Allow an overheating engine to cool down may be limited.
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in
the engine compartment, leave the bonnet Resetting
closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
G WARNING ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
There are moving components in the engine radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
compartment. Certain components may con- There is a risk of injury when accessing the
tinue to move or suddenly move again even engine compartment.
after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. down and only touch the components descri-
If you have to carry out work in the engine bed in the following.
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan
Engine compartment 345
X With your hand flat, push down the active X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
bonnet : in the area around the hinges on switched off.
both sides (arrows). X Pull release lever : on the bonnet.
Do so until you feel the active bonnet : The bonnet is released.
engage.
If you can raise the active bonnet slightly at the
rear in the area around the hinges, it is not

engaged correctly. Repeat the step.
Opening the bonnet

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-
dle ; up and lift the bonnet.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm,
down and only touch the components descri- the bonnet is opened and held open automat-
bed in the following. ically by the gas-filled struts.
G WARNING Closing the bonnet

When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height
of approximately 20 cm.
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not
the ignition before opening the bonnet. properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
not folded away from the windscreen. Other-
wise, you could damage the windscreen wip-
ers or the bonnet. Radiator
Do not cover up the radiator. Do not use thermal
mats, insect protection covers or anything sim-
ilar. Otherwise, the values of the European on-
board diagnostics may be affected. Some of
these values are required by law and must
always be correct.
Z
Engine oil Allow an overheating engine to cool down

before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in
Important safety notes the engine compartment, leave the bonnet
G WARNING closed and notify the fire brigade.
Certain components in the engine compart- Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the notes
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the in the supplementary instructions. Otherwise,
radiator and parts of the exhaust system. you may fail to recognise dangers.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment. General notes
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
down and only touch the components descri- consumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1000 km. The oil
bed in the following. consumption may be higher than this when the
vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high
G WARNING engine speeds.
There are moving components in the engine Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed at different locations.
compartment. Certain components may con-
To check the oil level:

tinue to move or suddenly move again even
after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
If you have to carry out work in the engine operating temperature
compartment: Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-
Rswitch off the ignition perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround-
briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before
carrying out the measurement
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG GLC
area of the fan 63 4MATIC and Mercedes‑AMG GLC 63
Rremove jewellery and watches S 4MATIC): if the engine is not at operating
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- temperature, e.g. if the engine was only star-
ple, away from moving parts. ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement
Mercedes‑AMG GLC 63 4MATIC and
G WARNING Mercedes‑AMG GLC 63 S 4MATIC: The oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- level must only be checked when the engine is at
ponents in the engine compartment, it may operating temperature.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil does not spill out
over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool
down and thoroughly clean the components
that have come into contact with engine oil
before you start the engine.
G WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is
overheating or while there is a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other leaking ser-
vice products. There is a danger of injury.
Engine compartment 347
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too
stick much engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (exam-

ple)
Top up the engine oil (example)
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick tube.
X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.

X Top up the engine oil.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
to the stop and take it out again after approx- the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil.
imately three seconds.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;, the oil level is correct. clockwise.
Make sure that the cap locks securely into
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
place.
below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 347).
Topping up engine oil Further information on engine oil (Y page 398).
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill
Other service products
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is
harmful to the environment. Important safety notes
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are G WARNING
approved for vehicles with a service system. A Certain components in the engine compart-
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
Products is available at any Mercedes-Benz There is a risk of injury when accessing the
Service Centre. engine compartment.
The following cause engine failure or damage As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
to the exhaust system: down and only touch the components descri-
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have bed in the following.
not been expressly approved for the service
system G WARNING
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
There are moving components in the engine
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired compartment. Certain components may con-
RUse of engine oil additives tinue to move or suddenly move again even
Z
after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Check the coolant level only if the vehicle is
on a level surface and the engine has cooled
If you have to carry out work in the engine down.
compartment: X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
Rswitch off the ignition (Y page 153).
Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- or
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation X Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles
area of the fan with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
function (Y page 154).
Rremove jewellery and watches
X Check the coolant temperature display on the
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- instrument cluster (Y page 38).
ple, away from moving parts. The coolant temperature must be below
70 †.
G WARNING X Turn the key to position g in the ignition lock
(Y page 153).
The cooling system is pressurised, particu-
or
larly when the engine is warm. If you open the
X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles
cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start

sprays out. There is a risk of injury. function (Y page 154).
Let the engine cool down before you open the X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open and allow excess pressure to escape.
the cap slowly to release the pressure. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
remove it.
G WARNING If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
If you open the bonnet while the engine is coolant in the coolant expansion tank ;.
overheating or while there is a fire in the
If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm
engine compartment, you could come into above marker bar = in the filler neck when
contact with hot gases or other leaking ser- warm, there is enough coolant in the coolant
vice products. There is a danger of injury. expansion tank ;.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down X If necessary, top up with coolant that has
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
the engine compartment, leave the bonnet X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
closed and notify the fire brigade. it will go.
Further information on coolant (Y page 399).
Checking the coolant level
Topping up the windscreen washer sys-
tem
G WARNING
If windscreen washer concentrate comes into
contact with hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
Make sure the windscreen washer concen-
trate does not come into contact with the filler
neck.
Example: checking the coolant level
ASSYST PLUS 349
The letter indicates which service is due. A

stands for a minor service and B for a major ser-
vice. A number or another letter may be dis-
played after the letter.
For certain countries only: the position after the
letter A or B indicates any necessary additional
maintenance work. If you notify a qualified spe-
cialist workshop of this display, you will receive
a statement on the associated costs.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Example: topping up the windscreen washer Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
system ule:
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and
X Note down the service due date displayed in
open. the multifunction display before disconnect-
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. ing the battery.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck or

until it engages. X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- battery disconnection periods from the ser-
mended minimum of 1.0 l, a message appears vice date shown on the display.
on the multifunction display prompting you to
top up the washer fluid (Y page 297).
Further information on washer fluid Hiding service messages
(Y page 400).
X Press the a or % button on the steering
wheel.
ASSYST PLUS
Service message Displaying service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display X Switch the ignition on.
informs you of the next service due date. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
Information on the type of service and service list of menus.
intervals (see the separate Service Booklet). X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
Further information can be obtained at a quali- select the Service menu and confirm with
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz a.
Service Centre. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-
does not show any information on the engine firm with a.
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil The service due date appears in the multi-
level (Y page 346). function display.
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for a few seconds, e.g.:
RService A in XX days
Information about service
RService A due Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
RService A overdue by XX days interval display
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
next service due date is displayed. has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
Z
350 Care
be corrected at a qualified specialist work- Rsolvents

shop. Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Have service work carried out as described in Do not scrub.
the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
to increased wear and damage to the major with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
assemblies or the vehicle. You could otherwise scratch or damage the
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a surfaces and protective film.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period
service work has been carried out. You can also of time immediately after cleaning, particu-
obtain further information on maintenance larly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
work, for example. cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased
corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You
should therefore drive for a few minutes after
Special service requirements cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake
The prescribed service interval is based on nor- discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be
mal operation of the vehicle. Service work will parked up for a long period of time.
need to be performed more often if the vehicle is H Environmental note
operated under arduous conditions or increased
loads, for example: Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
RRegular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops ner.
RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
distances retaining quality in the long term.
RFor frequent use in mountainous terrain or on
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
poor road surfaces mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
RIf the engine is often left idling for long periods
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
changed more frequently. The tyres must be
checked more frequently if the vehicle is oper-
paintwork
ated under increased loads. Further information Automatic car wash
can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle
Driving abroad
has been washed. There is a risk of an acci-
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is dent.
also available in other countries. You can obtain After washing the vehicle, brake carefully
further information from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. while paying attention to the traffic conditions
in order to restore full braking efficiency.
Care ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
General notes the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
situations.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
the following: these systems in the following or similar sit-
Rdry, rough or hard cloths uations:
Rabrasive cleaning agents Rwhen towing away
Rin a car wash
Care 351
! Make sure that: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
Rthe
side windows and sliding sunroof are
closed completely X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Rthe blower is switched off X Switch on the ignition.
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
0 depressed.
Rthe 360° camera or the reversing camera is Operating with the key and Start/Stop button:
deactivated X Engage neutral i.
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. X Release the brake pedal.
! If the key is within the rear detection range X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-
of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for sary.
example, could lead to the unintentional X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the
opening of the tailgate: ignition lock.
Rusing a car wash You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
Rusing a high-pressure cleaner wash from the very start.
Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt
from the vehicle. before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car

wash.
! Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in neutral position i when washing your After using an automatic car wash, wipe off the
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle wax from the windscreen and the windscreen
may otherwise be damaged. wiper blades. This will prevent smears and
reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the
ROperating with the key:
windscreen.
Do not remove the key from the ignition
lock. Do not open the driver's door when Washing by hand
the engine is switched off or at very low
speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission In some countries, washing by hand is only
position h or k, the automatic transmis- allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
sion will automatically switch to park posi- Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
tion j and block the wheels. vidual country.
ROperating with the Start/Stop button: X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
Do not open the driver's door when the vehicle in direct sunlight.
engine is switched off or at very low X Use a soft sponge to clean.
speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
position h or k, the automatic transmis-
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
sion will automatically switch to park posi-
tion j and block the wheels. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
tle jet of water.
Observe the following to make sure that the X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
automatic transmission stays in neutral position
air inlet.
i:
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
Operating with the key and Start/Stop button: frequently.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. thoroughly with a chamois.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
depressed. work.
Operating with the Start/Stop button only: When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
X Engage park position j.
soon as possible.
Z
352 Care
High-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away

from the vehicle.
G WARNING
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind- Cleaning the paintwork
ers) can cause damage not visible from the
! Do not affix:
outside to tyres or chassis components. Com-
Rstickers
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-
edly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam- to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
aged tyres or chassis components replaced
immediately. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm care cannot always be completely repaired. In
between the vehicle and the high-pressure such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct X Remove impurities immediately, where pos-
distance is available from the equipment sible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
manufacturer. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
around when cleaning your vehicle. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
Do not aim directly at any of the following: the treated areas afterwards.
Rtyres X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils,
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.

fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
Relectrical components fluid.
Rbattery X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Rplug connectors X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Rlamps
Rseals
Care and treatment of matt paintwork
Rtrim elements
Rventilation slots ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
Damage to seals or electrical components wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny.
can lead to leaks or failures. ! The following may cause the paint to
! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your become shiny and thus reduce the matt
vehicle are covered with a decorative film. effect:
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between Rvigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials
the parts of the vehicle covered with the film Rfrequent use of car washes
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
around whilst cleaning. purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
! If the key is within the rear detection range use on vehicles with matt paintwork leads to
of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for considerable surface damage or, more spe-
example, could lead to the unintentional cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
opening of the tailgate: Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
Rusing a car wash qualified specialist workshop.
Rusing a high-pressure cleaner ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Care 353
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear, Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or
the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
wiper blades.
These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with
a clear matt finish.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaning
The vehicle should preferably be washed by agents, solvents or solvent-based cleaning
hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and agents to clean the inside of the windows/
plenty of water. windscreen. Do not touch the inside of the
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from windows/windscreen with hard items such
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care as an ice scraper or a ring. Otherwise, the
products. windows/windscreen could be damaged.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windscreen and the rear window at regular
Cleaning vehicle parts intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
Cleaning the wheels vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
G WARNING tronic components.

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
ers) can cause damage not visible from the with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is
outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- recommended and approved by Mercedes-
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect- Benz.
edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- Cleaning the wiper blades
lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-
aged tyres or chassis components replaced G WARNING
immediately. If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products blades, you could become trapped. There is a
to remove brake dust. This could damage danger of injury.
wheel bolts and brake components.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or
of time immediately after cleaning, particu- wiper blades.
larly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased
corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
should therefore drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
parked up for a long period of time. ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
Cleaning the windows ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windscreen could be damaged if
G WARNING the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper screen (Y page 133).
blades, you could become trapped. There is a X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp
danger of injury. cloth.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before
switching on the ignition.
Z
354 Care
Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
exterior lighting.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signal

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-

water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Cleaning the reversing camera and
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning 360° camera
cloths.
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the reversing camera or 360° camera
Cleaning the side running board with a high-pressure cleaner.
! Do not clean the aluminium inserts of the
side running board with alkaline or acidic
cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use
acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
The aluminium inserts could otherwise be
damaged.
Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure
cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the
high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
the equipment manufacturer. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
or
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-
GO start function (Y page 154).
X Open the camera cover for cleaning, via the
multimedia system; see Digital Owner's Man-
ual.
X To clean the camera: use clean water and a
soft cloth to clean the camera lens :.
Care 355
When you switch off the ignition, the camera Interior care
cover closes automatically.
Cleaning the display
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
G WARNING Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can Rabrasive cleaning agents
become very hot. If you come into contact Rcommercially-available household cleaning
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn agents
yourself. There is a risk of injury. These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
Always be particularly careful around the
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow age to the display.
these components to cool down before touch-
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
ing them. is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- cially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD
based cleaning agents, such as sanitary
display cleaner.
cleanser or wheel cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit cloth.
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by Cleaning the plastic trim
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing the vehicle. G WARNING
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product Care products and cleaning agents containing
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. This could result in plastic
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch parts breaking away when the airbags are
deployed. There is a danger of injury.
H Environmental note Do not use care products and cleaning agents
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi- containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
ronmentally-responsible manner.
! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high- ces:
pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. Rstickers
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes Rfilms
dirty or corroded. Rperfume oil container or similar
X Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire You could otherwise damage the plastic.
brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
brush. sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic
trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
the surfaces.
coupling.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly. cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
You can also have the maintenance work on the ucts recommended and approved by
ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out Mercedes-Benz.
by a qualified specialist workshop. The surface may change colour temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Z
356 Care
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- Runevenness in structure

tor lever Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rsubtle colour differences
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom- These are characteristics of leather and not
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. material faults.
Seat covers from other materials
Cleaning wood trim and trim elements ! Observe the following when cleaning:
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes moistened with a solution containing 1%
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
ing the surface. Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth
X Wipe the wood trim and trim elements with a moistened with a solution containing 1%
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub
X Trim elements with piano black finish:
carefully, and always wipe entire seat sec-
wipe with a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use clean tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
water. the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
has been there.

ucts recommended and approved by
RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Mercedes-Benz.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat covers
Cleaning the seat belts
General notes
! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean covers G WARNING
made out of real leather, artificial leather or Seat belts may be severely weakened if
DINAMICA. If used frequently, this can dam- bleached or coloured. This may lead to the
age the cover.
seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an
Note that regular care is essential to make sure accident. There is an increased risk of injury,
that the appearance and comfort of the covers possibly even fatal.
are retained over time.
Never bleach or colour seat belts.
Genuine leather seat covers
! To retain the natural appearance of the ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
leather, observe the following cleaning cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at
instructions: temperatures above 80 † or in direct sun-
light.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked. X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
ROnly use leather care agents that have
or dry shampoo.
been tested and approved by Mercedes- X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified agents recommended and approved by
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz.
Leather is a natural product.
It has natural surface properties, e.g.:
Where will I find...? 357
Where will I find...? Notes on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing and stowing the reflective
safety jacket
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a tumble dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in the B Do not dry-clean
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors. There are also
C This is a class 2 jacket
Breakdown assistance
safety jacket compartments in the stowage RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-
compartments of the rear doors, in which reflec- ments defined by the legal standard only:
tive safety jackets can be stowed. - if the correct size is used
X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
the reflective safety jacket by loop ;. fastened
X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
reflective safety jacket. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll erties may otherwise be compromised.
it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower in their original packaging in a dry place away
edge of the armrest into the safety jacket from sources of heat and light.
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that RThe maximum number of washes specified is
loop ; hangs out well within reach. not the only factor influencing the life span of
X Observe the legal requirements on using the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
reflective safety jackets in each individual also depends on use, care, storage etc.
country. RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from posed of and replaced with new ones:
its packaging material before sliding it into - after 15 washes, and/or
the safety jacket compartment. The packag- - if the reflective strips have become
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out scratched, and/or
or make removing it difficult. - if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled with dirt that
cannot be cleaned off, and/or
- the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
358 Where will I find...?
Warning triangle First-aid kit

Removing the warning triangle
The first-aid kit : is in the luggage compart-

ment in the left-hand stowage net.
X Open the tailgate. X Open the tailgate.
X Open the luggage compartment floor : X Remove the first-aid kit :.
(Y page 333).
X Remove warning triangle ;.
Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least
once a year. Replace the contents if necessary,
and replace any missing items.
Setting up the warning triangle
Fire extinguisher
X Fold legs = out to the side.

X Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a tri-
angle and lock them at the top using press The fire extinguisher is located underneath the
stud :. front of the driver's seat.
X Pull tab : upwards.
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use
and checked every one or two years. It may oth-
erwise fail in an emergency.
Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
vidual country.
Where will I find...? 359
Towing eye Removing the TIREFIT kit
The towing eye : is located in the left-side The TIREFIT kit is located in the left-hand stow-
stowage well under the luggage compartment age space.
floor. X To remove: open the tailgate.
X To remove: open the tailgate. X Open luggage compartment floor
X Open luggage compartment floor (Y page 333).
(Y page 333). X Push retaining clamps : on the cover down-
X Remove the towing eye :. wards to release them.
X Fold up the cover in the direction of arrow ;.
X Remove tyre inflation compressor = and tyre
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit sealant bottle ?.
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 361).
General notes
i You can find information on the power cat-
egory and/or electrical details on the back of Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit
the tyre inflation compressor.
General notes
RLK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
At a distance of approximately 1 m from the Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi-
tyre inflation compressor and approximately cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
1.6 m above the ground, the following sound Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to
pressure level applies: the vehicle. For more information on which tyre-
RSound power level LWA91 dB (A)
changing tools are required and approved for
performing a tyre change on your vehicle, con-
The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance- sult a qualified specialist workshop.
free. If it develops a fault, please contact a Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for
qualified specialist workshop. example:
Rjack
Rwheel chock
Rwheel wrench
Rcentring pin
i The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.

The maximum load-bearing capacity of the
jack can be found on the adhesive label on the
jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If it develops a
fault, please contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
360 Flat tyre
Removing the tyre-change tool kit Assistance Centre for the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system (Y page 340).
Information on changing and fitting a wheel
(Y page 386).
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from
traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 178).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
Example
: Ratchet for jack or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
or KEYLESS‑GO:
; Wheel wrench
= Jack The vehicle electronics are now in position
? Centring pin u. This is the same as the key having been
A Socket wrench for ratchet removed.
B Folding wheel chock X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the stow- tion lock (Y page 154).
age well, on the left, under the luggage com- X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
partment floor. gered as they get out of the vehicle. Make
X To remove: open the tailgate. sure that no one is near the danger area while
a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
X Open luggage compartment floor
directly assisting in the wheel change should,
(Y page 333). for example, stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
Flat tyre X Close the driver's door.
X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance
Preparing the vehicle
away (Y page 358). Observe legal require-
Your vehicle may be equipped with: ments.
RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
acteristics) (Y page 360)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi- Vehicles with MOExtended tyres
cles with MOExtended tyres. (tyres with run-flat characteristics)
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 359)
Ran emergency spare wheel (certain countries
General notes
only) (Y page 390) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equip- acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
ped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is there- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
fore recommended that you additionally equip or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show
your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that any clearly visible damage.
do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. win- You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the
ter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a "MOExtended" mark that appears on the tyre
qualified specialist workshop. sidewall. You will find this mark next to the tyre
Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call size designation, the load-bearing capacity and
system that are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit: the speed index.
in the event of a flat tyre, contact the Customer
Flat tyre 361
MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunc- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
tion with an activated tyre pressure loss warning There is a risk of accident.
system or tyre pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
on the multifunction display: Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu-
Robserve the instructions
vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot-
in the display mes-
sages (Y page 291) holes, off-road). This applies in particular to a
Rcheck the tyre for damage laden vehicle.
Rif driving on, observe the following notes Stop driving in emergency mode if:
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is Ryou hear banging noises.
approximately 80 km when the vehicle is parti- Rthevehicle starts to shake.
ally laden and approximately 30 km when the
vehicle is fully laden. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- RESP® is intervening constantly.
tance possible in run-flat mode depends on the: Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre.
Rvehicle speed
After driving in emergency mode, have the
Rroad condition
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
Routside temperature
workshop with regard to their further use. The
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode faulty tyre must be replaced.
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/
manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is TIREFIT kit
counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss
warning appears on the multifunction display. Important safety notes
You must not exceed a maximum permissible TIREFIT is a tyre sealant.
speed of 80 km/h. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
When replacing one or all tyres, observe the fol- 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You
lowing specifications for your vehicle's tyres: can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down
Rsize to Ò20 †.
Rtype G WARNING
Rthe "MOExtended" mark
In the following situations, the tyre sealant is
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
or winter tyre). larger than those mentioned above.
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equip- Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
ped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is there-
fore recommended that you additionally equip Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that or on a flat tyre.
do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. win- There is a risk of an accident.
ter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
G WARNING
G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
When driving in emergency mode, the driving tion. It must not come into contact with your
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
Z
362 Flat tyre
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away

from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tyre sealant,
RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
and seek medical attention immediately.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
RImmediately change out of clothing which valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
has come into contact with tyre sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of

the filler hose. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the tyre sealant bottle with
filler hose in the plastic bag which is con-
tained the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist X Pull connector ? with cable and hose A out
workshop. of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
X Push connector on hose A into flange B on
! Do not operate the tyre inflation compres- tyre sealant bottle : until the connector
sor for longer than ten minutes at a time with- engages.
out a break. It may otherwise overheat. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- into recess ; of the tyre inflation compres-
ated again once it has cooled down. sor.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tyre inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects that have
penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails.
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation
compressor from the stowage space under-
neath the luggage compartment floor
(Y page 359).
X Remove cap from valve C on faulty tyre.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
Flat tyre 363
X Insert connector ? into cigarette lighter tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre
socket (Y page 337) or into another 12 V pressure that is too low can significantly
socket in your vehicle (Y page 338).
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
(Y page 153). acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
X Press on/off switch = on tyre inflation com- Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
pressor. specialist workshop.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inflated. Countries with Mercedes-Benz Service24h:
First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The you will find a sticker with the telephone number
pressure may briefly rise to approximately on the B-pillar on the driver's side, for example.
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- Tyre pressure reached
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a
G WARNING
maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
then have reached a pressure of at least impairs the driving characteristics and is not
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has accident.
been attained after ten minutes, see "Tyre pres- You should therefore adapt your driving style
sure reached" (Y page 363).
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tyre that
not been attained after ten minutes, see "Tyre
pressure not reached" (Y page 363). has been repaired using tyre sealant.
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the The maximum permissible speed for a tyre
affected area as quickly as possible. It is pref- sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper
erable to use clear water. part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- the driver.
lene.
If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been reached after ten minutes:
Tyre pressure not reached
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
not been reached after ten minutes: faulty tyre.
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler hose
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
is unscrewed.
faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation
Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler hose compressor and the warning triangle.
is unscrewed. X Pull away immediately.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- X Stop after driving for approximately ten
imately 10 m. minutes and check the tyre pressure with the
X Pump up the tyre again. tyre inflation compressor.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tyre The tyre pressure must now be at least
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
29 psi).
G WARNING
G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached
If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too
after the specified time, the tyre is too badly badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres
Z
364 Battery (vehicle)
and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif- Battery (vehicle)
icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-
ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident. 12 V battery – important safety notes
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the sepa-
specialist workshop. rate operating instructions. You could otherwise
fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high volt-
Countries with Mercedes-Benz Service24h: age.
you will find a sticker with the telephone number Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting,
on the B-pillar on the driver's side, for example. requires specialist knowledge and the use of
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
special tools. Therefore, always have work on
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres- the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
sure table on the fuel filler flap for values. workshop.
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on G WARNING
the tyre inflation compressor. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-

ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen braking
X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pres- Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres
sure release button : next to pressure and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
gauge ;. adapted to the road conditions
X When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew There is a risk of an accident.
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
tyre. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler hose dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
is unscrewed. immediately. Do not drive any further. Always
X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the have work on the battery carried out at a
sealed tyre. qualified specialist workshop.
X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre
inflation compressor. Further information on ABS (Y page 72) and
ESP® (Y page 76).
The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
ion battery:
shop and have the tyre changed there.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon G WARNING
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
four years at a qualified specialist workshop. sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
Battery (vehicle) 365
The highly flammable gas mixture is created H Environmental note

while the battery is charging and when jump-
starting. Batteries contain pollutants.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- It is illegal to dispose of them
tery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic with the household rubbish.
charge is created, for example: They must be collected sep-
Rby wearing synthetic-fibre clothing arately and disposed of in an
Rby friction between clothing and the seat environmentally responsible
Rif you pull or push the battery across carpet or
recycling system.
other synthetic materials Dispose of batteries in an
Rif you rub the battery with a cloth environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
G WARNING batteries to a qualified spe-
During the charging process, a battery produ- cialist workshop or to a col-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or lection point for used batter-
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ies.
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
connected battery does not come into con- qualified specialist workshop.
tact with vehicle parts. Observe the service intervals in the Service
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- Booklet or contact a qualified specialist work-
shop for more information.
tery.
RIt is important that you observe the descri- ! Always have work on the batteries carried
bed order of the battery terminals when out at a qualified specialist workshop.
connecting and disconnecting a battery. If it is necessary to disconnect the 12-volt
battery yourself, please observe the follow-
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the ing:
battery poles with identical polarity are Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
connected. away
RIt is particularly important to observe the Rswitch off the ignition
described order when connecting and dis- Rdisconnect the negative terminal first and
connecting the jump leads. then the positive terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery The transmission is locked in position j
terminals while the engine is running. after disconnecting the battery.
After the work is completed, securely refit the
G WARNING battery and the positive terminal cover.
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Risk of explosion.
Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not
lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out
of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off
battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean Fire, naked flames and smoking are
water and seek medical attention at once. prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
All vehicles:
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-
sive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes and clothing.
Z
366 Battery (vehicle)
Wear suitable protective clothing; in All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
particular, gloves, an apron and a ion battery:
face mask.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid charging voltage of 14.8 V.
splashes off with clean water. Con-
sult a doctor if necessary. G WARNING
Wear eye protection. During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Keep children at a safe distance. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
mends that you use only batteries that have Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not
been tested and approved for your vehicle by lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off
occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean
battery be damaged in the event of an accident. water and seek medical attention at once.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it should always be suffi- G WARNING
ciently charged. A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
In such cases, have the battery disconnected at
a qualified specialist workshop. However, you can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
can also charge the battery with a charger rec- an explosion.
ommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more infor- Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
mation, please contact a qualified specialist charging it or jump-starting.
workshop.
Have the battery charge checked more fre- All vehicles:
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short
trips or if you leave it standing idle for an exten- ! Only charge the battery using the jump-start
ded period. Consult a qualified specialist work- connection point.
shop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up The jump-starting connection point is in the
for a long period of time. engine compartment (Y page 367).
When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you X Open the bonnet.
do not require any electrical consumers. The X Connect the battery charger in the same
vehicle will then use very little energy, thus con-
order as when connecting the donor battery
serving battery power.
during jump-starting: to the positive terminal
and earth point (Y page 367).
Charging the 12 V battery Keep away from fire and naked flames. Do not
lean over the battery. Never charge the battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: if it is still fitted to the vehicle, unless you are
using a battery charger that has been tested and
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
charging voltage of 14.4 V. unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Jump-starting 367
cles and tested and approved by Mercedes- the battery. The service life of a battery that has
Benz is available as an accessory. This device been thawed may be reduced. The starting char-
permits charging of the battery while it is fitted. acteristics may be impaired, especially at low
Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for temperatures. Have the thawed battery
information and availability. Read the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
charger's operating instructions before charg- Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low
ing the battery. temperatures, do not use a battery charger to
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- charge a battery that has been removed. Allow
ion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.
on the instrument cluster do not light up at low Otherwise, the service life may be reduced and
temperatures, it is very likely that the dis- the starting characteristics impaired, especially
charged battery has frozen. In this case, you at low temperatures.
may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge
Jump-starting
Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the separate operating instructions. You could otherwise fail
to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a pos-
itive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid
thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
Z
368 Jump-starting
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are
low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-
start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be
reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the
thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles:
! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the
non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jump leads. Observe
the following points:
Rthe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system
are cold.
RAll vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery
is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may be performed using only batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
RUse only jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jump leads are not damaged
Rnon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jump leads are connected to the battery
Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps on the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the key in the ignition lock, turn the key to position u and remove it
(Y page 153).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.
X Open the bonnet.
Towing away and tow-starting 369
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the
jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to earth point ? of your vehicle using the jump
lead, Connect the jump lead to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jump leads from earth point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive
terminal : and positive terminal ;. Each time, begin at the contacts on your own vehicle.
X Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing the jump leads.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing away and tow-starting G WARNING

Safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available if:
Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the sepa-
Rthe engine is not running.
rate operating instructions. You could otherwise
fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high volt- Rthe brake system or the power steering is
age. malfunctioning
Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical
system is malfunctioning.
If your vehicle is towed, significantly greater
force may be required to steer the vehicle or
to brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Z
370 Towing away and tow-starting
In such circumstances, use a towing bar. ! Observe the following points when towing
Make sure that the steering is moving freely with a tow rope:
before towing. RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
both vehicles.
G WARNING RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer
than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehi- the middle, e.g. with a white cloth
cle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road
an accident. users aware that a vehicle is being towed.
Always switch on the ignition when towing ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
with a tow rope or a towing bar. eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch.
RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
G WARNING vehicle while driving. Always maintain a dis-
tance a distance so that the tow rope does
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle not sag.
and its weight is greater than the permissible RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
gross weight of your vehicle, the: your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
Rtowing eye may be torn off the vehicle.
Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or ! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery
even overturn or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
recovery. This could damage the vehicle. If in

There is a risk of an accident. doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, crane.
its weight should not be greater than the per-
! When towing, pull away slowly and
missible gross weight of your vehicle. smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- ! Shift the automatic transmission to position
tification plate (Y page 393). i and do not open the driver's or front-
passenger door when towing the vehicle
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot away. Otherwise, the automatic transmission
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, may shift to position j and this can cause
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain damage to the transmission.
situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of
these systems in the following or similar sit- 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not
uations: be exceeded.
Rwhen towing away
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire
vehicle must be lifted up and transported.
Rin a car wash
Observe the legal requirements in each individ-
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is ual country when towing.
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, It is better to have the vehicle transported than
visit a qualified specialist workshop. to have it towed.
! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehi- The automatic transmission must be in position
cle. i when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto-
matic transmission cannot be shifted to position
i, have the vehicle transported on a trans-
porter or trailer.
Towing away and tow-starting 371
The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock
Rcannot release the electric parking brake
Rcannot shift the transmission to position i
on vehicles with automatic transmission
Deactivate the automatic locking feature before
towing the vehicle (Y page 92). You could oth-
erwise be locked out when pushing or towing
the vehicle.
Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehi-
cle is towed (Y page 83).
Fitting/removing the towing eye

Fitting the towing eye All other vehicles
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
G WARNING located in the bumpers. They are located at the
The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. rear and at the front, under covers :.
There is a risk of burning when removing the X Remove the towing eye from the bracket
rear cover. (Y page 359).
Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use a suitable
extreme caution when removing the rear object, e.g. a screwdriver, to prise off
cover. cover : on the front bumper from under-
neath. Take the cover from the opening, but
do not remove it.
Press the mark on cover : on the rear
bumper inwards and remove.
X All other vehicles: press the mark on
cover : inwards and remove.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a
bracket at the rear for the screw-in towing eye.
Connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch
(Y page 237).
Removing the towing eye

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
it engages.
Z
372 Towing away and tow-starting
Towing the vehicle away with all When transporting, make sure that:
wheels on the ground Rthe vehicle has been loaded onto the trans-
The automatic transmission automatically shifts porter correctly
to position j when you open the driver's or Rthe vehicle is secured at all four wheels with
front-passenger door or when you remove the
suitable tensioning straps
key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that
the automatic transmission stays in position i Rthe maximum permissible speed of
when towing away the vehicle, you must 60 km/h is not exceeded
observe the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. ! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
lock.
A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and
10 cm downwards must be maintained to the
depressed.
transport platform.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i. X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehi-
cle.
X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
General notes
X Release the electric parking brake.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 123).
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for
the desired direction flash. When you reset the
combination switch, the hazard warning lamps
start flashing again.
Transporting the vehicle ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
Damping System PLUS) over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
G WARNING otherwise be damaged.
The lower damping forces of the vehicle to be ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
transported can cause the vehicle/trailer wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
combination to swing. axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehi- The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be used
to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if
cle/trailer combination may start to skid. you wish to transport it.
Consequently, you could lose control of your
vehicle. lock.
There is a risk of accident and injury. X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
Fuses 373
As soon as the vehicle is loaded: result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away by and injury.
applying the electric parking brake. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
fuses of the correct amperage.
j.
X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
and remove it. same rating, which you can recognise by the
X Secure the vehicle. colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles luggage compartment (Y page 375).
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
the transmission may be damaged. Centre.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away ! Only use fuses that have been approved for
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
and transported. correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or dam- Otherwise, components or systems could be
age to the front or rear axle, have it transported damaged.
on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
the automatic transmission to position N, you lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
system in the same way as when jump-starting ation of the fuses.
(Y page 367). The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty cir-
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or cuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the
trailer. circuit and their functions will fail.
Tow-starting (emergency engine Before replacing a fuse

starting)
Observe the important safety notes
! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic (Y page 373)
transmission. You could otherwise damage X Switch off the engine.
the automatic transmission. X Switch off all electrical consumers.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Make sure that the ignition is switched off
under (Y page 367). (Y page 154).
or
X When using the key, turn the key to position
Fuses u in the ignition lock and remove the key
(Y page 153).
Important safety notes X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty All indicator lamps on the instrument cluster
must be off.
fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the
electric cables could be overloaded. This may
Z
374 Fuses
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard
Rfuse box in the front-passenger footwell
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side
Rfuse box under the luggage compartment
floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle,
when viewed in the direction of travel
Dashboard fuse box

The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the
X Open the bonnet (Y page 345).
dashboard. You can obtain further information X To open: turn fasteners ; on the cover :
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. anti-clockwise as far as they will go.
X Remove fuse box cover : upwards.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse

box using a dry cloth.
X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and
X Open the front-passenger door. remove it.
X To open: fold cover : out towards the rear X To close: check whether the seal is posi-
and remove it. tioned correctly in lid ?.
X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the
X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. fuse box.
X Fold cover : forwards until it engages. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten
screws =.
X Insert cover : and turn fasteners ; clock-
Fuse box in the engine compartment wise as far as they will go.
X Close the bonnet.
G WARNING
When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
the ignition before opening the bonnet.
Fuses 375
Fuse box in the luggage compartment
To open
X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards (Y page 333).
X Release the Velcro fastener and lift up
cover : in the recess trim panel of the lug-
gage compartment in the direction of the
arrow.
To close
X Fold back cover : in the opposite direction
to the arrow and close the Velcro fastener.
Make sure that cover : lies in the opening pro-
vided for it in the recess trim panel.
i The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on the
side of the fuse box. You can find the corre-
sponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse
allocation chart.
Z
376 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tyres

can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations"
(Y page 389).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz
the wheel brakes or suspension components Service Centre.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tyre pressure can be found:
dent. Rin the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Always replace wheels and tyres with those (Y page 173)
that fulfil the specifications of the original Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 379)
part. Modifications to the brake system and wheels
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the are not permitted. The use of spacers or brake
dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates
correct: the general operating permit for the vehicle.
Rdesignation
i Further information on wheels and tyres can
Rtype be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the shop.
correct:
Rdesignation
Operation
Rmanufacturer
Rtype
Information on driving
When the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tyre
G WARNING pressures and adjust them prior to a trip.
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer- While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
Wheels and tyres
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.

ing to one side. This may indicate that the
There is a risk of accident. wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that
Tyres without run-flat characteristics: a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden
Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your tyre damage could also be causing the unusual
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
consult a qualified specialist workshop. damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:
When parking your vehicle, make sure not to
Rpay attention to the information and warn- squash the tyre. If you cannot avoid driving over
ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres obstacles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an
with run-flat characteristics). obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage
the wheel rims and tyres.
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair operating safety. Regular checking of wheels and tyres
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- G WARNING
shop and enquire about: Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-
Rsuitability sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
Rlegal stipulations your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Rfactory recommendations Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
Operation 377
Check wheels and tyres for damage at least the condition of the tread across the entire
once a month. Check wheels and tyres after width of all tyres.
driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged
wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Minimum tyre tread depth for:
Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm
Rcuts in the tyres RM+S tyres: 4 mm
Rpunctures For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
Rtears in the tyres the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rbulges on the tyres tyre tread depth is reached.
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on the
wheels
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tyre (Y page 377). If necessary, turn the G WARNING
front wheels to full lock to make it easier to
inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capa-
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the city and the approved maximum speed could
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit any- lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There
thing onto the valve other than the standard is a risk of accident.
valve cap or other valve caps specially approved Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres-
sure monitors. tyre load rating and speed rating required for
Check the pressure of all tyres regularly as well your vehicle.
as prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressures
as necessary (Y page 379). Pay special attention to country-specific
requirements for tyre approval. These require-
Wheels and tyres

Observe the notes on the emergency spare ments may stipulate a specific tyre type for your
wheel (Y page 390). vehicle. Furthermore, the use of a specific tyre
The service life of a tyre depends on various fac- type in certain regions and areas of operation
tors, including the following: can be highly beneficial. You can find further
Rdriving style information regarding tyres at specialist tyre
Rtyre pressure retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Rmileage
Ruse only tyres and wheels of the same type
and make
exception: it is permissible to fit a different
Notes on the tyre tread type or make in the event of a flat tyre,
observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with
G WARNING run-flat characteristics)" section
Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac- (Y page 360)
tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate Rfit only tyres of the correct size onto the
water. This means that on wet road surfaces, wheels
the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular Rrun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
where speed is not adapted to suit the driving first 100 km, they reach their full performance
conditions. There is a risk of accident. only after this distance
Rdo not drive with tyres that have too little
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres
tread depth, this significantly reduces trac-
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- tion on wet roads (aquaplaning)
ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you Rreplace the tyres after six years at the latest,
should regularly check the tread depth and regardless of wear
Z
378 Winter operation
Observe the notes on the emergency spare Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
wheel (Y page 390). and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat

characteristics) M+S tyres
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- G WARNING
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they
or more tyres.
do not provide sufficient traction. There is a
MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunc-
risk of accident.
tion with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system or with an activated tyre pressure mon- M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
itor and only on wheels specifically tested by 4 mm must be replaced.
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or
flat tyre (Y page 360). all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equip- by the M+S marking.
ped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is there- Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
fore recommended that you additionally equip symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. win- Only these tyres will allow driving safety sys-
ter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-
qualified specialist workshop. mally in winter. These tyres have been devel-
oped specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
Wheels and tyres
Winter operation
tics.
General notes Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fit-
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified ted.
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix
section (Y page 385). an appropriate warning label in the driver's field
of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified
Driving with summer tyres Under these circumstances, you should also
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose restrict the maximum design speed of the vehi-
elasticity and therefore traction and braking cle using the permanent limiter so that it does
power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold the M+S tyres (Y page 191).
temperatures could cause tears to form, When you have fitted the M+S tyres:
thereby damaging the tyres permanently. X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 379).
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
this type of damage.
(Y page 381).
G WARNING X Restart the tyre pressure monitor
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres- (Y page 383).
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of Information about driving with an emergency
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. spare wheel (Y page 390).
Tyre pressure 379
Snow chains Tyre pressure

G WARNING Tyre pressure specifications
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
G WARNING
wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the
cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. following risks:
There is a risk of an accident. Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load
To avoid hazardous situations: and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or
Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs.
traction.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
mends that you use only snow chains that have ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
been approved for Mercedes-Benz or that are of There is a risk of an accident.
an equivalent standard of quality. For more
information, please contact a qualified special- Observe the recommended tyre pressure and
ist workshop. check the tyre pressure of all the tyres includ-
If you wish to fit snow chains, please observe the ing the spare wheel:
following: Rat least every two weeks
Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/tyre
Rwhen the load changes
combinations, observe the information
regarding permitted wheel/tyre combina- Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
tions (Y page 389) Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
Ruse snow chains only if the road surface is road driving
Wheels and tyres

completely snow-covered and remove the If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered
Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
G WARNING
chains, observe the appropriate regulations if If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre
you wish to fit snow chains valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure
speed of 50 km/h loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-
Ron vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, you sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This
must drive only at a raised vehicle level if can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a
snow chains have been fitted (Y page 205) risk of accident.
Ryou must never use Parking Pilot (Y page 208)
when snow chains are fitted Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps
specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for
You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling
away with snow chains fitted: your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
G WARNING
(Y page 77)
RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 77) If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
This allows the wheels to spin in a controlled wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre
manner, achieving increased propulsive force pressure that is too low may result in a tyre
(cut). blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
Information about driving with an emergency RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.
spare wheel (Y page 390). RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
Z
380 Tyre pressure
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- If possible, correct tyre pressures only when the
tact a qualified specialist workshop. tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
H Environmental note Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
and
every 14 days.
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1.6 km
The recommended tyre pressures for various
operating conditions can be found on the tyre Depending on the outside temperature, the
pressure table inside the fuel filler flap vehicle speed and the load on the tyres, the tyre
(Y page 173). temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes
Operation with emergency spare wheel: by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per
10 †. Take this into account when checking the
information on operation with the emergency
pressure of warm tyres. Correct the tyre pres-
spare wheel can be found under "Emergency
sure only if it is too low for the current operating
spare wheel" (Y page 390).
condition.
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value
Driving with a tyre pressure that is too high or
for the rear axle is the maximum value stated on
too low can:
the tyre pressure table inside the fuel filler flap.
Rshorten the service life of the tyres
The tyre pressure table may also state tyre pres-
sures for different load conditions. These are Rcause increased tyre damage
defined on the table as different numbers of Rhave a negative effect on handling character-
passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual istics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplan-
number of seats may differ from this. ing)
If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures The tyre pressure values given for low loads are
stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all minimum values that offer you good driving
tyres approved at the factory for this vehicle. comfort characteristics.
Wheels and tyres
However, you can also use the values given for

higher loads. These are permissible and will not
adversely affect the running of the vehicle.
Tyre pressure loss warning system

General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tyre pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
If one or more tyre sizes precedes a tyre pres- pressure loss in a tyre. If the rotational speed of
sure, the following tyre pressure information is a wheel changes as a result of a loss of tyre
valid only for that tyre size. pressure, a corresponding warning message will
If the tyre sizes are followed by the + symbol, appear on the multifunction display.
the following tyre pressure information shows You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warn-
alternative tyre pressures. These tyre pressures ing by the Run Flat Indicator active
can improve the driving comfort of your vehicle. Restart with OK message, which appears on
Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. the Service menu of the multifunction display.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre Information on the message display can be
pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss
not give any reliable indication of the tyre pres- warning system" section (Y page 381).
sure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre
pressure monitor, you can also check the tyre
pressure using the on-board computer.
Tyre pressure 381
Important safety notes X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the menu list.
The tyre pressure warning system does not warn X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe select the Service menu.
the notes on the recommended tyre pressure
(Y page 379).
wheel.
The tyre pressure loss warning system does not
replace the need to regularly check the tyre X Select Tyre pressure by pressing 9
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several or :.
tyres at the same time cannot be detected by X Press a to confirm.
the tyre pressure loss warning system. The Run Flat Indicator active message
The tyre pressure loss warning system is not is shown on the multifunction display
able to warn you of a sudden loss of air, e.g. if the Restart with OK.OK
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In this If you wish to confirm the restart:
event, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking
carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. X Press button a.
The Tyre pressure now OK? message is
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning shown on the multifunction display.
system is limited or delayed if:
X Select Yes by pressing 9 or :.
Rsnow chains are fitted on your vehicle
Rroad conditions are wintry The Run Flat Indicator restarted mes-
Ryou are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or sage is shown on the multifunction display.
gravel) After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- warning system will monitor the set tyre pres-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of sures of all four tyres.
acceleration)
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
X Press button %.
Wheels and tyres

cle or on the roof) or
X If the Tyre pressure now OK? message
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn- appears, press 9 or : to select Can‐
ing system cel.
cel
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if The tyre pressure values stored at the last
you have: restart will continue to be monitored.
Rchanged the tyre pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tyres
Rfitted new wheels or tyres Tyre pressure monitor
X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre
General notes
pressures are set properly on all four tyres for
the respective operating conditions. The rec- If a tyre pressure monitor is fitted, the vehicle's
ommended tyre pressures can be found in the wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre
tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure
The tyre pressure loss warning system can monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one
only give reliable warnings if you have set the or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor
correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre functions only if the corresponding sensors are
pressure is set, this incorrect value will be fitted to all wheels.
monitored. Information on tyre pressures is shown on the
X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pres- multifunction display. After a few minutes of
sures (Y page 379). driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the shown on the Service menu of the multifunc-
ignition lock (Y page 153). tion display; see illustration (example).
Z
382 Tyre pressure
too low, the tyre pressure monitor is not mal-

functioning
Rif the warning lamp flashes for approximately
one minute and then remains lit constantly,
the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears on the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 291).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tyre pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tyre pres-
For further information on displaying this mes- sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
sage, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure one minute and then remaining lit. When the
electronically" section (Y page 382). fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warn-
ing lamp goes out after you have driven for a few
Important safety notes minutes.
The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre board computer may differ from those meas-
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- ured at a filling station using a pressure gauge.
sure suitable for the operating situation The tyre pressures shown by the on-board com-
(Y page 379). Note that the correct tyre pres- puter refer to those measured at sea level. At
sure for the current operating situation must high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indica-
first be learnt by the tyre pressure monitor. If a ted by a pressure gauge are higher than those
substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning shown by the on-board computer. In this case,
threshold for the warning message is aligned to do not reduce the tyre pressures.
the learnt reference values. Restart the tyre The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can
pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre
Wheels and tyres
be affected by interference from radio transmit-

pressure (Y page 383). The current pressures ting equipment (e.g. cordless headphones, two-
are saved as new reference values. This ensures way radios) that may be being operated in or
that a warning message appears only if the tyre near the vehicle.
pressure drops significantly.
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the
Checking the tyre pressure electroni-
notes on the recommended tyre pressure cally
(Y page 379). X Make sure that the key is in position 2
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn (Y page 153) in the ignition lock .
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
is penetrated by a foreign object. In this event, the menu list.
bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres.
select the Service menu.
The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp on the instrument cluster for indicating a
pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how wheel.
the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre X Select Tyre pressure by pressing 9
pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the or :.
tyre pressure monitor is indicated: X Press a to confirm.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre The multifunction display shows the current
pressure on one or more tyres is significantly tyre pressure of each wheel.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the following message appears:
Tyre pressures will be displayed
after a few minutes of driving.driving
Tyre pressure 383
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure moni- pressure. However, you can also set reference
tor automatically detects new wheels or new values manually as described here. The tyre
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre
pressure values to the individual wheels is not pressure values.
possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
message is shown instead of the tyre pressure to ensure that the tyre pressure is set cor-
display. The tyre pressures are already being rectly in all four tyres for the current operating
monitored. conditions.
After an emergency spare wheel has been fitted, Also observe the notes in the section on tyre
the system may still display the tyre pressure of pressures (Y page 379).
the removed wheel for a few minutes. If this
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
occurs, note that the value displayed for the
ignition lock (Y page 153).
position where the spare wheel is fitted is not
the same as the current tyre pressure of the X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
emergency spare wheel. the menu list.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
Warning messages of the tyre pressure select the Service menu.
monitor X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure X Select Tyre pressure by pressing 9
loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is or :.
shown on the multifunction display. The yellow X Press a to confirm.
tyre pressure warning lamp then lights up: The multifunction display shows the current
RIf the Please correct tyre pressure tyre pressure of each wheel or the Tyre
message appears on the multifunction dis- pressures will be displayed after a
play, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is few minutes of driving message.
too low. The tyre pressure must be corrected X Press button :.
when the opportunity arises.
Wheels and tyres

The Use current pressures as new ref‐
RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears on erence values message is shown on the
the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in multifunction display.
at least one tyre has dropped significantly.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
The tyres must be checked.
RIf the Warning tyre defect message X Press button a.
appears on the multifunction display, the tyre The Tyre press. monitor restarted mes-
pressure in at least one tyre has dropped sud- sage is shown on the multifunction display.
denly. The tyres must be checked. After you have been driving for a few minutes,
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the the system checks whether the current tyre
display messages in the "Tyres" section pressures are within the specified range. The
(Y page 291). new tyre pressures are then accepted as ref-
If the position of the wheels on the vehicle is erence values and monitored.
changed, the tyre pressures may be displayed in If you wish to cancel the restart:
the wrong positions for a short time. After a few X Press button %.
minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre
The tyre pressure values stored at the last
pressures are displayed in the correct positions.
restart will continue to be monitored.
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rently set tyre pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tyre
Z
384 Tyre pressure
Radio type approval for the tyre pres- Country Radio type approval number
sure monitor
Philippines
Country Radio type approval number
Abu Dhabi, TRA
Dubai, REGISTERED NO: NTC
United Arab ER0099792/12. Type Approved.
Emirates DEALER NO: DA0047074/10 No: ESD-1306871C
Argentina Schrader GG4 Serbia
Numero de Registro CNC:
H-12338
Brazil see below
Singapore Complies with IDA Standards
European Hereby, Schrader Electronics DA 103365
Union Ltd., declares that this TPMS is
in compliance with the essen-
tial requirements and other
provisions of directive
1999/5/EC. The declaration
of conformity may be consulted
at emcteam@ schrader.co.uk
Jordan Kingdom of Jordan
Type approval for Tyre Pressure
sensor.
Manufacturer: Schrader Elec-
Wheels and tyres
tronics Ltd.
Model: GG4
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/190
Model: MC34MA4
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2011/158
Malaysia RAQP/26A/0313S/
S(13-0323)
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numero d'agrement: MR
10216 ANRT 2012
Date d'agrement:
23/11/2012
Mexico IFT: RLVSCMR14-0815
IFT: RCPSCMR14-0621
Moldova
Changing a wheel 385
Country Radio type approval number Brazil
South
Africa
TA-2012/1540 Approved
TA-2011/1370 Approved
Ukraine
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra inter-
ferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do
Schrader Electronics цім mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a
стверджує, що обладнання sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Радіопередавач моделі GG4
системи контролю тиску в
шині автомобіля відповідає Changing a wheel
вимогам Технічного
регламенту радіообладнання і Flat tyre
телекомунікаційного
кінцевого (термінального) You can find information on what to do in the
обладнання (Постанова КМУ event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assis-
№ 679 від 24 червня 2009 р.) tance" section (Y page 360). Information on
Декларація відповідності driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a
знаходиться на сайті Schrader flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assis-
Electronics та надається за tance" (Y page 360).
запитом на електрону адресу Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in
Wheels and tyres

emcteam@schrader.co.uk the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare
Schrader Electronics цім wheel is fitted according to the description
стверджує, що обладнання under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 386).
Радіопередавач моделі
MC34MA4 системи контролю
тиску в шині автомобіля Interchanging the wheels
відповідає вимогам
Технічного регламенту G WARNING
радіообладнання і Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
телекомунікаційного
кінцевого (термінального) severely impair the driving characteristics if
обладнання (Постанова КМУ the wheels or tyres have different dimensions.
№ 679 від 24 червня 2009 р.) The wheel brakes or suspension components
Декларація відповідності may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
знаходиться на сайті Schrader dent.
Electronics та надається за
запитом на електрону адресу Interchange front and rear wheels only if the
emcteam@schrader.co.uk wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure mon-

itor, electronic components are located in the
wheel.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the
area of the valve, as this could damage the
electronic components.
Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Z
386 Changing a wheel
Interchanging the front and rear wheels or tyres X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-
of differing dimensions can render the general mal" on vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL
operating permit invalid. (Y page 206).
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the X Switch off the engine.
"Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 386). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres key from the ignition lock.
differ depending on the operating conditions. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pat- or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
tern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typi- The vehicle electronics are now in position
cally wear more on the shoulders, while rear u. This is the same as the key having been
tyres wear more in the centre. removed.
On vehicles that have front and rear wheels of X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
the same size, you can interchange the wheels or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the ton from the ignition lock (Y page 154).
degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
rotation is maintained.
the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is
interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if i Apart from some country-specific variants,
necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warn- vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change
ing system (Y page 381) or the tyre pressure tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
monitor (Y page 383). specific to the vehicle. For more information
on which tools are required to perform a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali-
Direction of rotation fied specialist workshop.
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have Necessary tyre-changing tools may include,
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aqua- for example:
Wheels and tyres
planing. These advantages can only be gained if RJack

the tyres are fitted corresponding to the direc- RWheel chock
tion of rotation. RWheel wrench
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its RCentring pin
correct direction of rotation.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
Storing wheels away
Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place if they are not being used. Protect the
tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
Fitting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
position. can be found in the tyre-change tool kit
X Shift the transmission to position j. (Y page 359).
Changing a wheel 387
The folding wheel chock is an additional secur- positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the
ing measure to secure the vehicle against rolling parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
away, e.g. when changing a wheel. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
X Fold both plates upwards :. non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
X Fold out lower plate ;. flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
X Insert the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
used, e.g. use a rubber mat on tiles.
openings in base plate =.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tyre and the ground does not
exceed 3 cm.
Rdo not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rdo not lie under the raised vehicle.
Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate
X Place chocks or other suitable items under
when the vehicle is raised.
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when raising the vehicle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
Wheels and tyres

If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on
Observe the following when raising the vehi- the wheel you wish to change by about one
cle: full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
Ronly use the vehicle-specific jack that has
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incor-
rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is
raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise the vehicle
for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It is not permissible to use it to per-
form maintenance work under the vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, safeguard it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake and
Z
388 Changing a wheel
The jacking points are located just behind the

front wheel arches and just in front of the rear
wheel arches (arrows).
X Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-
changing tool kit and place it on the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are
visible.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead
of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Fitting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
Wheels and tyres
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi- replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
tioned vertically under the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until jack = sits G WARNING
completely on jacking point ; and the base If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
of the jack lies evenly on the ground. when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
X Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner ? until over. There is a risk of injury.
the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the
ground. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Removing a wheel It is imperative to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The (Y page 385).
threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs
could otherwise be damaged when the bolts Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
are tightened. for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
only wheel bolts which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
Wheel/tyre combination 389
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise

pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The tightening torque must be 150 Nm.
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the tyre-change
tool kit in the luggage compartment again.
X Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted
wheel and adjust if necessary.
Observe the recommended tyre pressures
(Y page 379).
If you are driving with the emergency spare
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
faces. tem or the tyre pressure monitor cannot func-
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
tion reliably. Restart the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system or tyre pressure monitor only once
tring pin and push it on.
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- new wheel.
tight.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: all fitted
X Unscrew the centring pin.
wheels must be equipped with functioning sen-
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- sors.
tight.
Lowering the vehicle Wheel/tyre combination

G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz
Wheels and tyres

and bolts are not tightened to the specified Service Centre.
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Have the tightening torque immediately mends that you only use tyres and wheels
checked at a qualified specialist workshop which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
after a wheel is changed.
These are specially adapted to the control
X Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hex- systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are
agon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are marked as follows:
visible. RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehicle RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
is once again standing firmly on the ground. (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)
X Place the jack to one side. RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tyre dimension variations
could cause the tyres to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
Z
390 Emergency spare wheel
could result in damage to the tyres or the Emergency spare wheel

vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam- Important safety notes
age resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and G WARNING
approved. The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type
Further information about wheels, tyres and of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
approved combinations can be obtained from and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit-
any qualified specialist workshop.
ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec- may severely impair the driving characteris-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- tics. There is a risk of accident.
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz To prevent hazardous situations:
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded RAdapt your driving style accordingly and
tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you drive carefully.
have no information about their previous
RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-
usage.
gency spare wheel if the dimensions are
! Large wheels: the lower the section width different to those of the wheel being
for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride
replaced.
comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort
and suspension comfort are reduced and the ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare
risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a wheel briefly if the dimensions are different
result of driving over obstacles increases. to those of the wheel being replaced.
The recommended tyre pressures for various RDo not switch off ESP®.
operating conditions can be found on the tyre
RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare
pressure table on the fuel filler flap. For further
wheel in question replaced at the nearest
Wheels and tyres
information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 379).

Check tyre pressures regularly and only when qualified specialist workshop. Make sure
the tyres are cold. that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the type are correct.
vehicle:
Rwith tyres of the same size across an axle When using an emergency spare wheel or spare
(left/right) wheel of a different size, you must not exceed
the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency
tyres) spare wheels.
Exception: it is permissible to fit a different
type or make in the event of a flat tyre.
Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with General notes
run-flat characteristics)" section You can ask for information regarding permitted
(Y page 360). emergency spare wheels at a Mercedes-Benz
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equip- Service Centre.
ped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is there- You should regularly check the pressure of all
fore recommended that you additionally equip your tyres, including the emergency spare
your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and cor-
do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. win- rect the pressure as necessary (Y page 379).
ter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a The value on the wheel is valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted
against the direction of rotation. Observe the
time restriction on use as well as the speed lim-
itation specified on the emergency spare wheel.
Emergency spare wheel 391
Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
If you are driving with the emergency spare
wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem or the tyre pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Restart the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system or tyre pressure monitor only once
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after an
emergency spare wheel has been fitted, the sys-
tem may still display the tyre pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value dis-
played for the position where the emergency
spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the cur-
rent tyre pressure of the emergency spare
wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheel

The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the luggage com-
partment.
X Open the luggage compartment.
X Detach the securing straps.
Wheels and tyres

X Unhook the spring hooks of the securing
straps from the retainers.
X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the emergency spare wheel.
X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the emergency spare wheel.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes under "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 386).
Z
392 Vehicle electronics
Information on technical data G WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in
Hybrid vehicles: be sure to observe the notes the vehicle, their electromagnetic radiation
in the supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for
recognise dangers.
example if:
i The technical data were determined in Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an
accordance with EU Directives. All data apply
to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data exterior aerial
may therefore differ for vehicles with optional Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly mounted
equipment. You can obtain further informa- or is not low-reflection
tion from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Vehicle electronics Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at
a qualified specialist workshop. When oper-
Tampering with the engine electron- ating two-way radios in the vehicle, always
ics connect them to the low-reflection exterior
! Only have work carried out on the engine aerial.
electronics and its associated parts, such as
control units, sensors, actuating components ! The operating permit may be invalidated if
and connector leads, at a qualified specialist the instructions for installation and use of
workshop. Vehicle components may other- two-way radios are not observed.
wise wear more quickly and the vehicle's In particular, the following conditions must be
operating permit may be invalidated. complied with:
Ronly approved wavebands may be used
Robserve the maximum permissible output
Fitting two-way radios and mobile in these wavebands
phones Ronly approved aerial positions may be used
G WARNING Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation

may cause damage to your health and to the
Technical data
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way health of others. The use of an exterior aerial
radios can interfere with the vehicle electron- takes into consideration the scientific discus-
ics if they are manipulated or retrofitted incor- sion surrounding the possible health risk posed
rectly. This could jeopardise the operating by electromagnetic fields.
safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Approved aerial positions

: Front roof area
; Rear roof area
= Rear wings
Identification plates 393
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: mum transmission output of up to 2 W

fitting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is (trunked radio/Tetra)
not permitted. Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
On the rear wings, it is recommended that you There are no restrictions when positioning the
position the aerial on the side of the vehicle aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol-
closest to the centre of the road. lowing wavebands:
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 Rtrunked radio/Tetra
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installa-
R70 cm waveband
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. R2G/3G/4G
Comply with the legal requirements for add-on
parts.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio Identification plates
equipment, use the power supply or aerial con-
nections intended for use with the basic fittings. Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi- cle identification number (VIN)
tional instructions when installing.
Deviations in respect of wavebands, maximum
transmission outputs or aerial positions must be
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed the following
values:
Waveband Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3–54 MHz X Open the front right-hand door.
You will see the vehicle identification
4 m waveband 30 W plate :.
Technical data
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144–174 MHz
Trunked radio/Tetra 10 W
380–460 MHz
70 cm waveband 35 W
400–460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
Example: vehicle identification plate
The following can be used in the vehicle without (Kuwait)
restrictions:
: Vehicle manufacturer
Rtwo-way radios with a maximum transmission ; Place of manufacture
output of up to 100 mW = Date of manufacture
Rtwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies
? Vehicle model
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
A VIN
Z
394 Service products and capacities
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-

tification plate (Y page 393).
For certain countries only: the VIN can also be
found at the lower edge of the windscreen.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank-
case. You can obtain further information from
any qualified specialist workshop.
Example: vehicle identification plate (vehi-

cles with a trailer tow hitch – all other coun- Service products and capacities
tries)
: Vehicle manufacturer Important safety notes
; EU type approval number (for certain coun-
tries only) G WARNING
= VIN Service product can be poisonous and haz-
? Maximum gross vehicle weight (kg) ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
A Maximum gross weight of vehicle combina- Observe the instructions on the respective
tion (kg) (for certain countries only) original container when using, storing and dis-
B Permissible front axle load (kg) posing off service products. Always store ser-
C Permissible rear axle load (kg) vice products in the sealed original container.
D Paint code Always keep service products out of the reach
i The data shown on the vehicle identification of children.
plate are sample data. This data are different
for every vehicle and may differ from the data H Environmental note
shown here. You can find the data applicable
Dispose of service products in an environ-
to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification
plate. mentally-responsible manner.
Technical data
Service products include the following:

Vehicle identification number (VIN) Rfuels
Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
AdBlue®
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid
Rwindscreen washer fluid
Rclimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. Use only products recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of
products that have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost goodwill gestures. They are listed in this
position. Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appro-
X Fold floor covering ; upwards. priate section.
VIN : is visible.
Service products and capacities 395
You can identify service products approved by RIffuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.
the container:
RChange any clothing that has come into
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
contact with fuel immediately.
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in Tank capacity
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
229.5). They have not necessarily been depending on the vehicle equipment.
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other designations, for example: Model Total capacity
R0W-30 GLC 220 d 4MATIC 50.0 l
R5W-30 GLC 250 d 4MATIC
R5W-40
You can obtain further information at any quali- All other models 66.0 l
fied specialist workshop or on the internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Model Of which
reserve fuel
Fuel Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 10.0 l
4MATIC
Important safety notes Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
S 4MATIC
G WARNING
All other models Approx. 7.0 l
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. Petrol
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating Fuel grade
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
Technical data
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
refuelling. you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
G WARNING Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
There is a danger of injury.
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact completely.
with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel
! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at
vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil- least 95 RON, which conforms to the Euro-
dren. pean standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equiva-
If you or others come into contact with fuel, lent specification.
observe the following: Fuel of this specification may contain up to
10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use
RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle
with water and soap immediately. using E10 fuel.
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can lead
oughly with clean water immediately. Seek to increased wear as well as damage to the
immediate medical attention. fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
Z
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating Fuel of this specification may contain up to
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam- 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle
system. using E10 fuel.
! Do not use the following: ! As a temporary measure, if the recommen-
Rpetrol
ded fuel is not available, you may also use
with more than 10% ethanol unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
RE100 (100% ethanol) 95 RON. This may reduce engine perform-
Rpetrol with methanol ance and increase fuel consumption. As much
RM100 (100% methanol) as possible, avoid driving at full throttle.
Rpetrol with additives containing metal ! As a temporary measure, if the recommen-
Rdiesel ded fuel is not available, you may also use
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- unleaded petrol in emergencies with an
mended for your vehicle. octane rating of 91 RON.
You will usually find information about the fuel Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel con-
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the sumption, and the engine power output is
label on the fuel pump, ask the filling station noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throt-
staff. tle.
GLC 250 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if If no fuel other than petrol with 91 RON or a
the recommended fuel is not available, you may lower grade is available, you should have the
also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane vehicle adapted to run on this fuel at a quali-
rating of 93 RON. fied specialist workshop.
All other models: as a temporary measure, if GLC 300 4MATIC, Mercedes-AMG GLC 43
the recommended fuel is not available, you may 4MATIC
also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane
rating of 91 RON. This may reduce engine per- ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid at least 98 ROZ, if you want maximum per-
driving at full throttle and accelerating vigo- formance from the engine. Alternatively, you
rously. Never refuel using petrol with a lower can also use unleaded petrol of at least
RON. 95 ROZ.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
Technical data
i In some countries, the petrol available may fuel is not available, you may also use regular
not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
temporarily produce unpleasant odours, 91 ROZ. Doing so results in higher fuel con-
especially on short journeys. As soon as sul- sumption and significantly reduced perform-
phur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is ance. Never refuel using fuel with a lower
used for refuelling, the odours subside. RON.
The fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ Fuel of this specification may contain up to
from the information in the Owner's Manual 10% ethanol.
depending on the country. The fuels that have Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN
been approved for your vehicle can be found on 51626–1 can lead to increased wear as well
the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler as damage to the engine and exhaust system.
flap.
Information on refuelling (Y page 173). Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not
! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not
at least 98 ROZ, that conforms to European include additives for the removal and preven-
standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification of residue build-up. Petrol must only be
tion. mixed with additives recommended by
You can otherwise impair engine output or Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for
damage the engine. use in the product description. More informa-
tion about recommended additives can be You will usually find information about the fuel
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service quality on the pump. If you cannot find the label
Centre. on the fuel pump, ask the filling station staff.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel Information on refuelling (Y page 173).
brands that have additives.
Low outside temperatures
The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
tries may not be sufficient. Residue could build In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved
up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the
case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Ser- EN 590 standard defines various climate-
vice Centre, the fuel should be mixed with the dependent temperature categories. Malfunc-
cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes- tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel
Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifica-
ratios specified on the container. tions outlined in EN 590. At unusually low out-
side temperatures, it is possible that the flow
characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insuf-
Diesel ficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer
areas may not be suitable for operation in colder
Fuel grade climatic conditions.
G WARNING i Further information on country-specific fuel
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash properties and fuel types with low-tempera-
point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of ture resistance can be obtained from oil com-
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, panies, e.g. at filling stations.
components in the exhaust system may over-
heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
AdBlue®
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
diesel fuel. Important safety notes
! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
conforms to the European standard EN 590 or vice products when handling AdBlue®
is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not (Y page 394).
conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
Technical data
as well as damage to the engine and exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
system.
Rnon-toxic
! Do not use the following: Rcolourless and odourless
Rmarine diesel Rnon-flammable
Rheating oil If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of
Rbio-diesel ammonia vapour may be released.
Rvegetable oil Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are
Rpetrol particularly irritating to the skin, mucous mem-
branes and eyes. You may experience a burning
Rparaffin
sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You
Rkerosene may also experience coughing and watery eyes.
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be
not use any special additives. Otherwise, released. Fill the AdBlue® tank only in well-ven-
engine damage may occur. tilated areas.
! In countries outside the EU, only use low-
sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of Low outside temperatures
under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con-
trol system could be damaged. AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx-
imately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered from the
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating
Z
system. Winter operation can thus be guaran- Engine oil

teed even at temperatures below -11 †.
General notes
Additives
! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO
22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue®
and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
treatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other ser-
vice products, cleaning agents or dust) lead
to:
Rincreased emission values When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notes on service products (Y page 394).
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the
Rengine damage
function and service life of an engine. After
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust gas extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves
aftertreatment system engine oils that correspond to the current tech-
Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly nical standard.
important with regard to avoiding malfunctions Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz-approved
in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys- engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
tem. engines.
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, Further information on tested and approved
e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid to engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-
refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no lon- Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recom-
ger be guaranteed. mends that you have the oil change carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Benz approval is indicated on the oil container
Filling capacities
Technical data
by the inscription "MB-Freigabe" or "MB-

Approval" and the corresponding designation,
Model Total capacity e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51.
All models 27.0 l You can find an overview of approved engine oils
on the internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering
the designation, e.g. 229.5.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Petrol engines: for certain countries, different
engine oils can be used, provided that the main-
tenance intervals are reduced. For more infor-
mation, please contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
All models 229.5, 229.6
Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour
MB-Approval pockets may form when the brakes are sub-
jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-
All models 228.51, 229.31,
229.51, 229.52 ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils bed intervals.
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
i If the engine oils listed on the table are not tant safety notes on service products
available, you may top up with the following (Y page 394).
engine oils until the next oil change: The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
RPetrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB- the Service Booklet.
Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B3 Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
RDiesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB- Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 Approval 331.0.
It may be used only once and the topping-up Information about approved brake fluid can be
quantity must not exceed 1.0 l. obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
on the Internet at
Filling capacities http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The following values refer to an oil change,

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop in accordance
including the oil filter.
with the replacement intervals and the
Model Replacement replacement confirmed in the Service Book-
amount let.
GLC 250 4MATIC 6.5 l
GLC 300 4MATIC Coolant
Mercedes-AMG
GLC 43 4MATIC Important safety notes
GLC 350 d 4MATIC 8.0 l
Technical data
G WARNING
Mercedes-AMG 9.0 l If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
GLC 63 4MATIC+ ponents in the engine compartment, it may
Mercedes-AMG ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+
Let the engine cool down before you top up
All other models 6.0 l the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is
not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
Additives clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine.
! Do not use any additives with the engine oil.
This could damage the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Brake fluid Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
G WARNING vice Products, MB Specifications for Service
The brake fluid continuously absorbs mois- Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at
ture from the air. This results in the boiling http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling
Z
400 Vehicle data
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
in countries where high temperatures prevail. risk of fire and injury.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
Make sure the windscreen washer concen-
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating. trate does not come into contact with the filler
neck.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace- ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
ment confirmed in the Service Booklet. plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
Comply with the important safety precautions WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
for service products when handling coolant age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
(Y page 394).
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and Win-
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- terFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying
freeze/anti-corrosion additive. It is responsible nozzles could become blocked.
for the following:
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water, other-
Ranti-corrosion protection
wise the level sensor may give a false reading.
Rantifreeze protection
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
Rraising the boiling point tant safety notes on service products
If antifreeze/anti-corrosion additive is present (Y page 394).
at the correct concentration, the boiling point of At temperatures above freezing:
the coolant during operation will be approx-
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
imately 130 †.
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.
The antifreeze concentrate/anti-corrosion addi-
tive concentration in the engine cooling system Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
should: At temperatures below freezing:
RBe at least 50%. This will protect the engine X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
cooling system against freezing down to water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
approximately -37 †. For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the infor-
RNot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipa-
ted as effectively. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Sum-
Technical data
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all

anti-corrosion additive concentration in accord- year round.
ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-
ucts 310.1.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled Vehicle data
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate General notes
antifreeze and corrosion protection.
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
i The coolant is checked at every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work- Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
shop. - tyres
- load
- condition of the suspension
Windscreen washer system - items of optional equipment
Ritems of optional equipment reduce the pay-
load
G WARNING
If windscreen washer concentrate comes into
contact with hot components of the engine or
Vehicle data 401
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be Mercedes-AMG GLC 43

found on the vehicle identification plate 4MATIC
(Y page 393).
Rfor certain countries only: you can find vehi- Vehicle length 4661 mm
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-
ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). Vehicle width including 2096 mm
These documents are delivered with your exterior mirrors
vehicle Vehicle width excluding 1930 mm
Observe the information relating to level con- exterior mirrors
trol:
Vehicle height 1627 mm
RAIR BODY CONTROL (Y page 205)
ROff-Road Engineering package (Y page 202) Wheelbase 2873 mm
Maximum roof load 75 kg
Dimensions and weights
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63
4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S
4MATIC+
Vehicle length 4692 mm
Vehicle width including 2096 mm
exterior mirrors
Vehicle width excluding 1931 mm
exterior mirrors
Model : ; Wheelbase 2873 mm
Height Maximum Maximum roof load 75 kg
when headroom
Technical data
opened
GLC 200 2128 mm 1974 mm GLC 200
Mercedes- 2106 mm 1920 mm Vehicle length 4656 mm

AMG GLC 43 Vehicle width including 2096 mm
4MATIC exterior mirrors
Mercedes- 2060 mm 1903 mm Vehicle width excluding 1890 mm
AMG GLC 63 exterior mirrors
4MATIC+
Mercedes- Vehicle height 1646 mm
AMG GLC 63 S
4MATIC+ Wheelbase 2873 mm
All other mod- Maximum roof load 75 kg

2126 mm 1972 mm
els
All other models
Vehicle length 4656 mm
Vehicle width including 2096 mm
exterior mirrors
Z
402 Vehicle data for off-road driving
All other models Approach/departure angle

Vehicle width excluding 1890 mm
exterior mirrors
Wheelbase 2873 mm
Maximum roof load 75 kg
Vehicle data for off-road driving

Maximum water depth
Missing values were not available at the time of
! The water depth must not exceed the speci- going to print.
fied value. Note that the permissible water The approach/departure angle should be taken
depth is less in flowing water. into account when ready to drive:
Model : ;
GLC 200 21° 22°
GLC 220 d 29° 25°
4MATIC
(253.903)
Mercedes- 25° 24°
AMG GLC 43
4MATIC
Mercedes-
The maximum water depth : when the vehicle AMG GLC 63
is ready to drive can be found in the following 4MATIC+
Technical data
table. Mercedes-
AMG GLC 63 S
Model Maximum 4MATIC+
water depth
All other mod- 31° 26°
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 300 mm els
4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 200 mm Ready to drive means a full tank, all fluids top-
4MATIC+ ped up and the driver in the vehicle.
Mercedes-AMG GLC 63 S On vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, loads up
4MATIC+ to the maximum permissible load have no influ-
All other models ence on the approach/departure angle.
300 mm
Further information on the approach/departure
angle (Y page 187).
Ready to drive means a full tank, all fluids top-
ped up and the driver in the vehicle.
Further information on driving on flooded roads Maximum gradient-climbing ability
(Y page 184).
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing ability
depends on the off-road and the road surface
conditions.
Trailer tow hitch 403
Missing values were not available at the time of weight. Do not use a noseweight of less than
going to print. 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.
Note that the payload and the rear axle load
Model Maximum gradient- are reduced by the actual payload.
climbing ability
Not all models can tow a trailer. Further infor-
Mercedes-AMG mation (Y page 236).
GLC 43 4MATIC The drawbar load reduces the permissible over-
Mercedes-AMG all load and rear axle load.
GLC 63 4MATIC+ The drawbar load acts from above onto the ball
head on the trailer tow hitch.
Mercedes-AMG The drawbar load is not included in the trailer
GLC 63 S 4MATIC+ load.
All other models 70% Model Permissible nose-
weight
If the load on the front axle is reduced when
All models 100 kg
pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front
wheels have a tendency to spin. Carefully
depress the accelerator pedal and make sure
that the wheels do not spin when driving on Permissible rear axle load when tow-
steep terrain. ing a trailer
Further information on the maximum gradient
climbing ability (Y page 187). Model Permissible axle
load
GLC 220 d 4MATIC 1390 kg
Trailer tow hitch
GLC 250 d 4MATIC
Trailer loads GLC 350 d 4MATIC 1370 kg
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a Mercedes-AMG 1280 kg
minimum gradient-climbing capability GLC 43 4MATIC
Coupé
Technical data
of 12% from a standstill)
Mercedes-AMG 1420 kg
Model GLC 63 4MATIC/
GLC 250 4MATIC 2400 kg GLC 63 S 4MATIC
GLC 300 4MATIC All other models 1380 kg
Mercedes-AMG 2460 kg
GLC 43 4MATIC
All other models 2500 kg
Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Model
All models 750 kg
Maximum drawbar load

! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-
sible to the maximum permissible nose-
Z
404
Symbols Publication details
In this manual, you will find the following sym- Internet
bols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
life, or to the health and life of others.
http://www.daimler.com
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Editorial office
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Owner's
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- Manual to the technical documentation team at
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi- the following address:
cle. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
i These symbols indicate useful instructions 70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
or further information that could be helpful to
you. otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
X This symbol designates an
instruction that you must fol-
low.
X Several consecutive sym- Vehicle manufacturer
bols indicate an instruction
with several steps. Daimler AG
(Y This symbol tells you where Mercedesstraße 137
page) you can find further informa- 70327 Stuttgart
tion on a topic. Germany
YY This symbol indicates a
warning or an instruction
that is continued on the next
page.
Dis‐ This text indicates a mes-
play sage on the multifunction
display/multimedia display.
As at 03.11.2016
Your Owner's Manuals
Digital - in the vehicle

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's
multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Printed manual - in the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Owner's Manual, you can obtain the complete multimedia
system Supplement from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Digital - on the Internet

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital - as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
GLC
Owner's Manual
GLC Owner's Manual
É2535843803Z102BËÍ
2535843803Z102
Order no. P253 0471 02 Part no. 253 584 38 03 Z102 Edition AEJ2017-1a
Mercedes-Benz

Mercedes Glc Suv 2017 x253 Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Glc Suv 2017 x253 Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

The following online version of the Owner’s Man-

Digital - in the vehicle

Printed manual - in the vehicle

Digital - on the Internet

Apple® iOS Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App

Index ....................................................... 4 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 121

Climate control ................................. 136

Opening and closing ........................... 85

Stowing and features ....................... 323

ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 349

Breakdown assistance ..................... 357

Wheels and tyres .............................. 376

Technical data ................................... 392

1, 2, 3 ... Function/notes ................................ 80

Function/notes ............................. 204 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 262

Automatic front-passenger front Switching on/off (on the centre

Brake Calling up the climate control

Charge-air pressure (on-board Pre-entry climate control (via key)

Convenience opening feature .......... 100 Function/notes ............................. 121

Driving in winter ............................. 184 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 157

Starting with the Start/Stop but- Exhaust pipe

Frequencies Before changing ............................. 373

Selecting displays .......................... 259 Intelligent Light System

Start/Stop button .......................... 154 Driving abroad ............................... 121

plug-in module (telescopic rods) .... 332 Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Transmission output (maximum) .... 392 Off-road driving

Standard display ............................ 249 Parking aid

Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehi- Reversing feature

Seat belts Engine oil ....................................... 398

Sound Steering wheel

Switching on media mode Switching between mobile

Touchpad Traffic Sign Assist

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 93 Wheels

Replacing ....................................... 132

Introduction Operating the Digital Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual provides informa- General notes

Owner's Manual G WARNING

nical documentation: director of the tech- City

Diagnostics connection ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a

Qualified specialist workshop Rtraffic rules and regulations

The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and

This information generally documents the state These include:

ROperating conditions of system components system

Service providers found on the data carrier in your vehicle docu-

Services provided by the manufacturer

Information on licences for free and open-

Function Page Function Page

i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Centre console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

A Touchpad 311 I % Back button 311

B Ã DSR (Downhill Speed J Controller 311

Centre console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work in

If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accom-

Restraint system warning lamp

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in